Home

Operating Instructions

1. 2 Pb 0 1 1000 0 01 100 Hg 0 1 1000 Cr 0 1 1000 PBB 0 1 1000 PBDE 0 1 1000 Read this first EEE Yonetmeligine Uygundur EEE Complies with Directive of Turkey This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Customers can download a copy of the original DoC for this product from our DoC server http
2. Screen display 38 37 3635 34 33 1 gt 7200 mP2 2 60i 1080 59 94i 2 1 9 9 min 32 31 3 HSeEN sl 30 4 15 1 9 9 min 29 OFF 28 6 192 5 GAIN 3 0dB 6 5 ATW Lock 27 7 SYSTEM ERROR E 34 FREC 26 8 lozx 4 16 micon gt PREC 9 xX ORS 17 TcG 00 00 00 00 ssj 25 10 pskripat p t1 m 4 SB 235 24 11 1A 12 14 18 19 21 23 13 15 20 22 1 Shutter speed mode gt 1 2 2 2 The shutter speed is set to synchro scan 1 60 1 100 1 2000 A fixed shutter speed is set HALF 2 Camera mode Displays the video method when the signals output from CCD are recorded to the P2 card or output as video signals 60P 1080 59 94P 60i 1080 59 94i or 480 59 94i 50P 1080 50P 50i 1080 50i or 576 50i 3 Proxy information display Displays the proxy recording information PROXY P2 P2 amp SD Displayed when proxy recording is started PROXY ERR Displayed when there is an error in proxy recording 4 SD memory card status display WP Write protect END No remaining free space WR ERR Write error SD The remaining amount is displayed when proxy is recorded to SD memory card Displayed only the regular mode check Flashing when the remaining capacity is one minute or less min is di
3. 1 CH 1 SHIELD GND 2 CH 1 HOT Audio input from the wireless microphone receiver CH1 HOT 3 CH 1 COLD Audio input from the wireless microphone receiver CH1 COLD 4 GND GND 5 UNREG 12 Power supply to the wireless microphone receiver 6 RX ON Power remote output to the wireless microphone receiver 7 RF WARN RF warning input from the wireless microphone receiver 8 RM5 Not used 9 RM4 Not used 10 SPARE 1 Not used 11 SPARE 2 Not used 12 EXT CLK Not used 13 CLK SHIELD Not used 14 CH 2 SHIELD GND 15 CH 2 HOT Audio input from the wireless microphone receiver CH2 HOT 16 CH 2 COLD Audio input from the wireless microphone receiver CH2 COLD 17 5 6 V Power supply to the wireless microphone receiver 18 VIDEO OUT Not used 19 VIDEO RET Not used 20 VIDEO EN Not used 21 RM 1 RM CLk Not used 22 RM 2 RM DATA Not used 23 RM 3 RM WR Not used 24 RM 5 V Not used 25 RM GND Not used Panasonic Parts No K1GB25A00010 Manufacturer Parts No HDBB 25S 05 Hirose Electric Co LIGHT 1 12 V UNREG Power supply to the light etc supplied from the battery 2 GND GND Panasonic Parts No VJS4444 206 Index Index A Generator lock ADDITIONAL DTL ttt 140 GENLOCK AGC H AREA SETTING pen HIGH SETTING Audio input Automatic black balance Auto track
4. TC SUPER Sets whether to superimpose time code display on the proxy data recorded images UPPER Superimposes the time code display at the top of the recorded images LOWER Superimposes the time code display at the bottom of the recorded images OFF Does not superimpose time code display on recorded images PROXY DISP Sets whether to display proxy information ON Displays a message OFF Does not display a message are factory settings Proxy data cannot be recorded in the following modes Loop recording In SD mode 480 59 94i 576 50i Checking the setting status Push the MODE CHECK MENU CANCEL switch on the camera towards the lt MCK MCL gt side three times to check the menu values of REC MEDIA REC MODE and TC SUPER with the mode check function Checking the version information The version of proxy recording software on the camera can be displayed the main menu SYSTEM VERSION PROXY SOFT Recording modes and recording signals video audio E Video Recording mode File format Resolution Codec Frame rate Bitrate STD 2CH MP4 MP4 320x240 QVGA MPEG 4 30 fps 24 fps 25 fps 1500 kbps Simple Profile SHQ 2CH MOV MOV 960x540 H 264 30 fps 25 fps 3500 kbps High Profile HQ 2CH MOV MOV 640x360 H 264 30 fps 25 fps 1500 kbps High Profile HQ 4CH MOV MOV 640x360 H 264 30 fps 25 fps 1500 kbps High Profile L
5. FRONT Works when the front microphone is selected W L Enabled only when wireless microphone receiver is selected REAR Enabled only when the rear microphone is selected OFF The microphone lowcut filter does not work for any input MIC LOWCUT CH2 Selects the microphone lowcut filter for input channel 2 FRONT Works when the front microphone is selected W L Enabled only when wireless microphone receiver is selected REAR Enabled only when the rear microphone is selected OFF The microphone lowcut filter does not work for any input MIC LOWCUT CH3 Selects the microphone lowcut filter for input channel 3 FRONT Works when the front microphone is selected W L Enabled only when wireless microphone receiver is selected REAR Enabled only when the rear microphone is selected OFF The microphone lowcut filter does not work for any input MIC LOWCUT CH4 Selects the microphone lowcut filter for input channel 4 FRONT Works when the front microphone is selected W L Enabled only when wireless microphone receiver is selected REAR Enabled only when the rear microphone is selected OFF The microphone lowcut filter does not work for any input LIMITER CH1 Selects the channel 1 limiter Disabled when automatic adjustment of recording levels is selected ON OFF LIMITER CH2 Selects the channel 2 limiter Disabled when automatic adjustment of recording levels is selected
6. 1 Set the camera for adjustment 1 Mount the lens on the camera Make sure to connect the lens cable N Set the SHUTTER switch to OFF and the GAIN switch to lt L gt 0 dB 3 If the lens is equipped with an extender function release the extender function 4 Make sure that HD is set in the main menu PAINT gt GAMMA GAMMA MODE SEL Also make sure that ZEBRA1 DETECT is set to 70 ZEBRA2 DETECT is set to 85 and ZEBRA2 is set to SPOT in the main menu VF gt VF DISPLAY and then close the menu Screen Change the settings if they are different 5 Set the lt ZEBRA gt switch in the viewfinder to ON 98 Chapter 5 Preparation Mounting and adjusting the lens 2 Set the screen 1 Shoot a white sheet of paper with no unevenness of color for the whole screen 2 Set the lens aperture to manual and adjust it so that the zebra pattern covers the whole viewfinder screen Make sure that the lens aperture control is between F4 to F11 Adjust the position of the lighting because the zebra pattern will not cover the whole screen if there is any unevenness in the lighting Make adjustments to avoid several light sources of different color temperature e g fluorescent lights and halogen lamp from illuminating on the white paper 3 Adjust the white balance black balance 1 Set the WHITE BAL switch to lt A gt or lt B gt a
7. Card Storage Ad 4 Clip unit Storage Card Playback za Clip image display y Format 4 5 1 P2ormicroP2 memory cards with 32 GB or lower capacity 2 microP2 memory cards that exceed 32 GB 3 Playback from the storage device is unavailable on the camera Import the contents to the P2 card before playing back 4 If you perform additional clip writing you will not be able to write back to that partition by card 5 Storage devices with a capacity of 2 TB or more cannot be formatted NOTE The lt USB3 0 gt terminal also supports USB bus power 5 V 0 9 A However there are certain devices that cannot run depending on the storage device used In such cases add a separate power supply to the storage device A storage device cannot be connected to the USB2 0 terminal sub host page 23 While connecting a storage device use the fully charged battery or an external DC power supply to avoid problems in copying or formatting operations Storage devices with capacities exceeding 2 TB 2048 GB are not supported Use a storage device within its guaranteed operational range temperature etc Do not place the storage device in a location that is unstable or subject to vibration Some storage devices may not function properly depending on the storage device and cable used Use a storage device with sufficient capacity
8. USER MENU Data file FILE By page By item F FORMAT SD CARD uv LOAD USER DATA INITIALIZE LOAD FACTORY DATA SAVE USER DATA Item IMAINTENANCE SYSTEM CHECK COLOR CHECK USER MENU Data file By page By item Item USER MENU Data file By page By item LENS ADJ F2 8 ADJ F16 ADJ Item USER MENU Data file By page By item BLACK SHADING CORRECT DETECTION DIG Item USER MENU Data file By page By item WHITE SHADING CORRECT RH SAW R H PARA RV SAW R V PARA GH SAW G H PARA G V SAW G V PARA B H SAW B H PARA B V SAW B V PARA SISISIS SIS SISISISIS ISI m Item USER MENU Data file By page By item LENS FILE ADJ LENS FILE ADJ MODE LENS R GAIN OFFSET LENS B GAIN OFFSET LENS R FLARE LENS G FLARE LENS B FLARE SISISISIS S m Item USER MENU Data file By page By item CAC ADJ CAC CONTROL lt LIST DELETE 181
9. Yellow The card slot number of the P2 card in which the clip in the cursor position is saved is displayed in yellow If the clips are recorded across multiple P2 cards all slot numbers of those cards that contain the clips are displayed NOTE The frame turns red if the inserted P2 card is in any of the following conditions RUNDOWN CARD The maximum number of overwrites on the P2 card has been exceeded DIR ENTRY NG CARD The directory structure on the P2 card is not supported AUTH NG CARD Indicates that the card is a microP2 memory card which cannot authenticate a CPS password Gray Displayed in gray when a storage device is not connected White Yellow Displayed in white when a storage device can be used Displayed in yellow when the thumbnails of clips in the storage device are displayed Red Displayed in red when a storage device is connected but cannot be used 3 Display mode Displays the types of the thumbnails to be displayed on the screen and the types of other information screens To switch between displays refer to Thumbnail screen display settings page 111 ALL Displays all clips SAME FORMAT Displays clips in the same format as the system format SELECT Displays clips selected with the lt SET gt button MARKER Displays clips with shot marks TEXT MEMO Displays clips with text memo dat
10. Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list Item USER MENU Data file SYSTEM By page By item U F SYSTEM MODE LINE amp FREQ 4 REC FORMAT J f 2 AUDIO SMPL RES 4 4 4 A REC SIGNAL ASPECT SCAN REVERSE Item USER MENU Data file SYSTEM By page By item C U F SYSTEM SETUP SETUP 7 5 4 P DFF LCD DISPLAY 4 isa USER MENU Data file SYSTEM By page By item U F HOURS METER OPERATION s P ON TIMES 9 2 Nim USER MENU Data file SYSTEM By page By item U F VERSION VERSION m Hem USER MENU Data file DPTION MENU By page By item U F OPTION ENG SECURITY FAN MODE Tm USER MENU Data file DPTION MENUJ By page By item C U F AREA SETTING AREA SELECT 182 Chapters Connecting to External Devices Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices Linking to External Devices Linking to External Devices The camera records to P2 cards These large capacity P2 cards feature outstanding transfer speeds to enable HD recording smooth editing and dubbing Connecting the external device to the lt USB2 0 gt terminal device Data files for performing nonlinear editing on a computer are transferred P
11. TC OUT terminal TC IN terminal External time code generator TC OUT gt terminal lt TC OUT gt terminal lt TC OUT gt terminal DAT Device capable of recording without delay lt TC IN gt terminal lt TC IN gt terminal lt TC IN gt terminal 1st camera 2nd camera onwards TC OUTPUT REF setting TC OUTPUT REF setting TC IN TC IN W When the external device is locked to the time code generator of the camera lt IN or lt SDI IN terminal TC OUT gt terminal Connect as required TC IN terminal Device capable of recording without delay in sync with TC IN input DAT etc TC IN terminal TC OUTPUT REF setting TC IN W When the external device is locked to the time code generator of the camera connected in a cascade configuration Reference video signal lt GENLOCK gt or SDI IN terminal lt GENLOCK IN or lt SDI IN terminal lt GENLOCK IN or lt SDI IN terminal Linc 1 1 595150105 1 Connect as required lt TC OUT gt terminal lt TC OUT gt terminal TC IN terminal Device capable of recording without delay lt TC IN gt terminal lt TC IN gt terminal lt TC IN gt terminal in sync with TC IN input DAT camera recorde
12. 4CH MOV HQ 2CH MOV LOW 2CH MOV SUPER Displays the superimposed setting status of the time code UPPER LOWER OFF PROXY ERROR Displays the operation error on the proxy module AUDIO screen Displays audio settings and the selection status of each recording channel SAMPLE RES Displays the number of audio recording bits MIC POWER MENU Displays the menu setting status of power supply to the microphone Displays the power supply status to the front microphone currently set in the main menu gt FRONT I F SETUP gt MIC AUDIO gt FRONT MIC POWER by ONJ OFF Displays whether to set supply of power to the microphone on the lt AUDIO IN gt terminal at the rear in the main menu I F SETUP MIC AUDIO gt REAR MIC POWER REAR OFF Power is not supplied to the microphone ON Power is supplied to the microphone when the lt LINE gt lt MIC gt selector switch is set to MIC and the microphone input power selector switch is set to lt 48V gt VR SELECT Displays which of CH 1 2 and CH3 4 the audio level adjustment dial is to be set as enabled to in the main menu gt I F SETUP MIC AUDIO VR SELECT LEVEL Displays the recording level adjustment method currently selected on each channel VR Displayed when manual adjustment using the adjustment dial is set CH1 2 3 4 e MENU Displayed when manual adjustme
13. PROPERTY zn Z LANGUAGE 177 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list liem USER MENU Data file SETUP By page By item U F OUTPUT SEL OUTPUT ITEM SDI OUT1 s m SDI OUT1 MODE v SDI OUT1 CHAR J V SDI OUT2 VIDEO OUT SDI2 HDMI OUT v 1080P SDI2 HDMI OUT s 3G SDI OUT MONITOR OUT MODE s MONITOR OUT ZEBRA SDI EDH s THUMBNAIL OUT 7 Item USER MENU Data file SETUP By page By item U F SDI OUT1 MARKER MARKER SW 9 ER y CENTER MARK SAFETY MARK V V V SAFETY AREA J FRAME MARK J FRAME SIG Z USER BOX V USER BOX WIDTH m USER BOX HEIGHT 4 USER BOX H POS 9 7 USER BOX V POS Item USER MENU Data file SETUP By page By item MONI OUT CENTER MARK 7 2 MARKER SAFETY MARK 9 7 SAFETY AREA V FRAME MARK m FRAME SIG Z USER BOX 4 7 J USER BOX WIDTH 7 USER BOX HEIGHT V m 7 7 7 USER BOX H POS V USER BOX V POS V Item USER ME
14. result messages You can select how messages are displayed in the viewfinder and how messages for notifying the details of changes to settings and adjustment results are displayed For example whether to display or hide some items can be selected in the main menu gt VF VF DISPLAY DISP MODE For details on operation methods refer to Setting menu basic operations page 134 W Setting changes adjustment result messages and DISP MODE settings Display hide DISP MODE setting Status for displaying messages Message 1 2 3 When the CC FILTER dial lt ND FILTER dial selection is FILTER n _ e changed 1 2 3 41 m m A B C D GAIN ndB When the gain setting is changed n 6 3 0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 When the lt WHITE BAL gt switch setting is changed en PRE 2 A KNEE gt selector switch is set to AUTO KNEE ONJ or OFF _ SS 1 100 When the shutter speed mode setting is changed gt 1 33 or When white balance is adjusted Example AWB A OK 3 2 K When black balance is adjusted Example ABB OK 4 When the extender is selected Example EXTENDER ON When the USER button is selected Example UM S GAIN 30dB When the marker select function is
15. 480 59 94i 480 59 94i 480 59 94P 480 59 94i 576 501 576 50i 576 50i 576 50P 576 50i Output type can be selected from LEVEL A or LEVEL B in the main menu gt I F SETUP OUTPUT SEL gt 3G SDI OUT This item is set to LEVEL B in the factory setting List of and output formats For details on selection of SDI OUT2 signal methods refer to Selecting video output from each terminal page 48 Frequencies in signal methods are annotated without fractions 59 94 gt 60 System mode Output method Recording format LINE amp FREQ REC FORMAT lt SDI OUT1 gt terminal lt SDI OUT2 gt terminal 1080 59 94i AVC 1100 1080 60i 1080 59 94i 1080 59 94i 501 480 59 94i AVC G50 AVC G25 DVCPRO HD 1080 501 AVC 1100 1080 50i 1080 50i 1080 50i AVC 150 576 50i AVC G50 AVC G25 DVCPRO HD 1080 59 94P AVC 1100 1080 60P 1080 59 94P 1080 59 94P 1080 59 94i 480 59 94i 1080 50P AVC 1100 1080 50P 1080 50P 1080 50P 1080 50i 576 50i 480 59 94i DVCPRO50 480 60i 480 59 94i 480 59 94i DVCPRO DV 576 501 DVCPRO50 576 50i 576 501 576 501 DVCPRO DV 48 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Adjusting the white and black balance Adjusting the white and black balance To obtain high quality video at all times using the camera
16. iem USER MENU Data file PAINT By page By item s U F GAMMA MASTER GAMMA 4 R GAMMA 7 B GAMMA GAMMA MODE SEL 4 F REC DYNAMIC LVL F REC BLACK STR LVL V REC KNEE SLOPE 4 4 V REC KNEE POINT r 4 4 P4 P4 Em USER MENU Data file PAINT By page By item S U F S CAMERA SHOOTING MODE SETTING DETAIL 2D LPF J 7 GAMMA 4 2 TEST SAW V y FLARE 9 of 4 H F COMPE y 4 7 iem USER MENU Data file IVF By page By item S 4 VF DISPLAY VF LCD CHAR 4 VF MODE 4 VF COLOR s 7 4 DISP CONDITION 4 DISP MODE 7 E OUT J 4 J DTL 4 ZEBRA1 DETECT n ZEBRA2 DETECT ZEBRA2 n m 4 LOW LIGHT LVL n RC MENU DISP 4 mE MARKER CHAR LVL n SYNCHRO SCAN DISP 4 173 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list USER MENU Data file
17. CARDS FREE CAP 225 7 GB SELECTED PART 0 6 SET HOLD SELECT RELEASE AVC EET 100 PRESS EXIT BUTTON TO EXIT This displays the connected not connected status and the storage device type 2 Display mode This indicates that the explorer screen of the storage device is currently displayed 3 Device information For TYPE S and P2STORE storage devices that allow reading writing by card SET THUMBNAIL PARTITION TYPE S P2STORE VENDOR Vendor name MODEL Model name SIZE Total capacity unit GB USED ce number of clips maximum of 23 FREE CAP Remaining capacity unit GB SELECTED PART Number of partitions selected For FAT and OTHER other storage devices PARTITION FAT OTHER VENDOR Vendor name MODEL Model name SIZE Total capacity unit GB FREE CAP Remaining capacity unit GB SELECTED PART Number of folders selected 4 Partition or folder information For TYPE S and P2STORE partition information v Displays a checkmark when a target partition is selected NO Partition number MODEL P2 card model name PARTITION NAME Name assigned to the partition DATE Partition record date TIME Partition record time SERIAL P2 card serial number For FAT and OTHER folder information v Displays a checkmark when a target partition is select
18. DTL GAIN DTL CLIP DTL SOURCE MASTER DTL A A SISISISISIS Oo SISISISISIS O SINS S S e SSIS S S S 0 Item PAINT USER MENU Data file By page By item SKIN TONE DTL 5 SKIN TONE DTL lt S ZEBRA VF S ZEBRA SDI OUT1 S ZEBRA MONI DETECT TABLE SIN NISISIO SIN NISISIO SIN 14 14 14 NIN IN INN 4 SKIN TONE GET SKIN DTL EFFECT I CENTER I WIDTH Q WIDTH Q PHASE lt 14 lt lt lt lt 4 lt lt 14 lt lt S S S 5 SISISIS S SISISIS S 172 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list item USER MENU Data file PAINT By page By item S U F KNEE LEVEL MASTER PED n 5 MANUAL KNEE E 7 4 7 KNEE MASTER POINT 4 KNEE MASTER SLOPE IS WHITE CLIP 7 WHITE CLIP LVL A KNEE POINT J J A KNEE LVL 4 Fi A KNEE RESPONSE CHROMA LEVEL DRS MODE 2 s DRS EFFECT DEPTH 4 4 5 H COLOR SW J 7 2 7 HI COLOR LVL
19. Importing to a P2 card that is different from the source P2 card may result in incomplete clips depending on the clips In this case use the reconnection function to reconfigure the clips You can switch verification during copying on and off by setting the main menu CLIP STORAGE COPY SETUP gt VERIFY You cannot import by partition to a P2 card of a different model Perform copying by clip instead Copying to a P2 card by clip You can specify a storage device clip and copy it to a P2 card 1 Open the storage device thumbnail screen 2 Select the clip you want to copy 3 Press the MENU button 4 In the main menu CLIP gt COPY gt STORAGE list move the cursor over the copy destination and press the lt SET gt button Start importing by selecting YES in the confirmation message COPY COMPLETED will be displayed when copying is completed 129 Chapterz Menu Operations This chapter describes how to operate the camera menus the structure and details of the setting menu Chapter 7 Menu Operations Setting menu structure Setting menu structure Menu types to open them Menu type Use How to open USER MENU In the main menu USER MENU SEL you can select the desired items and pages and register to USER MENU You can select them depending the purpose or frequency of use to make a unique menu structure For details refer to S
20. factory settings THUMBNAIL SETUP Item Description of settings Remark INDICATOR Selects an item to display and press the SET button Checked items are Defective clip indicator yellow red unknown clip displayed When ALL HIDE is selected other items cannot be selected indicator and incomplete clip indicator are always ALL HIDE Hides all indicators displayed regardless of the settings MARKER Displays the shot mark indicator TEXT MEMO Displays the text memo indicator IDE Displays the wide indicator PROXY Displays the proxy indicator DATA DISPLAY Selects the content to display in the time display area TC Displays the time code UB Displays the user bits TIME Displays the record time DATE Displays the record date DATE TIME Displays the record date and time CLIP NAME Displays clip names USER CLIP Displays a maximum of the first 15 letters for an English NAME language display of a user clip name SLOT Displays slot number THUMBNAIL Displays the time code of the thumbnail position TC THUMBNAIL SIZE Sets the thumbnail size displayed in a thumbnail on the screen SMALL Small thumbnail display with 4x3 and property display MEDIUM Standard thumbnail display 4x3 LARGE Large thumbnail display 3x2 are factory settings 153 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list PB POSITION Description of settings Sets
21. h Y minM s D MEDIA E m 30 E mu m m m F ME s 5 1 13 24 E Memory operation status related display 4 Error code display page 196 5 Information display LOOP Lights during loop recording and flashes during recording standby page 38 7 ff X AES NDFSLAVE HOLD GER ow 0 6 CTL VTCG TIME DATE City Lia Lia Le Y minM s D frm ED m MEDIA E mm m m m m oo mmm 30 mr BS o LOOP 13 24 6 Time code indications NDF Indicates when the time code is in the non drop frame mode DF Indicates when the time code is in the drop frame mode SLAVE Indicates when the time code is externally locked HOLD Indicates when the time code generator read value is held CTL Lights when lt CTL gt is selected by the lt DISPLAY gt switch and the CTL count value is displayed TCG Lights when lt TC gt or lt UB gt is selected by the lt DISPLAY gt switch and the TC or UB generator value is displayed TC Lights when lt TC gt or lt UB gt is selected by the lt DISPLAY gt switch and the TC or UB reader value is displayed VTCG Lights when UB is selected by the DISPLAY switch and the VIUB generator value is displayed VTC Li
22. Remark When FILMLIKE3 is used it is recommended to configure the following settings at the main menu LVL item other than FILM REC is selected no settings are changed 200 300 400 500 600 HD The video gamma feature for HD High Definition PAINT SD Increases gain in darker areas more than HD gamma ANE KNEE Ms FILMLIKE1 Feature that reproduces more highlight areas compared to HD KNEE MASTER POINT 85 0 gamma KNEE MASTER SLOPE 50 FILMLIKE2 Feature that reproduces more highlight areas compared to If set FILM REC or VIDEO REC auto knee is FILMLIKE1 disabled FILMLIKE3 Feature that reproduces more highlight areas compared to Auto knee is disabled if the remote control FILMLIKE2 unit AJ RC10G is connected but when the AJ RC10G lt A KNEE gt button is pressed the FILM REC The cine like gamma feature for film LED of lt A KNEE ON button lights VIDEO REC The cine like gamma feature for video F REC DYNAMIC When FILM REC is selected in GAMMA MODE SEL dynamic range is set If an F REC BLACK STR LVL V REC KNEE SLOPE When FILM REC is selected in GAMMA MODE SEL black stretch is set If an item other than FILM REC is selected no settings are changed 0 30 When VIDEO REC is selected in GAMMA MODE SEL knee slope is set If an item other than VIDEO REC is selected no settings are changed 15
23. FRAME MARK Enables disables frame marker ON OFF FRAME SIG Sets frame marker aspect ratio VISTA is 16 8 65 and CNSCO is 16 6 81 4 3 13 9 14 9 VISTA CNSCO USER BOX Sets whether to display the user box to the signal from the monitor output terminal If the main menu gt I F SETUP gt DOWNCON lt SDI OUT2 gt HDMI OUT or VIDEO OUT ON OFF SETTING DOWNCON MODE is set to SIDE CROP or LETTER BOX the user box is not displayed to the down converter output signal in HD mode USER BOX WIDTH Sets the width of the user box 1 13 100 USER BOX HEIGHT Sets the height of the user box 1 13 100 USER BOX H POS Sets the horizontal position of the center of the user box 50 0 50 USER BOX V POS Sets the vertical position of the center of the user box 50 0 50 are factory settings DOWNCON SETTING Item Description of settings Remark DOWNCON MODE Sets the mode of the down converter output signal SIDE CROP LETTER BOX SQUEEZE When LETTER BOX is selected some parts of the top and bottom edges of the down converter output video may be distorted This is not a malfunction DETAIL Turns detail function for the down converter output signal ON OFF ON OFF The down converter output signal contains detail components set during HD si
24. The color bar signal is output The auto knee function is not activated lt BARS gt lt OFF gt The color bar signal can be selected from the four types in the main menu gt CAMERA SW MODE COLOR BARS page 149 lt CAM gt lt OFF gt NOTE As the factory setting when the lt OUTPUT gt lt AUTO KNEE selector switch is set to BARS and lt CH1 gt on the AUDIO IN switch is set to lt gt test signals are output to all four audio channels The test signal output method can be changed in the main menu gt I F SETUP gt MIC AUDIO TEST TONE Auto knee function When you adjust levels to shoot people or scenery against a strongly lit background the background will be totally white out with buildings and other objects blurred In such a case the auto knee function reproduces the background clearly The auto knee function is effective when shooting the following scenes The subject is a person positioned in the shade under a clear sky The subject is a person inside a car or a building and you also want to capture the background visible through a window The subject is a high contrast scene 10 WHITE BAL white balance memory selector switch page 49 Select the white balance adjustment method Set the switch to this position when you have no time to adjust the white balance The factory setting is 3200 K lt PRST gt e You can change to any color tempe
25. 15 Gain display Displays the gain value of the image amplifier configured dB Displays the current gain value AGC Displayed when auto gain control is active 16 System information and warning SYSTEM ERROR E k Displayed when an abnormality in internal microcomputer communication or the reference signal has occurred From here on recording and playback are not possible The error code is displayed on For details refer to Error code page 196 TURN POWER OFF E x Displayed when operation is no longer possible after P2 card is removed during accessing of the P2 card for example during recording playback or formatting The error code is displayed on 73 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder status display TEMPORARY PAUSE Displayed when the reference signal is disrupted and recording is suspended during generator lock input etc IRREGULAR SIG EOM Displayed when there is no space remaining on the P2 card BOS Displayed when the playback position is at the beginning of all clips EOS Displayed when the playback position is at the end of all clips CANNOT REC Displayed when recording to the P2 card is not possible for example immediately after power is turned on or the P2 card is inserted Detailed information of the P2 card can be checked in the mode check FUNCTION screen For details refer to Mode check d
26. Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips Thumbnail operations NO COPY TO SAME CARD Copying could not be performed because you are attempting to copy to the same card TOO MANY CLIPS Copying could not be performed because there are too many clips selected If copying is performed while a text memo is selected in the lower part of the text memo the section between the selected text memo position and the next text memo will be copied If no text memo is found after the selected one then the part after the selected text memo to the end of the clip will be copied For details refer to Using a text memo to divide a clip and copy the necessary portion page 114 To interrupt copying press lt SHIFT gt button EXIT button or the SET button to cancel the operation The clip being copied will be deleted from the copy destination When identical clips same GLOBAL CLIP ID exist on the destination OVERWRITE is displayed Select YES when overwriting the clip and select NO when not overwriting the clip Setting clip metadata Information such as the name of the person who shot the video the name of the reporter the shooting location or text memos can be read from an SD memory card and can be recorded as clip metadata Loading clip metadata metadata upload DATETIME FILE NAME DATE TIME EXIT EXIT Pana_02 2013 JUL 12 21 32 58 matada02 p2 237B 2013 JUL 12 21 32 58 Pana_01 2013
27. NOTE Incomplete clip indicators will remain displayed when only some clips are reconnected unless all the constituent clips of the original clip are reconnected Copying clips Selected clips can be copied to a P2 card or a connected USB storage device in the desired slot 1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor over the clip to be copied and press the lt SET gt button to select the clip N In the main menu CLIP move the cursor from the COPY list over the destination and press the lt SET gt button e When multiple clips are selected the number of selected clips is displayed after pressing the SET button e f the copy destination is a storage device select the copy destination properties Move the cursor YES the confirmation message and press the lt SET gt button This starts copying of the clip 4 When the completion message appears press the lt SET gt button NOTE Turning off the power or inserting removing a card during copying may damage the P2 card If you accidentally make these mistakes it can result in defective clips After deleting the defective clips redo copying Copying is not performed when the following error messages are displayed LACK OF CAPACITY Copying could not be performed because the recording capacity of the copy destination is insufficient UNKNOWN CONTENTS FORMATI Copying could not be performed because a defective clip is selected 115
28. 3 0 1 1000 4 0 1 1000 5 0 1 1000 6 PBDE 0 1 1000 1057
29. 60 dBu 60 50 dBu selectable menu MIC IN terminal XLRx1 5 pin Phantom 48 V selectable menu 40 dBu 50 40 dBu selectable menu Wireless slot 25 pin D SUB 40 dBu 2ch supported AUDIO OUT gt terminal lt CH1 gt lt CH2 gt XLRx1 5 pin 4 dBu 3 0 4 dBu selectable menu equilibrium low impedance PHONES terminal Stereo mini jackx2 Speaker 20 mm diameter roundx1 Other input output lt GENLOCK IN terminal BNCx1 1 0 V 75 Q TC IN terminal BNCx1 0 5 V p p 8 V 10 TC OUT gt terminal DC IN terminal BNCx1 2 0 0 5 V p p low impedance XLRx1 4 pin DC 12 V DC 11 0 V 17 0 V DC OUT gt terminal 4 pin DC 12 V DC 11 0 V 17 0 V maximum output current 1 5 A lt gt terminal 10 pin LENS terminal 12 pin VF terminal 20 pin LAN terminal 100BASE TX 10BASE T lt USB2 0 gt terminal device Type B connector 4 pin lt USB3 0 gt terminal host Type A connector 9 pin lt USB2 0 gt terminal host Type A connector 4 pin lt LIGHT gt terminal 2 pin DC 12 V DC 11 0 V 17 0 V maximum output current 4 5 A up to 50 W equivalent LCD monitor 3 45 type LCD monitor approx 921000 dots 16 9 203 Chapter 10 Specification Details of the connector signals Details of the connector signals O
30. Adjustment is possible by the AUDIO LEVEL CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO LEVEL 2 4 gt dial in the same way as when the level adjustment dial is assigned to CH1 2 W Level adjustment of channels 3 4 Automatic adjustment is enabled when AUTO LVL CH1 and AUTO LVL CH2 are set to ON in the main menu gt I F SETUP MIC AUDIO When these items are set to OFF automatic adjustment stops functioning and the audio level can be adjusted by LVL CONTROL CH1 and LVL CONTROL CH2 in MIC AUDIO Selection of adjustment method When CH1 2 is selected by VR SELECT EXIT OUTA SDIQ FRONT VR CH1 MONI FRONT VR CH2 DOW AUTO LVL CH3 GENL AUTO LVL CH4 LVL CONTROL CH3 USB LVL CONTROL CH4 LCD MIC LOWCUT CH1 BATT MIC LOWCUT CH2 v Channel 1 channel 2 Channel 3 channel 4 AUDIO SELECT CH1 3 gt switch Adiustment method AUTO LVL CH3 AUDIO SELECT 2 4 gt switch J AUTO LVL CH4 Adjustment method Manual adjustment by adjustment Manual adjustment by LVL CONTROL dial CH3 LVL CONTROL lt AUTO gt Automatic adjustment ON Automatic adjustment lt MANU gt OFF 59 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Selecting audio input and adjusting recording levels When CH3 4 is selected by VR SELECT PAINT EXIT VF von FRONT VR CH3 MONI FRONT VR CH4 REC DOW AUTO LVL CH1 GENI AUTO LVL CH2 FILE
31. Cable clamp lt LENS gt terminal Fig 4 Fig 3 1 Raise the lens lever and remove the mount cap Fig 1 2 Align the indentation at the top center of the lens mount with the center mark of the lens to mount the lens Fig 2 3 Lower the lens lever to firmly clamp the lens Fig 3 4 Secure the cable through the cable clamp and connect it to the lt LENS gt terminal Fig 4 5 Perform lens flange back adjustments For details refer to Flange back adjustment page 97 g NOTE For handling the lens refer to the lens operating instructions For details on the current from the LENS terminal refer to Details of the connector signals page 204 When the lens is removed install the mount cap to protect the device Flange back adjustment If images are not clearly focused at both telephoto and wide angle positions during zoom operations adjust the flange back distance from the lens mounting surface to the image formation surface Once adjusted the flange back does not need to be readjusted until the lens is changed g NOTE Refer to the lens operating instructions for guidance on adjustment methods and positions of lens parts 97 Chapter 5 Preparation Mounting and adjusting the lens For a normal lens Approximately 3 m 1 Mount the lens on the camera Make sure to connect the lens cable 2 Set the lens iris to manual and fully open the iris 3 Place th
32. Connecting to the remote control unit AJ RC10G The following functions are scheduled to be supported in future upgrades Connect the remote control unit AJ RC10G optional to remote control some functions When you connect AJ RC10G and set the POWER switches of the camera and AJ RC10G to lt ON gt the camera automatically enters the remote control mode e Remove AJ RC10G or set the POWER switch on AJ RC10G to OFF to release remote control mode U oo0000 E lt gt terminal AJ RC10G 187 Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices Connecting to the extension control unit AG EC4G Connecting to the extension control unit AG EC4G The following functions are scheduled to be supported in future upgrades Connect the extension control unit AG EC4G optional to remote control some functions When you connect AG EC4G and set the POWER switches of the camera and AG EC4G to lt ON gt the camera automatically enters the remote control mode e Remove AG EC4G or ensure the AG EC4G POWER switch is OFF to release remote control mode U E oo Soon e 00 0n60 ono ooo AG EC4G lt gt terminal 188 Cha
33. Item CAMERA USER MENU Data file By page By item USER SW USER MAIN USER1 USER2 SHOT MARK U3 TEXT 04 NIN ITN IN lt SI SI SISIS IC lt 15 14 lt 4 Im Item CAMERA USER MENU Data file By page By item SW MODE RET SW V S BLK LVL AUTO KNEE SW SHD ABB SW CTL COLOR BARS WFM WFM DISP S GAIN OFF DS GAIN OFF D ZOOM x2 D ZOOM x3 D ZOOM x4 FBC SHUTTER ON RC CHECK SW 175 15 1 15 5 S S SIS s S S S ISIS PS S S S RIS INS ISIS IS ia Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list item USER MENU Data file CAMERA By page By item U F WHITE BALANCE FILTER INH 4 4 i MODE SHOCKLESS AWB V V V V AWB AREA A AWB B v ATW SPEED Pd ft v TEMP PRE SEL SW COLOR TEMP PRE AWB A TEMP Fi AWB B TEMP Item USER MENU Data file CAMERA By page By item U F USER SW GAIN S GAIN 7 2 Vv DS GAIN 7 7
34. MARKER SEL gt lt MODE CHECK MENU CANCEL switch is pushed to the lt MCK MCL gt side ON OFF Sets whether to display the reason that the viewfinder lamp is illuminated when the lt MARKER SEL gt lt MODE CHECK MENU CANCEL gt switch is pushed to the lt MCK MCL gt side The cause for the illuminated lamp is displayed by am ON OFF FUNCTION Sets whether to display the FUNCTION screen when the MARKER SEL gt lt MODE CHECK MENU CANCEL switch is pushed to the lt MCK MCL gt side ON OFF AUDIO Sets whether to display the AUDIO screen when the MARKER SEL gt lt MODE CHECK MENU CANCEL switch is pushed to the lt MCK MCL gt side ON OFF CAC Sets whether to display the CAC screen when the MARKER SEL gt lt MODE CHECK MENU CANCEL switch is pushed to the lt MCK MCL gt side ON OFF USER SW STATUS Sets whether to display the function of each user switch or functions assigned to other switches when the MARKER SEL gt lt MODE CHECK MENU CANCEL switch is pushed to the lt MCK MCL gt side ON OFF P ON IND Sets whether to display the status screen immediately after the camera is turned Even if ON is selected in this item when on ON OFF STATUS is OFF the status screen is not displayed immediately after the camera is turned on 146 are factory settings Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list LED Item Descripti
35. Menu list MID SETTING Item Description of settings Remark S MASTER GAIN Selects the master gain 6dB 3dB OdB 6 9dB 12dB 15dB 18dB 21dB 24dB 27dB 30dB LEVEL DEPEND H DTL LEVEL Sets the horizontal detail correction level 0 8 63 V DTL LEVEL Sets the vertical detail correction level 0 12 31 DTL CORING Sets the detail noise removal level 0 8 60 H DTL FREQ Selects the horizontal detail frequency 0 18 31 Sets LEVEL DEPEND Compresses the details of dark areas when Y detail is emphasized Details of bright areas are also compressed if the value is large 101 1 5 MASTER GAMMA Sets the master gamma in 0 01 steps 0 30 0 45 0 75 BLACK GAMMA Sets the gamma curves of dark areas 8 1 Compresses the dark areas OFF Standard state 1 8 Expands the dark areas B GAMMA RANGE Sets the maximum level of compression expansion 1 About 20 2 About 30 3 About 40 S MATRIX TABLE Selects the color collection table for the linear matrix A OFF S COLOR Switches the 15 axis independent color correction on off CORRECT ON OFF e 6dB in S MASTER GAIN cannot be selected when NORMAL is set in main menu PAINT S CAMERA SETTING SHOOTING MODE are factory sett
36. SET button to select the destination slot and then select YES Copying starts The portion between the selected text memo and the next one is copied If no text memo is found after the selected one then the part after the selected text memo to the end of the clip is copied f multiple text memos are selected the selected sections are copied While the clip is being copied the progress of the copy process and cancelation will be displayed To discontinue the copy process press the SET button When the YES NO confirmation screen is displayed use the cursor buttons and the SET button to select YES Md Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips Thumbnail operations NOTE In clip division and copying using the text memo the area copied may be automatically modified and copied depending on the recording method of the clip Deleting clips 1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor over the clip to be deleted and press the SET button to select the clip 2 Select DELETE in the main menu CLIP and press the SET button 3 Use the cursor buttons and the SET button to select YES The clip is deleted All selected clips in blue green frames are deleted by this operation NOTE To interrupt the deletion process press the lt SHIFT gt button EXIT button or the SET button to cancel the operation Once a clip is deleted it cannot be restored even if the deletion process
37. The confirmation screen is displayed 2 Select YES and press the jog dial button or SET button 3 When the completion message is displayed press the jog dial button or SET button Reading written user data 1 Select LOAD USER DATA in the main menu FILE and press the jog dial button or SET button The confirmation screen is displayed If SYSTEM RESTART is displayed on the confirmation screen the camera will restart after reading out is complete 2 Select YES and press the jog dial button or SET button Reading out of the file begins How to use scene file data The content of setting data can be written to and read written data from scene file area on the camera s internal memory Four types of scene files can be registered Use of this data allows you to quickly reproduce optimum setup states Writing setting data for scene files CAC FILE S SCENE 1 LENS FILE LENS FILE SD CARD PR FORMAT SD CARD LOAD USER DATA v 1 Select SAVE in the main menu FILE SCENE and press the jog dial button or SET button The list of scene files currently saved in camera memory is displayed 88 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling setting data 2 Select the file to write from the list The title entry screen and keyboard are displayed 3 Enter the desired characters with the keyboard 4 Use the jog dial button or cursor buttons
38. page 197 Reading lens files from SD memory card 1 Select LOAD in the main menu FILE LENS FILE SD CARD and press the jog dial button or SET button The list of lens files currently saved in camera memory is displayed 2 Select the file name to read and press the jog dial button or SET button The confirmation screen is displayed 3 Select YES and press the jog dial button or SET button Loading of the file begins 91 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling setting data 4 When the completion message is displayed press the jog dial button or lt SET gt button For details on error messages if an error message is displayed refer to Warning error displays in the thumbnail operation menu operation and USB storage mode page 197 NOTE Titles of card files on SD memory cards are displayed on the LENS FILE SD CARD screen However titles of lens files contained inside card files are not displayed on the LENS FILE SD CARD screen Read the files and check on the LENS FILE screen whenever required At this time the lens file in internal memory will be rewritten with the lens file that is read Before reading lens files on SD memory cards write the lens files in internal memory to SD memory card to make a backup CAC file For details refer to Chromatic aberration compensation function CAC page 99 92 Chapters Preparatio
39. page 56 S GAIN is assigned in the factory setting Detection Selects a response to accept when the USER1 button is time pressed NORMAL Accepts immediately when pressed 1sec Accepts when pressed and held down for approx one second USER2 Select a Assigns the lt USER2 gt button function For selectable functions and an explanation of functions refer to Assigning functions to USER buttons page 56 DS GAIN is assigned in the factory setting Detection Selects a response to accept when the lt USER2 gt button is time pressed NORMAL Accepts immediately when pressed 1sec Accepts when pressed and held down for approx one second SHOT MARK U3 Select a Assigns the lt SHOT MARKER button function For selectable functions and an explanation of functions refer to Assigning functions to USER buttons page 56 SHOT MARK is assigned in the factory setting Detection Selects a response to accept when the lt SHOT MARKER time button is pressed NORMAL Accepts immediately when pressed 1sec Accepts when pressed and held down for approx one second TEXT MEMO U4 Select a Assigns the TEXT MEMO button function For selectable functions and an explanation of functions refer to Assigning functions to USER buttons page 56 TEXT MEMO is assigned in the factory setting Detection Selects a response to accept when the TEXT MEMO button time is pressed NO
40. 118 Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips Thumbnail operations Properties Clip properties and P2 card status are displayed It is possible to edit and rewrite recorded clip metadata while clip properties are displayed Clip properties Select CLIP PROPERTY in the main menu CLIP gt PROPERTY USER CLIP NAME TEXT MEMO MDO CARD STATUS 00 05 21 29 E El rine CPS PASSWORD 0008 CLIP 0054 INGER DEVICE SD CARD START TC 00 04 44 21 START UB 00000000 SHOOT REMAIN SETUP gt 00 04 44 21 DATE 2013 JUL 03 SCENARIO 0012 TIME 22 59 27 GMT 09 00 NEWS DURATION 00 00 02 19 V FORMAT AVC4 100 1080 59 94i FRAME RATE 59 94i 00 05 10 07 00 05 29 20 REC HHOXY MEMO THUMBNAIL 0029 PRESS EXIT BUTTON TO EXIT Clip information Displays the indicators added to the clip and the number of added text memos The an mark will be displayed if the P2 card in which the clip is recorded is write protected 2 Clip number NOTE For clips that cannot be played back the number is displayed in red 3 Thumbnail 4 Clip information Displays detailed information about the clip CLIP NAME Displays clip names START TC Displays the time code value at the start of the recording START UB Displays the user bit value at the start of the recording DATE Displays the date of the recording TIME Displays the time at the
41. 3 Set ON in the main menu gt I F SETUP USB LAN USB MODE Fig 4 During USB connection USB DEVICE CONNECTED is displayed at the center of the viewfinder screen and the USB lamp is illuminated Fig 2 If connection is not made properly USB DEVICE DISCONNECTED is displayed and the USB lamp flashes 4 Exit the USB device mode There are three ways to do so Turn the POWER switch of the camera to OFF Press the EXIT button In USB device mode Push EXIT to Return to CAMERA MODE is displayed at the bottom of the viewfinder screen Press the USER buttons USER MAIN gt lt USER1 gt lt USER2 gt lt 5 MARKER button or TEXT MEMO button to which USB MODE is assigned Returns to camera shooting status in approx five seconds when USB device mode ends NOTE The USB 2 0 cable is not supplied with the camera Prepare a commercial USB 2 0 cable double shielded for noise suppression AUSB connection cable of up to 5 m is supported however a cable of 3 m or shorter is recommended as preferable USB MODE can be assigned to the USER buttons USER MAIN gt lt USER1 gt lt USER2 gt the lt SHOT gt and TEXT MEMO buttons in the main menu CAMERA USER SW However if these buttons are pressed while a menu or thumbnail is open the mode cannot be changed to USB device mode or normal mode Before making USB connection for the first time insta
42. CAC The chromatic aberration compensation function minimizes color smearing in peripheral images This function automatically compensates for registration error that is caused mainly due to slight chromatic aberration which is hard to completely compensate with the lens itself using the camera recorder unit When the lens compatible with the chromatic aberration compensation function is mounted if the camera has the chromatic aberration compensation data of the lens then the chromatic aberration compensation function is activated automatically What is lens chromatic aberration Chromatic aberration here refers to zoom factor chromatic aberration Zoom factor chromatic aberration occurs since the diffraction ratio of a lens differs according to red R green G blue B Chromatic aberration on the lens itself is compensated for but still remains in the periphery in particular Also this chromatic aberration occurs on zoom lens due to a complex relationship between zoom ratio aperture and focal distance In image terms this is registration error Chromatic aberration compensation function To compensate chromatic aberration store the chromatic aberration characteristics of the lens regarding zoom ratio aperture and focal distance to the camera recorder beforehand Connect a lens that matches those chromatic aberration characteristics and perform compensation matched to the zoom ratio aperture and focal distance of that
43. Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list VF MARKER ZEBRA2 ON OFF SPOT 109 Y ZEBRA2 2 77 2 ZEBRA1 DETECT 0 1 Description of settings Remark TABLE Selects the setting table of the marker select function Check or set the details of A B at subsequent settings A B CENTER MARK Controls the center mark 11 large 2 Open center large 3 small 4 Open center small SAFETY MARK OFF Selects the type of frame for the safety zone marker Does not display Box Corners OFF Does not display SAFETY AREA Sets the size of the safety zone marker The constant ratio of length to width can be set in 1 increments 80 90 100 FRAME MARK Selects frame marker ON OFF ON OFF FRAME SIG Sets frame marker aspect ratio The VISTA is 16 8 65 1 85 1 and CNSCO is 16 6 81 2 35 1 4 3 13 9 14 9 VISTA CNSCO FRAME LVL Sets the level of the outside of the frame marker 0 Equivalent to signal off blanking status 1 14 Higher numbers indicate increased brightness 15 Same brightness as center VF USER BOX are factory settings The user box can be displayed as a box type cursor in any position Item Description of settings
44. J WIRELESS WARN WIRELESS TYPE Z Item USER MENU Data file SETUP By page By item U F USB LAN USB MODE SELECT s USB MODE yn Item USER MENU Data file SETUP By page By item U F LCD MONITOR BACKLIGHT y BRIGHTNESS y COLOR LEVEL A CONTRAST s SELF SHOOT VF LCD CHAR y Item USER MENU Data file SETUP By page By item U F BATTERY P2CARD BATTERY SELECT s EXT DC IN SELECT NEAR END ALARM BATT NEAR END CANCEL y V BATT END ALARM V BATT REMAIN FULL J CARD NEAR END ALARM J CARD NEAR END TIME J J CARD END ALARM J J J CARD REMAIN Seg Z 2 J J 1 79 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list Item USER MENU SETUP Data file BATTERY SETTING BATTERY MODE HYTRON140 NEAR END DIONIC 90 NEAR END ENDURA10 NEAR END PAG L96e NEAR END TYPE A FULL TYPE ANEAR END TYPE A END TYPE B FULL TYPE B NEAR END TYPE B END TYPE C FULL TYPE C NEAR END TYPE C END BATT STAT NEAR END BATT STAT END ENDURA STAT NEAR END ENDURA STAT END SISISISISIS ISISISISISISISISISISISIS IO amp S 5 Ss Sl SSIS SS S S en amp S
45. OFF the color components of the video signal are removed OFF 99 0 40 DRS MODE Sets the effectiveness of DRS color preservation MODE1 Sets the hue of high brightness areas to its natural state MODE2 Makes the hue of high brightness areas more vivid DRS EFFECT Sets the compression level for the high brightness areas of DRS The higher the DEPTH value the higher the compression level of high brightness areas becomes 1 2 S HI COLOR SW Turns the mode that expands the color dynamic range ON OFF ON OFF HI COLOR LVL Selects the level of the mode that expands the color dynamic range 11 32 are factory settings When saving or reading setup files from an SD memory card you can save items with an S and items without an S separately Items with an S in front of the item name are the targets for PAINT S SELECT in the main menu FILE SETUP DATA SELECT Items without an S are targets for PAINT LEVEL GAMMA Item Description of settings Remark MASTER GAMMA Configure master gamma settings in 0 01 steps 0 30 0 45 0 75 R GAMMA Sets the gamma of Rch 15 0 15 B GAMMA Sets the gamma of Bch 15 0 15 factory settings Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list Item GAMMA MODE SEL Description of settings Selects the gamma curve
46. ON 2 Set which of P2 or microP2 memory cards to use 1 Select REC MEDIA in the main menu REC PB REC PB SETUP 2 When using P2 memory cards select P2 and when using microP2 memory cards select microP2 3 Open the slot cover Fig 1 4 Insert a card into the card slot Fig 2 P2 memory cards Insert the card until the eject button pops out Insert the card with the logo facing up Press the eject button that pops up to the right microP2 memory cards Insert with the label side facing up Card in microP2 memory card slot 3 can be inserted or removed by sliding the small window on the slot cover After a card is inserted the P2 card access LED for the appropriate slot indicates the status of the P2 card Fig 3 page 32 5 Close the slot cover NOTE To prevent cards from falling out dust from entering and reduce the risk of exposure to static electricity close the slot cover before moving the camera Be sure to format P2 cards only on a P2 device The microP2 memory card with the P2 card adaptor AJ P2AD1G attached cannot be inserted into the P2 memory card slot on the camera If SDHC SDXC memory cards other than microP2 memory cards are used on the microP2 memory card slot operation is not guaranteed If a microP2 memory card is inserted slowly FORMAT ERROR or NOT SUPPORTED may be displayed In such a case insert the card again Removing a P2 card Fig 2 1 Ope
47. REC switch Y GET ON Displayed when the Y GET function is ON RET SW Displayed when the USER button is functioning as the RET switch SLOT SEL Displayed when the switch for switching the card to record to is set PRE REC Displayed when the pre recording mode is switched USB STORAGE Displayed when the USB operation status is switched DEVICE OFF DRS ON OFF Displays the operation status of the dynamic range stretcher ASSIST ON OFF Displays the focus assist operation status C TEMP ON OFF Displays the status of the mode for changing the color temperature by the jog dial button LCD B L Displayed when the brightness of the LCD monitor backlight is switched SHOT MARK Displayed when shot marks are added or deleted TEXT MEMO Displayed when a text memo is recorded WFM Displayed when the waveform monitor is switched FBC ON OFF Displays the operation status of the flash band compensation function EVF CLR Displays the color status of the viewfinder REC MEDIA Displayed when the slot of the media used for recording is switched to P2 P2 memory card slots 1 2 or mP2 microP2 memory card slots 3 4 CAM RET Displayed when the button assigned with the camera return function is pressed REC CHECK Displayed when the button assigned with the recording check function is pressed Focus bar display Displays the high frequency component of the video after conversion to a graph at the bottom left o
48. gt I F SETUP and the setting of DOWNCON SETTING gt DOWNCON MODE Menu item Description of settings SDI2 HDMI OUT Selects the system mode signal method or down converter output for output from the lt SDI OUT2 gt and lt HDMI OUT gt terminals 1080P SDI2 HDMI OUT 3G SDI OUT Selects whether to convert output signals from the monitor output terminals lt SDI OUT2 gt lt HDMI OUT gt to 1080i at 1080P Selects the 3G HD SDI signal type output from the SDI OUT1 gt and SDI OUT2 gt terminals from LEVEL A or LEVEL B at 1080P DOWNCON MODE or 10801 Selects the screen type for down conversion output composite and SD SDI output at 1080P Selecting video output from each terminal Monitor output setting Video output ipie a panies SDI OUT1 gt terminal SDI OUT2 terminal lt HDMI OUT terminal T SYSTEM 1080 59 94 MODE 1080 59 94i 1080 99 94 480 59 94i DOWNCON 480 59 94i 480 59 94P SYSTEM 1080 50i 1080 50i 1080 50i MODE 1080 50i 576 501 DOWNCON 576 501 576 50 SYSTEM 1080P 1080 59 94P 1080 59 94P 1080 59 94P MODE 10801 1080 59 94P 1080 59 94i 1080 59 94i 480 59 94i DOWNCON Disabled 480 59 94i 480 59 94P SYSTEM 1080P 1080 50P 1080 50P 1080 50P MODE 10801 1080 50P 1080 50i 1080 50i 576 501 DOWNCON Disabled 576 50i 576 50P 480 59 941
49. lt 4 gt lt 1 64ND gt Reduces the amount of light entering the MOS sensor to 1 64 Refer to the following table to switch the CC FILTER and ND FILTER dials according to the shooting conditions Shooting conditions CC FILTER dial ND FILTER dial Sunset sunrise inside studio A 3200 K gt 1 CLEAR Outdoors in the clear skies SB 54300 K3 Ur toc lt 5600 Re or lt D gt 2 lt 1 4 gt or 3 1 16ND 6300 K gt Outdoors under cloudy skies or in the rain D 6300 gt 1 CLEAR or 2 lt 1 4ND gt Clear bright scenery such as snowy scenery lt B gt lt 4300 K gt or lt C gt lt 5600 K gt or lt D gt 3 lt 1 16ND gt or 4 lt 1 64ND gt tall mountains seaside 6300 K gt Focal plane index lt gt Indicates the focal plane of the MOS sensor It provides a reference for making accurate focal distance measurements from the subject USER buttons USER MAIN gt lt USER1 gt lt USER2 gt page 56 Assign user selected functions to each button Pressing each button performs the assigned function SHUTTER switch page 53 Switches the electronic shutter OFF Disables the electronic shutter ON Enables the electronic shutter SEL Changes the speed of the electronic shutter This is a spring switch Each turn towards the SEL side alters the shutter speed AUTO WIB BAL switch p
50. playback is recognized after playback ends When playing back clips spread over multiple P2 cards at variable speed audio might be instantaneously interrupted though this is not a malfunction To play back clips in the different system modes match LINE amp FREQ to the format of the clip in the main menu gt SYSTEM gt SYSTEM MODE and set the camera again Audio of CH5 to CH8 recorded on another device cannot be played back 45 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording This chapter describes adjustment of white and black balance and adjustment of flash band compensation FBC function and other shooting functions It also describes how to set convenient functions for shooting such as assignment of functions to lt USER gt buttons lt USER MAIN gt lt USER1 gt lt USER2 gt and setting of time data Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Multi formats Multi formats Selecting recording signals The camera can record HD 1080P 1080i signals in the combined format of AVC Intra AVC LongG DVCPRO HD codecs and can record SD 480i 576i signals in the combined format of DVCPRO50 DVCPRO DV codecs respectively Recording and shooting signals can be selected in the main menu SYSTEM gt SYSTEM MODE Setting menu screen Setting menu item Description of settings Select the 1080P 1080i 480i 576i signal format If this setting has been changed select YES on a confirmation messa
51. purpose of shooting and OBJECT object of shooting MEMO Displays NO the number of the text memo OFFSET location of the frame where the text memo is added PERSON person who recorded the text memo added to the clip and TEXT content of the text memo 116 Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips Thumbnail operations THUMBNAIL Displays the location of the frame frame offset and the size height and width of the image selected as the thumbnail image PROXY Displays information such as proxy format when proxy is added 1 You can select the USER CLIP NAME recording method For details refer to Selecting the USER CLIP NAME recording method page 117 2 When entering MEMO make sure to enter TEXT It is not possible to record only PERSON the person inputting the memo or OFFSET the recording position Checking and modifying uploaded metadata Details of metadata uploaded from an SD memory card can be checked META DATA META DATA REC META DATA USER CLIP NAME REC META DATA USER CLIP NAME REC ON REC ON META NAME LAST UPDATE PERSON META Panasonic SHOOT CREATOR Panasonic P2 PRESS EXIT BUTTON TO EXIT PRESS EXIT BUTTON TO EXIT Fig 1 Fig 2 1 Select PROPERTY in the main menu REC PB REC METADATA The metadata list is displayed 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor over the item to be checked and press the SET but
52. setting The reference value is returned when this mode is canceled or the power is turned off Opens aperture by about 0 5 Opens aperture by about 1 Closes aperture by about 0 5 Closes aperture by about 1 No display Reference value S BLK Assigns the super black function This is the function for lowering the black level to the pedestal level or below Assigns the black gamma function This function enhances the black tones B GAMMA BLACK GAMMA 6 and B GAMMA RANGE 3 are set regardless of the value that was set by selecting BLACK GAMMA in the main menu gt PAINT LOW SETTING HIGH SETTING or MID SETTING ssigns the digital zoom function Zooms the field angle by 2x and 4x vertically and horizontally D ZOOM Assi the digital function Z i the field le by 2x 3 d 4x verticall d horizontall ssigns the auto tracking white balance function ATW Assi th to tracki hite bal functi ATW LOCK Fixes the white balance value when pressing this item while the auto tracking white balance function is activated Resumes the auto tracking white balance function when pressing again Y GET Assigns the function for displaying the luminance level of the image at the position indicated by the square marker displayed near the center Assigns the dynamic range stretcher function This function expands the dynamic range by compressing the image level in high brightness areas and stretching the imag
53. 0006 T 0007 Li 0008 T e 00 04 36 14 00 05 02 21 00 05 47 04 00 05 21 29 0006 0007 0008 p 0009 Ir 7 00 01 55 11 00 02 05 10 09 04 44 00 05 53 04 TEXT MEMO CLIP 04 TEXT MEMO D CLIP 04 E 04 04 00 05 21 29 00 05 27 00 00 05 29 27 00 05 21 29 205 00 05 29 27 dpmzm 00 1080 60i PRESS EXIT BUTTON GO AB Display still image linked to text memo The cursor moves down Selected number blue and total number white of text memo clips Fig 1 Fig 2 1 Press the MENU button and select TEXT MEMO CLIPS in the main menu CLIP REPOSITION The thumbnails of the clips with text memos added are displayed in the upper section of the LCD monitor The lower section of the LCD monitor shows information on the text memo on the clip selected by the cursor Fig 1 2 Move the cursor over the clip that contains the text memo to be played back and press the lt SET gt button The cursor moves to the lower section of the LCD monitor Fig 2 3 With the cursor located in the lower section use the cursor buttons lt 1 gt to move the cursor to the text memo number to be played back and then press the lt PLAY PAUSE gt button Playback starts from the time code position of the text memo where the cursor is located If the STOP button is pressed during playback or the playback has finished at the end of the clip the thumbnail screen appears again and the cursor
54. 1 Mount the Anton Bauer battery 2 Insert the battery terminal and slide in the direction of the arrow 3 Set the battery type Select the battery in the main menu gt I F SETUP gt BATTERY P2CARD BATTERY SELECT For details refer to Setting menu basic operations page 134 NOTE To remove the battery keep the release lever of the battery holder completely down slide the battery in the opposite direction of when you mounted it 94 Chapter 5 Preparation Power supply Using V mount type batteries Mount the V mount type battery plate As shown in the figure insert and slide in the direction of the arrow Release lever 1 Mount the V mount type battery plate 2 Slide in the direction of the arrow 3 Set the battery type Select the battery type in the main menu gt I F SETUP BATTERY P2CARD BATTERY SELECT g NOTE Contact your dealer for information about the V mount type battery plate When the V mount type battery plate is used percent is not displayed even if batteries with a battery level indicator function are used When removing the plate remove by sliding the release lever When using a battery that is not in the BATTERY SELECT item set TYPE A TYPE B or TYPE C and set each item according to the characteristics of the battery For details refer to BATTERY P2CARD page 163 and BATTERY SETTING page 163 Using external DC p
55. 117 The input window soft keyboard for modifying metadata is displayed Fig 2 Enter characters with the keyboard to modify the metadata 4 Press the OK button on the keyboard The modified metadata is written on the clip and the screen returns to the metadata details window NOTE To delete each item in LOCATION shooting location data of SHOOT the item cannot be deleted alone By setting the ALTITUDE item to empty other LONGITUDE and LATITUDE items are collectively deleted The metadata for a clip with the incomplete clip indicator cannot be modified For the clips recorded on multiple P2 cards modify the metadata while all P2 cards are inserted Any MEMO with 101 characters or more cannot be modified P2 card status display W P2 card status display settings You can select the P2 card status display from either remaining capacity or used capacity of the P2 card 00 05 21 29 0008 00 02 05 10 00 04 44 21 0012 Im 00 05 29 20 SELECT 0121 7 Press the lt THUMBNAIL gt button The thumbnail screen appears on the viewfinder screen 2 Select either REMAIN remaining capacity or USED used capacity the main menu CLIP PROPERTY REMAIN SETUP W P2 card status display items REMAIN Displays remaining capacity on the P2 card as the P2 card status display Factory setting USED Displays used memory capacity on the P2 card as the P2 card
56. 163 according to the battery in use ENDURA Select when IDX ENDURA battery is used to operate at near STAT end and end according to the percentage value of the charge level information Set the percentage value of ENDURA STAT NEAR END near end and ENDURA STAT END end the main menu gt I F SETUP gt BATTERY SETTING page 163 according to the battery in use EXT DC IN SELECT Sets the type of charge level to connect a battery to the lt DC IN gt terminal Also detects a charge level that corresponds to the selected type Information about selecting a battery type is the same as BATTERY SELECT Displays the analog voltage on the viewfinder screen DC PWR SUPPLY HYTRON140 DIONIC90 ENDURA10 PAG L96e TYPE A TYPE B TYPE C BATT NEAR END Selects whether to play the warning sound at battery near end ALARM ON OFF BATT NEAR END If set to ON the warning sound and warning display output can be canceled CANCEL when the MARKER SEL gt lt MODE CHECK MENU CANCEL switch is pushed towards the lt MCK MCL gt side at battery near end ON OFF BATT END ALARM Sets whether to output the warning sound at battery near end ON OFF BATT REMAIN FULL Sets the content of the battery remaining charge bar of the display window when a battery with charge level display function is used 70 Fully displays at 70 100 Fully displays at 100 CARD NEAR
57. 2 Press the MENU button 3 Select CLIP PROPERTY in the main menu CLIP gt PROPERTY and press the lt SET gt button This cannot be modified Deleting clips You can delete unnecessary clips saved in a storage device 1 In the storage device thumbnail screen select the clip you want to delete 2 Press the MENU button 3 Select DELETE the main menu CLIP and press the SET button 4 Move the cursor to YES the confirmation message and press the SET button NOTE You may not be able to delete clips with defective clip or unknown clip indicators Writing back to the P2 card from a storage device import Importing from a TYPE S storage device or P2STORE by partition You can import write back to a P2 card from as storage device to a P2 card with the same part number as the source card by partition card 1 Insert a P2 card that will serve as the input destination Make sure to insert a formatted P2 card 2 Connecting a storage device 3 Select STORAGE in the main menu CLIP EXPLORE to display the explorer screen 4 In the explorer screen display the partition thumbnails to be imported 5 Select IMPORT in the main menu CLIP 6 Place the cursor on the import destination P2 card slot number and press the SET button Start importing by selecting YES in the confirmation message COPY COMPLETED will be displayed when importing is completed NOTE
58. Assigns the function for displaying the waveform or vector in the viewfinder and LCD monitor Select the waveform display in the main menu gt CAMERA gt SW MODE gt WFM AUD CH1 3 Assigns the function for switching the input signal of audio channel 1 or audio channel be switched in the main menu I F SETUP gt MIC AUDIO VR SELECT Each press of the button switches in the order FRONT gt REAR W L At this time the AUDIO IN switch also accepts operations Priority is given to operations that accepted later on AUD CH2 4 Assigns the function for switching the input signal of audio channel 2 or audio channel 4 be switched in the main menu I F SETUP gt MIC AUDIO VR SELECT Each press of the button switches in the order FRONT gt REAR W L At this time the AUDIO IN switch also accepts operations Priority is given to operations that accepted later on REC SW Assigns the function of the REC button RET SW Assigns the function of the RET button on the lens PRE REC Assigns the function for switching the pre recording function to enabled disabled SLOT SEL Assigns the function for switching the card to record to when two or more cards are inserted USB MODE Assigns the function for switching USB device mode or USB storage mode to enabled disabled Switching between the USB device mode and the USB storage m
59. CANCEL gt button This works as the cancelation function page 24 Operations with the lt SHIFT gt button held down are displayed at the bottom of each button 24 Chapter 2 Description of Parts Time code section Time code section Q 6 5 6 7 8 1 HOLD button The time data indication on the counter display area is retained for the duration that this button is held down However the time code generator continues to advance Press the button again to release the retained state This function is used to learn the time code or time data of the time counter display CTL of a particular recorded scene 2 RESET button Resets the time data CTL of the time counter display to 00 00 00 00 To return the real time data to factory settings set the lt TCG gt switch to the SET position and press the RESET button Both the time code data and user bits data are reset to 0 3 DISPLAY counter display selector switch page 27 Displays the CTL time code and user bits in the time counter display of the display window according to the setting position of the DISPLAY and lt TCG gt switches The shooting date shooting time and time zone can also be displayed by pressing the HOLD button UB Displays the users bits shooting date shooting time and time zone TC Displays the time code lt CTL gt Displays CTL 4 TCG
60. CARD LENS IRIS LOAD USER DATA Loop recording LOW SETTING M MAINTENANCE Marker select function MATRIX Menu see eph ennt Rua pa ERA OPTION MENU Setting menu USER MENU Metadata MIC AUDIO microP2 memory card Inserting Removing Write protection Microphone MID SETTING Mode check MODE CHECK IND MONI OUT MARKER N Normal speed playback iiti tei aan 45 OPTION 169 OPTION MENU 169 OUTPUT SEL 157 Formatting Recording time Status Status display Write P2 memory card Inserting Removing Write protection PAINT Playback Pre recording 207 Index Propertie deter cate nin adi irr us PROPERTY Proxy recording R Rain RB GAIN CONTROL REC FUNCTION REC METADATA Recording check function Recording format Recording functions Recording levels REC PB REC PB SETUP Remote control RGB BLACK CONTROL S 5 CAMERA SETTING tton tont 142 SCENE Scene file data SD CARD PROPERTY SDI OUT1 MARKER SD memory card Formatting Handling Inserting Operation Removing Status display Setting data Setting menu Basic operations Initializing Setting the region of use Setting USER MENU SETUP D
61. CONT H Control signal from remote control to camera H 4 CAM CONT C Control signal from remote control to camera C 5 R C ON Recognition signal of remote control Low ON 6 R C VIDEO OUT Video signal output to remote control 7 R C VIDEO GND GND for video signal to remote control 8 NC Not used 9 UNREG 12 V DC 12 V power supply AJ RC10G Max 0 75 A 10 GND GND Panasonic Parts No K1AY110JA001 Manufacturer Parts No HR10A 10R 10SC 71 Hirose Electric Co Manufacturer Parts No of cable connector HR10A 10P 10P 73 Hirose Electric Co NOTE Ensure that the total current from the DC OUT terminal lt REMOTE gt terminal VF terminal LENS terminal does not exceed 2 5 A DC OUT 4L 37 Um 20 GND R TALLY open collector REC START SW 412 V OUT DC 11 V 17 V max 1 5 Panasonic Parts No K1AY104J0001 Manufacturer Parts No HR10A 7R 4SC 73 Hirose Electric Co NOTE Ensure that the total current from the DC OUT terminal lt REMOTE gt terminal VF terminal LENS terminal does not exceed 2 5 A Manufacturer Parts No of cable connector HR10A 7P 4 73 Hirose Electric Co VF 1 UNREG 12V DC 12 V power AJ HVF21KG approx 0 35 A 2 UNREG 12V DC 12 V power 3 A9 0V DC 9 V power not used 4 VF P amp GND Viewfinder Pg signal GND 5 VF P4 GND Viewfi
62. Camera ID 10 characters x 3 lines can be set as the camera ID which can be recorded superimposed over the color bar image It can also be recorded superimposed simultaneously on the date time data Recording output of time codes user bits Recording and output of time codes System setting state Recording TC Output TC LINE amp FREQ REC FORMAT LTC VITC TC OUT LTC VITC of HD SDI Recording run free run 1080 59 94i Respective format DFV NDF Same value as LTC LTC is output LTC is output 30 frames 1080 501 Respective format Recordingrun iree Fun Same value as LTC LTC is output LTC is output 25 frames Recording run free run 1080 59 94P Respective format DF NDF Same value as LTC LTC is output LTC is output 30 frames 1080 50P Respective format Recording runiiiee run Same value as LTC LTC is output LTC is output 25 frames Recording run free run Same value as LTC 480 59 94i Respective format DF NDF No recording in DV Same value as LTC None 30 frames mode Recording run free run Same wales LTC 576 50i Respective format 9 No recording in DV Same value as LTC None 25 frames mode For free run the time code is slaved to the input TC of the lt TC IN gt terminal Recording and output of user bits System setting state Recording UB Output UB LINE amp FREQ REC FORMAT LTC UB VITC UB SIS m LTC UB for HD SDI VITC UB for HD SDI Fo
63. Data file IVF By page By item S U F MODE CHECK IND STATUS 4 ILED V FUNCTION i AUDIO E 4 CAC USER SW STATUS 4 4 P ON IND FA d V 241742 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list Item IVF USER MENU By item Data file ILED GAIN 0dB lt DS GAIN SHUTTER WHITE PRESET EXTENDER B GAMMA MATRIX COLOR CORRECTION FILTER ATW SISSIN ISISI SISS SISISsisisisisisisislo S N SIS S SIS S Dem SIS SISISIS ft Item CAMERA USER MENU Data file By page By item CAMERA ID ID1 ID2 ID3 154 4 NIN 14 SISIS m Item CAMERA USER MENU Data file By page By item SHUTTER SPEED SYNCHRO SCAN POSITION1 POSITION2 POSITIONS POSITION4 POSITIONS POSITION6 SI SI SI SI SISISIO SI SI SI SI SISIS IC lt 15 14 lt lt lt 4 Im Item CAMERA USER MENU Data file By page By item SHUTTER SELECT POSITION1 SEL POSITION2 SEL SEL POSITION4 SEL POSITIONS SEL POSITION6 SEL SIN NINISISI C SISISISISISIT
64. END Selects the near end percent value 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 18 20 When the battery charge level percentage cannot be detected this will follow the near end voltage value set in TYPE A f a battery is used for which the remaining charge is displayed in units of 1096 the setting value and actual near end warning may vary slightly ENDURA STAT END Selects the end percent value 1 10 When the battery charge level percentage cannot be detected this will follow the end voltage value set in TYPE A When using a battery which displays battery charge level by units of 10 end is determined only in two stages when it is set between 1 and 5 or when it is set between 6 to 10 are factory settings SD memory cards cannot be read and file operations associated with saves LOAD USER DATA and LOAD FACTORY DATA cannot be performed in the following cases While the thumbnail screen is displayed Remedy Press the lt THUMBNAIL gt button to close the thumbnail screen and try the operations again During playback Remedy Press the STOP button to stop playback and try the operations again 164 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list SETUP DATA SD CARD Item Description of settings Remark LOAD Loads the file selected from the setup data file list saved to the SD memory card to the camera
65. END Sets whether to output the warning sound at P2 card near end ALARM ON OFF CARD NEAR END Sets remaining time to emit the P2 card near end warning TIME 2min 3min CARD END ALARM Sets whether to output the warning sound at P2 card end ON OFF CARD REMAIN Seg Sets the time of one segment i for the P2 card remaining capacity bar in the display window 3min Seg One segment is three minutes 5min Seg One segment is five minutes are factory settings BATTERY SETTING Item Description of settings Remark BATTERY MODE Selects whether to set the near end voltage of a battery AUTO Automatically set MANUAL Manually set HYTRON140 NEAR Selects the near end voltage in steps of 0 1 V when the main menu gt I F END SETUP BATTERY P2CARD BATTERY SELECT is set to HYTRON140 12 0V 13 1V 15 0V DIONIC 90 NEAR Selects the near end voltage in steps of 0 1 V when the main menu gt I F END SETUP gt BATTERY P2CARD BATTERY SELECT is set to DIONIC90 12 0V 13 7V 15 0V are factory settings 163 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list ENDURA10 NEAR END Description of settings Selects the near end voltage in steps of 0 1 V when the main menu gt I F SETUP gt BATTERY P2CARD BATTERY SELECT is set to ENDURA10 12 0V 13 4V 15 0V Remark PAG L96e NEAR E
66. Each time the button is pressed the display changes in order VECTOR from no display waveform display vector display gt no display WFM DISP Selects whether to display the waveform monitor on the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor VF Displays on the viewfinder LCD Displays on the LCD monitor VF LCD Displays on the viewfinder and the LCD monitor S GAIN OFF Selects a method to release super gain mode L M H Released by changing the GAIN switch or lt S GAIN gt switch lt 05 gt button S GAIN Released by the lt S GAIN gt switch USER button only DS GAIN OFF Selects a method to release digital super gain mode accumulated gain L M H Released by changing the GAIN switch or lt DS GAIN gt switch USER button DS GAIN Released by the lt DS GAIN gt switch lt USER gt button only D ZOOM x2 Selects whether to enable 2x when digital zoom is assigned to the USER button of the camera ON OFF D ZOOM x3 Selects whether to enable when digital zoom is assigned to the USER button of the camera ON OFF D ZOOM x4 Selects whether to enable 4x when digital zoom is assigned to the USER button of the camera ON OFF FBC SHUTTER ON Selects whether to permit the operation of the flash band compensation FBC function when the lt SHUTTER gt switch is set to ON ENABLE Permits the operation of the flash band compensation function with the USER
67. Insert the SD memory card into the camera 2 Select the main menu FILE SD CARD PROPERTY or the main menu CLIP PROPERTY SD CARD The format status is displayed in SD STANDARD If NOT SUPPORTED is displayed format the card with the camera n the PROXY REM item check the remaining recording time of the proxy data The remaining SD memory card capacity displayed PROXY indicates the remaining proxy recording but it may differ from the actual available space If short recordings are repeated the available recording time may decrease significantly compared to the available space When the remaining capacity exceeds 999 min 999min is displayed If the proxy is not recorded to the SD memory card the remaining time is not displayed n the NUMBER OF CLIPS item check the number of clips recorded in the SD memory card If the number of clips is 1000 or more no additional proxy data can be recorded to the SD memory card even if there is available capacity Shot marks and text memos cannot be added to the clips in the SD memory card Deleting the clips recorded on the P2 card on the thumbnail screen does not delete the proxy data recorded on the SD memory card The proxy data cannot be recorded to the SD memory card containing data for updating NOTE While recording to the SD memory card the remaining capacity can be checked with the mode check on the viewfinder screen If prox
68. LVL CONTROL CH1 MAIN usB LVL CONTROL CH2 USER SYSTI LCD MIC LOWCUT CH1 MIC LOWCUT CH2 v Channel 1 channel 2 Channel 3 channel 4 AUTO LVL CH1 AUTO LVL CH2 Adjustment method AUDIO SELECT CH1 3 gt switch AUDIO SELECT CH2 4 gt switch OFF CH1 LVL CONTROL CH2 Manual adjustment by LVL CONTROL MENSES dial ON Automatic adjustment AUTO Selection of the audio level adjustment method can be checked on the AUDIO screen of the mode check display page 78 Selection status of level adjustment method AUDIO RES SAMPLE MIC POWER MENU FRONT MENU R AUTO EET 60 Adjustment method Manual adjustment by adjustment Automatic adjustment Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Selection of external reference signal and generator lock setting Selection of external reference signal and generator lock setting Locking the video signal to the external reference signal The video signal output from the camera can be locked to the reference signal supplied from an external source The camera can receive the external reference signal from the lt GENLOCK IN gt terminal exclusively for analog signal and lt SDI IN gt terminal exclusively for SDI signal Generator locking to the reference signal supplied from the lt GENLOCK IN gt terminal The HD Y signal or a composit
69. MARK Enables disables frame marker ON OFF ON OFF FRAME SIG Sets frame marker aspect ratio VISTA is 16 8 65 and CNSCO is 16 6 81 4 3 13 9 14 9 VISTA CNSCO USER BOX Sets whether to display the user box to the signal from the lt SDI OUT1 gt terminal USER BOX WIDTH Sets the width of the user box 1 13 100 USER BOX HEIGHT Sets the height of the user box 1 13 100 USER BOX H POS Sets the horizontal position of the center of the user box 50 0 50 USER BOX V POS Sets the vertical position of the center of the user box 50 0 50 158 are factory settings Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list MONI OUT MARKER Item Description of settings Remark CENTER MARK Switches the center marker 11 large 2 Open center large 3 small 4 Open center small OFF Does not display SAFETY MARK Selects the type of frame for the safety zone marker e f the main menu gt I F SETUP gt DOWNCON 1 Box SETTING DOWNCON is set to SIDE CROP or LETTER BOX the safety zone marker 2 Corners is not displayed to the down converter output OFF Does not display signal in HD mode SAFETY AREA Sets the size of the safety zone marker The constant ratio of length to width can be set in 1 increments 80 90 100
70. MEDIA can also be assigned to the USER button For shooting White black balance adjustment to completion of recording For shooting use the following steps lt CC FILTER gt lt ND FILTER gt dial lt REC gt button lt SHUTTER gt switch lt AUTO BAL switch WHITE BAL switch 0200000 Select the CC FILTER gt lt ND FILTER dial setting according to the light conditions For details on setting example of the CC FILTER gt lt ND FILTER dial refer to Shooting and recording playback functions section page 20 N Operate the lt WHITE BAL gt switch W When white balance is already saved in memory Set the WHITE BAL switch to lt A gt or lt B gt W When neither white or black balance is saved in memory and you have no time to adjust the white balance Set the WHITE BAL switch to lt PRST gt The white balance matched to the filter is automatically adjusted according to the CC FILTER gt lt ND FILTER dial setting position W To adjust the white balance on the spot Select the filter matched to the lighting conditions Set the WHITE BAL switch to lt A gt or lt B gt shoot a white test subject and follow the steps below to adjust the white balance 1 Press the AUTO W B BAL switch towards the AWB side to adjust the white balance 49 2 Press the AUTO W B BAL switch towards the ABB side to adjust the black balance page 51 3
71. On Ow Of DC IN 1 GND 2 NC 3 NC 4 412V Panasonic Parts No K1AA104H0038 Manufacturer Parts No HA16RX 4P SW1 76 Hirose Electric Co NOTE Make sure that the polarity of the external power supply is correct FRONT MIC IN GND L CH IN H H L CH IN C R CH IN H R CH IN C Panasonic Parts No K1AB105B0002 Manufacturer Parts No NEUTRIK AUDIO IN 1 GND AUDIO IN H AUDIO IN C Panasonic Parts No K1AY103A0001 Manufacturer Parts No HA16PRM 3SG 72 Hirose Electric Co AUDIO OUT eo GND L CH OUT H L CH OUT C R CH OUT H AlRlwlm R CH OUT C Panasonic Parts No K1AA105H0016 Manufacturer Parts No HA16RD 5P 76 Hirose Electric Co NOTE AUDIO OUT gt terminal on the camera is the XLR terminal and outputs balanced audio signals To make unbalanced connection with an external device using a pin plug release pins 3 and 5 The following is a connection example Pin terminal Do not use the cable where the pin 3 pin 5 and pin 1 are connected Doing so may result in a malfunction 204 Chapter 10 Specification Details of the connector signals REMOTE 1 CAM DATA H Data from camera to remote control H 2 CAM DATA C Data from camera to remote control C 3 CAM
72. Press the AUTO W B BAL switch towards the lt AWB gt side to adjust the white balance 3 Point the camera at your subject and adjust the focus and zoom 4 When using the electronic shutter set the shutter speed and shutter mode page 53 36 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback Basic procedures 5 Press the lt REC gt button to start recording The REC lamp in the viewfinder is illuminated during recording 6 To stop recording press the lt REC gt button again The REC lamp in the viewfinder goes out g NOTE During recording operation buttons lt lt lt q REW gt lt FF gt gt gt lt PLAY PAUSE gt lt STOP gt do not function When highly bright subjects e g sun or lighting are shot the periphery of the subject might be colored Standard recording Press the lt REC gt button to start recording of video and audio on the P2 card A data consisting of video and sound generated by a single shooting action together with additional information is called a clip lt REC gt button NOTE In the following cases it may take time to complete writing to the P2 card Pressing the REC button does not accept operations immediately When short burst recording is stopped When stopping recording immediately after recording to the second P2 card Just after inserting a P2 card or turning on the power recording is started using the internal memory of the camera In this case recor
73. S MATRIX TABLE S COLOR CORRECT Selects the color collection table for the linear matrix A OFF Switches the 15 axis independent color correction on off ON OFF e 6dB in S MASTER GAIN cannot be selected when NORMAL is set in main menu PAINT gt S CAMERA SETTING SHOOTING MODE 139 are factory settings Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list When saving or reading setup files from an SD memory card you can save items with an S and items without an S separately Items with an S in front of the item name are the targets for PAINT S SELECT in the main menu FILE SETUP DATA SELECT Items without S are targets for PAINT LEVEL ADDITIONAL DTL Item Description of settings Remark KNEE APE LVL Changes the detail level of high brightness areas OFF 1 2 5 DTL GAIN Changes the level of upper direction of detail 31 0 31 DTL GAIN Changes the level of lower direction of detail 31 0 31 DTL CLIP Sets the level at which detail signals will be clipped 0 63 DTL SOURCE Sets the ratio of RGB signal components that will create the detail R G 2 G B 2 2G R B 4 3G R 4 G MASTER DTL Changes the master detail level 31 0 31 SKIN TONE DTL Item are factory settings Description of settings Remark
74. Sets the Bch pedestal level 100 0 100 PEDESTAL OFFSET Sets the Rch Gch and Bch pedestal levels after adjusting the automatic black balance ON Keeps each of the values set for R PEDESTAL G PEDESTAL and B PEDESTAL OFF Sets the pedestal level of Rch Gch and Bch to 0 R FLARE Adjusts the Rch flare level The adjusted value of this item is added to the flare adjusted value in the main menu gt MAINTENANCE gt LENS FILE ADJ 100 0 100 G FLARE Adjusts the Gch flare level The adjusted value of this item is added to the flare adjusted value in the main menu MAINTENANCE LENS FILE ADJ 100 0 100 B FLARE Adjusts the Bch flare level The adjusted value of this item is added to the flare adjusted value in the main menu gt MAINTENANCE gt LENS FILE ADJ 100 0 100 are factory settings MATRIX Item Description of settings Remark S L MATRIX TABLE Selects the color correction table when the GAIN switch is lt L gt B OFF 5 M MATRIX Selects the color correction table when the GAIN switch is on M TABLE B OFF 5 MATRIX TABLE Selects the color correction table when the GAIN switch is on lt H gt OFF are factory settings 136 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list Item S MATRIX TABLE Descri
75. Switching to the USB storage mode EXIT USB MODE SELECT gt OFF SDI MONI OUT MARKER EXIT OUT DEVICE SDI USB MODE MONI OUT MARKER GENLOCK MIC AUDIO GENLOCK MIC AUDIO LCD MONITOR BATTERY P2CARD v LCD MONITOR BATTERY P2CARD v Fig 1 Fig 2 1 Set STORAGE in the main menu gt I F SETUP gt USB LAN USB MODE SELECT Fig 1 For details refer to Setting menu basic operations page 134 2 Set ON in the main menu gt SETUP USB LAN USB MODE Fig 2 The camera enters the USB storage mode e During USB storage mode USB STORAGE CONNECTED is displayed at the center of the viewfinder screen and the USB lamp is illuminated If the hard disk drive is not connected properly USB STORAGE DISCONNECTED is displayed and the USB lamp flashes e USB MODE be assigned to the USER buttons USER MAIN gt lt USER1 gt lt USER2 gt the lt SHOT MARKER gt and TEXT MEMO buttons the main menu CAMERA USER SW pressing these buttons switches between USB storage mode and normal storage mode However if these buttons are pressed while a menu or thumbnail is open the mode cannot be changed to USB device mode or normal mode For details refer to Assigning functions to USER buttons page 56 3 Press the lt THUMBNAIL gt button The thumbnail screen is displayed Ensure that USB is displayed
76. U Can save read as user data Refer to the main menu FILE LOAD USER DATA page 166 INITIALIZE page 166 Can read in main menu gt FILE gt INITIALIZE LOAD FACTORY DATA Refer to INITIALIZE page 166 Indicates whether details set in the menu are saved to the memory or read from the memory is a data file target is not a data file target Item USER MENU Data file PAINT By page By item R GAIN AWB PRE 4 B GAIN AWB PRE R GAIN AWB A GAIN AWB A RB GAIN CONTROL R GAIN AWB B B GAIN AWB B AWB A GAIN OFFSET AWB B GAIN OFFSET NIN TN lt TN IN lt lt 111515151510 111515151515 NIN TN IN TN YSN 4 lt m lt lt lt 15 Item PAINT USER MENU Data file By page By item RGB BLACK CONTROL MASTER PED R PEDESTAL G PEDESTAL B PEDESTAL PEDESTAL OFFSET R FLARE G FLARE B FLARE lt lt lt 5 NIN 14 lt lt lt SISISISISI SISIS SI ISISISISI SISIS SI S SISISI SI S IS Item PAINT USER MENU Data file By page By item MATRIX S L MATRIX TABLE S M MATRIX TABLE S H MATRIX TABLE S MATRIX TABLE MATRIX R G MATRIX R B MATRIX G R MATRIX G B MATRIX B R MATRIX B
77. VF By page By item S U F VF MARKER TABLE 7 7 CENTER MARK Sf J SAFETY MARK JS A J SAFETY AREA mE 2 Vv FRAME MARK v V S FRAME SIG V V FRAME LVL Jn J J liem USER MENU Data file IVF By page By item S U F VF USER BOX USER BOX i i i USER BOX WIDTH T i v i USER BOX HEIGHT d 7 USER BOX POS JV USER BOX V POS S 7 2 Item USER MENU Data file IVF By page By item S U F VF INDICATOR EXTENDER 4 SHUTTER 2 FILTER 7 i WHITE 4 L GAIN V V IRIS P CAMERA ID m i ID POSITION 4 4 DATE TIME ZOOM FOCUS y Fi SYSTEM MODE 4 4 P4 REC FORMAT 7 7 7 CAMERA MODE 7 7 7 7 COLOR TEMP 7 7 7 7 CAC v GAMMA MODE 4 7 y DRS v y FBC 4 4 FBC WARNING DISP 4 SHOOTING MODE 4 FOCUS BAR 2 P2CARD REMAIN 4 REC MEDIA BATTERY Fi AUDIO LVL ER 7 y TC ON COLOR BAR A 4 ITC 7 i SYSTEM INFO 7 y SAVE LED REC STATUS PROXY DISP 2 2 4 P REC REC y y 7 Hem USER MENU
78. adjustment of the recording level can be selected from three methods adjustment dial adjustment by menu items and automatic adjustment Select which two channels CH1 2 or CH3 4 are to be assigned to the adjustment dial in the main menu gt I F SETUP MIC AUDIO VR SELECT The two channels not assigned to the adjustment dial are automatically adjusted They can also be adjusted by the menu items CH1 2 is assigned to the adjustment dial as the factory setting Selection of level adjustment method At VR SELECT select which of CH1 2 or CH3 4 are to be assigned to the lt AUDIO LEVEL CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO LEVEL CH2 4 gt dial CH1 2 Assigns the lt AUDIO LEVEL CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO LEVEL CH2 4 gt dial to channels 1 2 The lt AUDIO SELECT CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO SELECT CH2 4 gt switches are also enabled for channels 1 2 Channels 3 4 are automatically adjusted When AUTO LVL CH3 and AUTO LVL are set to OFF in the main menu gt I F SETUP gt MIC AUDIO automatic adjustment is canceled and the level can also be adjusted by LVL CONTROL CH3 and LVL CONTROL CH4 CH3 4 Assigns the lt AUDIO LEVEL CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO LEVEL CH2 4 gt dial to channels 3 4 The lt AUDIO SELECT CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO SELECT CH2 4 gt switches are also enabled for channels 3 4 Channels 1 2 are automatically adjusted When AUTO LVL CH1 and AUTO LVL CH2 are set to OFF in the main menu gt I F SETUP gt MIC AUDIO automatic a
79. at the top right of the screen e f a storage device is connected the icon that indicates storage device status at the top right illuminates However a red mark indicates that the device cannot be used For USB storage mode details refer to Connecting to external devices using the lt USB3 0 gt terminal host USB storage mode page 123 4 Exit the USB storage mode There are three ways to do so Turn the POWER switch of the camera to OFF e With the thumbnail screen closed set the main menu gt I F SETUP USB LAN gt USB MODE to OFF Press one of the USER buttons USER MAIN gt lt USER1 gt lt USER2 gt lt SHOT MARKER button or TEXT MEMO button to which USB MODE is assigned However this is disabled when a menu or thumbnail is open NOTE In USB storage mode a P2 card can be played back Camera video and external input cannot be recorded The clips written to the hard disk drive must be written back to the P2 card for playback A storage device cannot be connected to the lt USB2 0 gt terminal sub host page 23 While connecting a storage device use the fully charged battery or an external DC power supply to avoid problems in copying or formatting operations For details on storage devices refer to Storage device types and available functions page 123 186 Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices Connecting to the remote control unit AJ RC10G
80. automatically adjusted or adjusted by LVL CONTROL CH1 or IEVECONIROLGHS gt LVE CONTROL CH1 dex d LVL CONTROL gt LVL CONTROL 2 LVL CONTROL CH2 AMET For details refer to Adjusting the recording levels page 58 FRONT VR Sets whether to enable the lt F AUDIO LEVEL gt dial for input signals selected in The channel is replaced when CH3 4 is selected CH1 CH3 audio CH1 CH3 in VR SELECT Setting values are inherited FRONT Enabled only when FRONT is selected between replaced channels W L Enabled only when wireless microphone receiver is selected REAR Enabled only when REAR is selected ALL Enabled when any input is selected OFF Disabled regardless of the input selected Recording levels do not change even if the volume dial is turned FRONT VR Sets whether to enable the F AUDIO LEVEL dial for input signals selected in The channel is replaced when CH3 4 is selected CH2 CH4 audio CH2 4 in VR SELECT Setting values are inherited FRONT Enabled only when FRONT is selected between replaced channels W L Enabled only when wireless microphone receiver is selected REAR Enabled only when REAR is selected ALL Enabled when any input is selected OFF Disabled regardless of the input selected Recording levels do not change even if the volume dial is turned AUTO LVL Selects whether to automatically adjust the level adjustment method for audio The channel
81. be set by the MON OUT CHARACTER switch independently of the SDI OUT 1 terminal page 67 30 SDI OUT1 gt output terminal This is the output terminal exclusively for SDI Output is performed in the same signal format as in the system mode Down conversion and up conversion are not supported Superimposing of characters can be set independently of the lt HDMI OUT gt SDI OUT2 gt and VIDEO OUT gt terminals page 67 31 lt SDI OUT2 gt monitor output terminal This is the video output terminal for the monitor Video can be output separately from the lt SDI OUT1 gt terminal according to the setting of the main menu gt I F SETUP gt OUTPUT SEL gt MONITOR OUT MODE HD SDI or down converted SD SDI can be selected in OUTPUT SEL gt SDI2 HDMI OUT Up conversion is not supported Superimposing of characters be set by the MON OUT CHARACTER switch independently of the SDI OUT 1 terminal page 67 NOTE As the factory setting output of the signal from the SDI OUT2 gt terminal is stopped To enable output set ON in the main menu gt I F SETUP OUTPUT SEL SDI OUT2 During HD SDI signal output use a 5C FB or higher cable 32 SDI IN input terminal Inputs the HD SD SDI signals Signals from this input terminal can be recorded by setting SDI in the main menu gt SYSTEM SYSTEM MODE REC SIGNAL 3G HD SDI input signals can be recorded at 1080P For detail
82. black balance cannot be adjusted 51 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Adjusting the white and black balance During the automatic black balance execution recording to the P2 card is not performed by pressing the REC button The gain switching circuit is automatically switched during black balance adjustment Flicker or noise sometimes appears on the viewfinder screen This is not a malfunction Even after automatic black balance has ended if black shading is a cause of concern select DETECTION DIG in the main menu gt MAINTENANCE BLACK SHADING and execute black shading adjustment Alternatively set ON the main menu CAMERA SW MODE SHD ABB SW CTL and hold down the AUTO W B BAL gt switch for two seconds or more to adjust black shading B SHD READY will be displayed in the viewfinder and black shading can be automatically adjusted after the automatic black balance operation While black shading is being adjusted B SHD ACTIVE will be displayed in the viewfinder After this be sure to close down the lens aperture until B SHD OK is displayed in the viewfinder Note however that when the remote control unit AJ RC10G optional or the extension control unit AG EC4G optional is connected black shading cannot be automatically adjusted even by holding down the ABB switch When black balance is being automatically adjusted when ABB ACTIVE is displayed in the view
83. built in battery to remember the date and time If the camera is not turned for more than a half year the built in battery runs out and when the POWER switch is turned ON BACK EMPTY may be displayed on the viewfinder screen for approx 5 seconds In that case charging of the built in battery is complete by connecting an external DC power supply or a battery and leaving the camera turned off for approximately four hours Set the date and time after charging is complete Charging is disabled when the time code on the display window disappears with power turned off To charge the battery set ON in the main menu gt SYSTEM gt SYSTEM SETUP gt P DFF LCD DISPLAY and display the time code on the display window If BACK UP BATT EMPTY is still displayed in the viewfinder screen after charging when the POWER switch is turned ON the built in battery needs to be replaced Consult your dealer 193 Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspection Warning system Warning system Warnings description list If an error is detected immediately after the camera turns on or during operation the WARNING lamp the lamp on the viewfinder screen and an alarm indicate the error NOTE The priority order of each item is the warning lamp tally lamp and alarms and if multiple errors occur simultaneously highest priority one is indicated Reduced wireless audio reception may not be indicated
84. characters superimposed on images ON Superimposes output from SDI OUT2 and other terminals OFF Does not superimpose SDI OUT2 Turns SDI OUT2 gt terminal output ON OFF ON Performs output OFF Stops output VIDEO OUT Turns VIDEO OUT gt terminal output ON JOFF ON Performs output OFF Stops output are factory settings 157 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list Item SDI2 HDMI OUT Selects the signa Description of settings form to output to the monitor output terminal SDI OUT2 gt or Remark lt HDMI OUT SYSTEM Outputs in the system mode signal format MODE DOWNCON Outputs the down converter signal 1080P SDI2 HDMI Selects whether to convert the output signal of the monitor output terminal SDI If the main menu I F SETUP gt OUTPUT OUT OUT2 gt or lt HDMI OUT to 1080i when in 1080P mode SEL gt SDI2 HDMI OUT is set to DOWNCON 1080P Outputs as 1080P the signal that was down converted is output 7 regardless of these settings 1080i Converts to 1080i and outputs 3G SDI OUT Selects 1080P signals of the HD SDI output in 1080P mode LEVEL A Selects the LEVEL A method LEVEL B Selects the LEVEL B DL method MONITOR OUT Selects the output signals of the monitor output terminal SDI OUT2 gt lt HDMI MODE OUT gt or VIDEO OUT2 gt Operates independently of the SDI OU
85. charge level information EMP Displayed when there is no charge level on batteries with charge level information or the level is at the near end setting value or below MAX Displayed when batteries with charge level information are fully charged 34 P2 card remaining free space This is the slot No This is displayed in black and white inversion when the slot No is recording destination It flashes while the card is being recognized EIE Displays the remaining space on the media in each slot During a near end it flashes min 0 to 599 indicates minutes while 600 minutes or longer indicates hours No display Not displayed when a card is not inserted END Displayed when there is no space remaining on each card WP Displayed when the P2 card is write protected ERR Displayed in the case of format errors or authentication errors Displayed when the loop recording mode is set During the mode check the 2nd line displayed the standard recording time of LOOP loop recording LOOP flashes when loop recording is not possible for example when there is no more space remaining on the P2 card 35 Recording media display From among P2 microP2 memory card slots displays the slots that can be used for recording playback which is set in the main menu REC PB gt REC PB SETUP REC MEDIA P2 P2 memory card slot mP2 microP2 memory card slot 36 Syste
86. clip length duration at the cursor position and the current rough playback position against the clip length The playback position display is enabled when RESUME is selected in the main menu CLIP THUMBNAIL SETUP PB POSITION The approximate playback position is displayed when the playback start position is not at the beginning 10 Number of selected clips Shows the number of selected clips and the total number of clips 11 Clip number The number assigned to the clip on the P2 card is displayed normally in the order from the earliest recording date and time The clip numbers of clips that cannot be played are shown in red and the unplayable indicator 2 15 also displayed For details refer to Thumbnail screen display settings page 111 12 M Shot mark indicator Displayed for the clip of a thumbnail with a shot mark attached For details refer to Shot mark recording function page 39 13 Indicator for clips with proxy Displayed for clips with proxy attached 14 Text memo indicator Displayed for clips with text memo data attached 15 Edit copied clip indicator Displayed for the edit copied clip 16 Wide clip indicator Displayed for clips recorded with the 16 9 aspect ratio However it does not accompany clips in HD format 17 Incomplete clip indicator This is displayed when clips are saved across multiple P2 cards and either of the P2 cards is not inserted in a card slot 18 ME Defective clip indicato
87. details on SD memory cards to be used refer to Cautions when using SD memory cards page 22 NOTE Files which were not edited by P2 Viewer Plus are displayed as UNKNOWN DATA and may not be readable GLOBAL CLIP ID Displays the global clip ID that shows the shooting status of the clip USER CLIP NAME Displays the clip name set by the user VIDEO Displays FRAME RATE frame rate of the clip PULL DOWN pull down format and ASPECT RATIO AUDIO Displays SAMPLING RATE sampling frequency of recorded audio and BITS PER SAMPLE quantizing bits for recorded audio ACCESS Displays CREATOR person who recorded the clip CREATION DATE date when the clip was recorded EAST UPDATE DATE date of the latest update of the clip and LAST UPDATE PERSON person who made the latest update of the clip DEVICE Displays MANUFACTURER name of the device manufacturer SERIAL NO serial number of the device and MODEL NAME model name of the device SHOOT Displays SHOOTER name of the person who shot the video START DATE start date of shooting END DATE end date of shooting and LOCATIONJ ALTITUDE LONGITUDE LATITUDE SOURCE PLACE NAME altitude longitude latitude and source of the information and name of the location SCENARIO Displays PROGRAM NAME SCENE NO and TAKE NO NEWS Displays REPORTER name of the reporter PURPOSE
88. device has a FAT file system the folders displayed are as follows 125 Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips Thumbnail operations Root Folders down to the 3rd level including the CONTENTS folder To copy to a TYPE S storage device one or more partitions are required You can either format the storage device to FAT or perform copying after creating a partition through the export process To cancel the copy process use the cursor buttons to place the cursor on CANCEL and press the SET button A CANCEL confirmation message will appear select YES and press the SET button Clips copied halfway to the copy destination are deleted If you have copied clips to a TYPE S storage device you will not be able to import to that partition by card Also the part number display of the card at that instance will display UNKNOWN Storage device information display explorer screen You can select the following in the explorer screen display Storage device information displ ay Storage device partition or folder thumbnail display selection Target partition or folder selectio n To display the explorer screen select STORAGE in the main menu CLIP EXPLORE and press the SET button 1 Storage device indicator STORAGE EXPLORE 1 FOLDER NAME STORAGE 13 06 28 16 20 49 PARTITION FAT VENDOR 2013 JUN 28 MODEL SIZE 238 4 GB USED GB
89. for copying Do not connect multiple storage devices using a hub even if the storage devices are turned off Do not connect other devices together with your storage device using a hub During a format or copy operation do not unplug the cable eject the target P2 card or turn off the camera or the storage device Rebooting the camera and the storage device is required Because the storage device is very sensitive reading and writing data may become invalid depending on your usage Please note that Panasonic has no responsibility for data loss caused from a storage device failure or other defects and any direct or indirect damage related to these If the contents of the storage device used for copying data from the camera are replaced using another computer the camera operations and storage device data cannot be guaranteed For P2 cards containing defective clips it is recommended that you copy data to a storage device after restoring in advance A storage device with the SATA Serial ATA PATA Parallel ATA interface connected using a USB conversion cable may not be recognized Do not connect or disconnect the cable during playback on the camera Playback may not be performed properly Connecting a storage device 1 Switch the camera to USB storage mode For details refer to Switching to the USB storage mode page 186 2 Connect the storage device to the lt USB3 0 gt terminal When connecting a storage device which
90. gt I F SETUP MIC AUDIO VR SELECT is automatically adjusted The recording level can also be manually adjusted by the AUDIO LEVEL CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO LEVEL 2 4 gt dials or F AUDIO LEVEL dial when the switch is set towards lt MANU gt You can select whether to adjust the recording level of audio channels 3 4 1 2 according to MIC AUDIO VR SELECT automatically or manually in MIC AUDIO AUTO LVL CH3 CH1 and AUTO LVL CH4 CH2 adjusted by MIC AUDIO LVL CONTROL CH3 CH1 and LVL CONTROL 2 On the camera you can select whether to adjust the audio level of channels 1 2 or channels 3 4 by the AUDIO LEVEL CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO LEVEL CH2 4 gt dial As the factory setting the audio of channels 1 2 is set to be adjusted by the level adjustment dial With HD cards too four audio channels are recorded to P2 cards When SDI input signals are recorded the settings made here are disabled and audio signals from the SDI IN terminal are recorded at all times Selecting audio input signals By the lt AUDIO IN gt switch select the input signal to be recorded to audio channel 1 2 3 4 lt AUDIO IN gt switch The input selection can be checked on the AUDIO screen of the mode check display eem SAU Dil SAMPLE RES MIC POWER MENU FRONT REAR VR SELECT WATE TE MENU AUTO VR Adjusting the recording levels On the camera
91. gt button Set the function to be assigned in the main menu CAMERA USER SW gt TEXT MEMO 4 14 P2 memory card access LED page 32 Indicate the access status of recording and playback of each card 15 P2 memory card slot 16 Busy active status indication lamp page 86 Indicate the active status of the SD memory card and is illuminated when the card is active NOTE Do not insert or remove the card while the lamp is lit This might damage the SD memory card 17 SD memory card slot page 86 This is the insertion slot for the SD memory card optional Use the SD memory card for recording opening the setting menu and lens files for the camera or uploading metadata or proxy recording etc NOTE Cautions when using SD memory cards On the camera use SD memory cards that conform to the SD standard SDHC standard or the SDXC standard When performing proxy recording use SDHC memory cards SDXC memory cards or SD memory cards with the class description of class2 or higher MMC Multi Media Card cannot be used Bear in mind that taking pictures may no longer be possible if you use them When using miniSD microSD cards with the camera always install the adaptor specially designed for miniSD microSD cards The camera will not work properly if only the miniSD microSD adaptor is installed Make sure that the card has been inserted into the adaptor before use Use of Panasonic SD memory cards and miniSD mic
92. is aborted Restoring clips You can restore clips that were made defective as a result of sudden power down during recording or removal of the P2 card being accessed 1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor over the clip to be restored defective clips are indicated by defective clip marks and press the SET button to select the clip 2 Select REPAIR in the main menu CLIP and press the SET button 3 Use the cursor buttons and the SET button to select YES This restores the clip NOTE You can restore clips with yellow defective clip indicators Delete clips with red defective clip indicators If the clips cannot be deleted format the P2 card During restoration of the clips however the defective clip indicator may change from yellow to red and result in the inability to restore the clips Reconnecting incomplete clips Incomplete clips may be generated when clips recorded on multiple P2 cards connected clips are separately copied from each card The reconnection function generates one clip the original connected clip from incomplete clips 1 Use the cursor buttons and the lt SET gt button to select incomplete clips to be reconnected Usually thumbnails of incomplete clips clips with indicator are displayed in a line 2 Select RE CONNECT in the main menu CLIP and press the SET button 3 Use the cursor buttons and the SET button to select YES This reconnects incomplete clips
93. left flashing is incremented by one flashing is decremented by one pun 5 switch by the lt TCG gt switch To advance the time code by free run switch to lt F RUN gt and to advance by recording run switch to lt R RUN gt Settable time code range For 59 94 Hz except for 24PN 00 00 00 00 23 59 59 29 For 50 Hz 00 00 00 00 23 59 59 24 NOTE Switching of DF and NDF is enabled when the system frequency of the camera is set to 59 94 Hz Thumbnail operations and menu operations on thumbnail operation section are not possible while the lt TCG gt switch is set to lt SET gt Time code regeneration When the lt TCG gt switch is set to lt R RUN gt the time code currently recorded to the last frame of the last clip clip with the newest recording date and time recorded to the P2 card can be read and recorded If the P2 card is removed or inserted or a card to be recorded is changed by the SLOT SEL function of the USER button while REGEN is selected in the main menu REC PB TC UB gt FIRST REC TC the time code is carried over and recorded to the clip last recorded on the P2 card that was to be recorded to If there are no recorded clips the time code is recorded from the TC generator value on the camera Regeneration by the recording check function When PRESET is set in the main menu REC PB TC UB FIRST REC TC or after the time code is set or re
94. lens The following four types of chromatic aberration compensation function data for lenses are stored to memory before the camera is shipped 99 Chapter 5 Preparation Mounting and adjusting the lens Indicated Compatible Lens Part No on Camera HA16X 6 3BERM M58 HA22X 7 8BERM M58 Indicated Compatible Lens Part No on Camera HA16x 6 3BERM M58 HA22x 7 8BERM M58 HJ17EX 7 6B IASE HJ17ex 7 6B IASE HJ22EX 7 6B IASE HJ22ex 7 6B IASE NOTE For details on additions and modifications to lenses compatible with the chromatic aberration compensation function visit the support desk at the following website http pro av panasonic net Operation of chromatic aberration compensation function Operate by the following procedure when lens data is already stored on the camera 1 Mount the lens on the camera and connect the lens connector to the camera 2 Set ON in the main menu gt MAINTENANCE gt CAC ADJ gt CAC CONTROL If the lens model number stored on the camera matches the model number of the connected lens match the chromatic aberration data stored on the camera will automatically be read Viewing the operation status of chromatic aberration compensation function 1 Push the MARKER SEL gt lt MODE CHECK MENU CANCEL gt switch towards the lt gt side with the menu not displayed in the viewfinder screen If the letters CAC are displayed at the top right of the viewfin
95. lt gt to select OK and press the jog dial button SET button The confirmation screen is displayed 5 Select YES and press the jog dial button or SET button The file is saved and the file list is updated Reading setting data for scene files 1 Select LOAD in the main menu FILE SCENE and press the jog dial button or SET button The list of scene files currently saved in camera memory is displayed 2 Select the file name to load and press the jog dial button or SET button The confirmation screen is displayed 3 Select YES and press the jog dial button or SET button Loading of the file begins 4 When the completion message is displayed press the jog dial button or SET button Initializing clearing setting data for scene files 1 Select CLEAR in the main menu FILE SCENE and press the jog dial button or SET button The list of scene files currently saved in camera memory is displayed 2 Select the file name to delete and press the jog dial button or SET button The confirmation screen is displayed 3 Select YES and press the jog dial button or SET button Deletion clearing of the file begins How to restore menu setting status to factory setting values The menu setting status on the camera can be returned to factory setting status 1 Select LOAD FACTORY DATA in the main menu gt FILE INITIALIZE and press the
96. memory related warnings battery charge level audio level and time data NOTE If the camera is left with the battery attached the various data will be displayed on the display window even if the power is turned off To turn the display off to save the battery from wearing down set OFF in the main menu gt SYSTEM gt SYSTEM SETUP gt P OFF LCD DISPLAY 2 LIGHT button Controls lighting of the display window Each press toggles lighting of the display window on and off 3 WARNING lamp page 194 Starts flashing or is illuminated if something unusual occurs in the memory 4 USB lamp Lights when the camera is in the USB mode 5 Backtally switch Controls the action of the back and rear tally lamps ON Enables the back and rear tally lamps OFF Disables the back and rear tally lamps 6 Back tally lamp When the back tally switch is set to ON the lamp acts the same way as the front tally lamp at the viewfinder 7 Reartally lamp When the back tally switch is set to ON the lamp acts in the same way as the back tally lamp 26 Chapter 2 Description of Parts Description on display window Description on display window NDFSLAVE HOLD W HDV over over VTCG TIME DATE P DD HEEL FC nm mH h Y minM s D 3 1 MEDIA E mm um um m m m E 2
97. metadata file 42 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback Proxy recording Video audio file XXXXXXXX MP4 or XXXXXXXX MOV Real time metadata file XXXXXXXX BIN The time code user bits and information are recorded to the frame unit Use P2 Viewer Plus to check the proxy data Some versions of P2 Viewer Plus may not be able to check the data For information on P2 Viewer Plus visit the following website http pro av panasonic net NOTE Clips with proxy data recorded with the camera are handled as unknown clips by some P2 devices NGI unknown clip indicator is displayed on the thumbnail and the following operations become unavailable Except in the STD 2CH MP4 mode DELETE REPAIR CLIP RE CONNECTION COPY EXCH THUMBNAIL Adding and deleting TEXT MEMO and SHOT MARK Playback is possible On these devices individual clips with proxy data combined from multiple clips are displayed as an incomplete clip Except in STD 2CH MP4 mode Checking detailed information of the proxy data Operation methods and panels may differ by version 1 Press the lt THUMBNAIL gt button The thumbnail screen appears on the viewfinder screen 2 Select CLIP PROPERTY in the main menu CLIP PROPERTY The clip property screen is displayed 3 Use the cursor buttons to select PROXY 4 Press the lt SET gt button Detailed information about the proxy data is displayed as below W Detail
98. microP2 memory card P2 memory card and microP2 memory card are referred to only as P2 card unless distinguished otherwise Media such as external hard disk drives HDD connected to USB are referred to as storage devices Video that is created during a single recording operation is referred to as a clip Contents Contents Read this 2 Chapter 1 Overview 9 Before using the camera Setting the region of use setting frame frequency etc Accessories Use of the camera on a system Basic configuration devices Expanded configuration devices Accessories Power supply and accessory mounting section 15 Audio input function section Audio output function section Shooting and recording playback functions section Menu operation section and thumbnail operation section Time code section Warning and status display section M Description on display window 27 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback 29 Setting the date time of the internal clock Inserting a P2 card Removing a P2 Preventing accidental erasure P2 card access LEDs and status of P2 cards P2 card recording CPS Content Protection System How to handle data recorded on P2 cards Basic procedures For shooting Standard recording Special recording functions Pre recording Loop recording Hot swap rec
99. mm um um um m n F LOOP 13 5 24 W P2 card battery charge level audio level display 1 Media remaining space indicator bar Indicates the remaining free space in the P2 card using a 7 segment display The P2 card remaining time indicated by a single segment is set in three or five minutes in the main menu gt I F SETUP BATTERY P2CARD CARD REMAIN Seg Segments go out one segment at a time at each preset time 2 Battery charge level indicator bar When a battery with a digital indication indication is used all seven segments up to the F position light if the battery charge level is 70 or higher When the battery charge level falls below 70 the segments go out one by one for each 10 drop When set 100 in the main menu gt I F SETUP BATTERY P2CARD BATT REMAIN FULL seven segments can be set to light at 100 3 Audio channel level meter When the audio channel selector switch is set to lt CH1 2 gt audio channel display numbers 1 and 2 are displayed and the audio level of CH1 and 2 is displayed When lt CH3 4 gt is set audio channel display numbers 3 and 4 are displayed and the audio level of CH3 and CH4 is displayed di NDFSLAVE HOLD W HDV iem B mm 0 mummm CTLVTCG TIMEDATEP REC DICE DICE OU o 4
100. must have at least one minute of free space The standard recording time in accordance with the recording format is displayed as the P2 card remaining capacity displayed in the mode check screen of the display window or viewfinder When loop recording is stopped immediately after an old recording is erased the time recorded on the card is sometimes less than the indicated time When set SDI in the main menu SYSTEM gt SYSTEM MODE REC SIGNAL loop recording will not function Pre recording is disabled It may take time for recording to stop The subsequent operation is not accepted until the P2 card access LED stops flashing and stays illuminated During loop recording all P2 card access LEDs on the P2 cards used for recording are illuminated or flash orange Note that loop recording stops when these P2 cards are removed Loop recording may stop when the input reference signal of the generator lock is disrupted during loop recording Hot swap recording When P2 cards are inserted into two card slots recording can be performed continuously across two cards Also the card other than the one currently being recorded to can be swapped and recording can be continued on two or more cards hot swap recording function Note however P2 card recognition might slow down depending on the timing immediately after pre recording or before and after continuous recording across two card slots that the P2 card is inserted into the
101. number displayed for three seconds during playback when a P2 card error P causes playback to stop Replace the P2 card of the slot where the error occurred DIR NG CARD slot The directory position is not correct Make a card backup immediately None Continue number and use again after formatting Displayed when the fan motor stops FAN STOPPED None The camera operates even if the fan stops Refrain from using Continue immediately PB INTERMITTENT Playback is interrupted on the SDHC SDXC memory card A card None whose playback performance cannot be assured is inserted Use of Continue slot number 2 2 PROXY ERROR None For details refer to Error displays about proxy data recordings Continue page 43 Proxy error PRO RES None For details refer to Error displays about proxy data recordings Continue WARNING page 43 An SDHC SDXC memory card is inserted into the microP2 memory REC IMPOSSIBLE slot None card slot Continue number Recording to the SDHC SDXC memory card is disabled Record to microP2 or P2 memory cards Displayed when a video or audio error occurs during recording Turn the power off and on before using it again FRAME SIGNALI When input signals are disrupted recording continues while disrupted Continue images are recorded Check the signal to be input to the camera Displayed
102. of settings Remark MASTER PED Sets the master pedestal 200 16 200 S MANUAL KNEE Sets the mode when the lt OUTPUT gt lt AUTO KNEE gt switch is lt OFF gt This enables the KNEE MASTER POINT KNEE MASTER SLOPE setting value when the switch is ON ON OFF KNEE MASTER POINT Sets the knee point position in 0 596 steps 70 0 93 0 107 0 The setting becomes invalid when FILM REC or VIDEO REC is selected in the main menu gt PAINT GAMMA GAMMA MODE SEL KNEE MASTER SLOPE Sets the knee inclination 0 85 99 The setting becomes invalid when FILM REC or VIDEO REC is selected in the main menu gt PAINT GAMMA GAMMA MODE SEL S WHITE CLIP Turns the white clip function ON OFF This enables the WHITE CLIP LVL setting value when the function is ON ON OFF WHITE CLIP LVL Sets the white clip level 90 109 A KNEE POINT Sets the auto knee point position in 1 steps This is enabled when the lt OUTPUT gt lt AUTO KNEE gt switch is lt CAM gt lt ON gt 80 90 107 A KNEE LVL Sets the auto knee level 100 107 109 A KNEE RESPONSE Sets the auto knee response speed The smaller the setting value the faster the response speed is 1 4 8 CHROMA LEVEL Sets the chroma level of Pg and P signals When this is set to
103. operation cannot be executed AWB UNABLE Displayed when automatic white balance operation cannot be executed The 2nd line displays that status S GAIN MODE Displayed when super gain is active CHECK FILTER Prompts re confirmation of the filter switching dial position when the power is turned on and automatic white balance is active ABB ACTIVE Displayed when automatic black balance operation is active ABB OK Displayed when automatic black balance operation is ended successfully ABB BREAK Displayed when automatic black balance operation is forcibly ended ABB NG Displayed when automatic black balance operation is not ended successfully B SHD READY Displayed when black shading operation is accepted by holding down the lt AUTO W B BAL gt switch during automatic black balance operation B SHD ACTIVE Displayed when black shading operation is active B SHD OK Displayed when black shading operation is ended B SHD BREAK Displayed when black shading operation is forcibly ended B SHD NG Displayed when black shading operation is not ended successfully Switch selection display WHITE Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is switched One of A B PRST is displayed at ATW MODE Displayed when automatic tracking white balance operation is set K Displays the currently set color temperature AUTO KNEE ON OFF Disp
104. page By item U F THUMBNAIL INDICATOR 4 A SETUP DATA DISPLAY 4 4 THUMBNAIL SIZE A PB POSITION 7 7 7 PROPERTY DISP ltem USER MENU Data file CLIP By page By item 4 ME COPY VERIFY liem USER MENU Data file REC PB By page By item U F REC FUNCTION RECORDING J HOLD 7 PRE REC Z Z PRE REC TIME n Item USER MENU Data file REC PB By page By item U F REC PB SETUP REC MEDIA FILE SPLIT 4 START TEXT MEMOJ 4 P ON SLOT SEL REC START y 4 REC TALLY J ACCESS LED SEEK POS SEL 7 i Hem USER MENU Data file REC PB By page By item U F PROXY SETUP REC MEDIA 4 REC MODE HD 7 7 7 TC SUPER fi v v PROXY DISP y item USER MENU Data file REC PB By page By item U F TC UB UBG MODE 4 VITC UBG MODE 4 DF MODE 4 TCG SET HOLD 4 FIRST REC TC TC OUT V OUTPUT REF 4 REC CHECK REGEN item USER MENU Data file REC PB By page By item C U F REC METADATA LOAD g RECORD USER CLIP NAME INITIALIZE y E RE
105. recorded when color bar signals are recorded OFF Does not record ID POSITION Sets the location to display camera ID UPPER R Upper right UPPER L Upper left LOWER R Lower right LOWER L Lower left DATE TIME Selects whether year month day and hour minute second are displayed simultaneously when the camera ID is displayed ON OFF ZOOM FOCUS Selects the unit of zoom and focus values mm m or mm feet is displayed only when a NUMBER Zoom and focus both display position values from 0 to 99 serial lens is attached mm m Zoom is displayed in units of millimeters and focus in units of meters mm feet Zoom is displayed in units of millimeters and focus in units of feet OFF Neither zoom nor focus is displayed SYSTEM MODE Turns system mode display ON OFF ON OFF REC FORMAT Turns recording format display ON OFF ON OFF CAMERA MODE Turns camera mode display ON OFF ON OFF COLOR TEMP Turns color temperature display ON OFF ON OFF CAC Turns chromatic aberration compensation display ON OFF ON OFF GAMMA MODE Turns gamma curve display ON OFF ON OFF DRS Turns display of DRS which indicates that dynamic range stretcher function is operating ON OFF ON OFF FBC Turns display of FBC which indicates that flash band compensation function is operating ON OFF ON OFF FBC WARNING Sets the warning display for flash band compensation DISP
106. recording again 7 Card error Display in display window Does not display Warning lamp If the error occurs during recording it flashes four times per second for approx three seconds after recording stops It does not flash when it occurs during playback If the error occurs during recording it flashes four times per second for approx three seconds after recording stops Tally lamp It does not flash when it occurs during playback CARD ERROR slot number is displayed Viewfinder When recording stops due to an error it is displayed until the P2 card operates Displayed when it occurs during playback for at least three seconds Alarm If the error occurs during recording it sounds four times per second for approx three seconds after recording stops It does not sound when it occurs during playback Warning content A P2 card error occurred during recording or playback Recording or playback operation The current operation will stop After it stops the P2 card for which the error occurred is write protected Action to take Replace the P2 card 8 Reduced wireless audio receptio n Display in display window Does not display Warning lamp Flashes four times per second When idle or during recording Tally lamp Flashes four times per second during continuous recording Viewfinder The WIRELESS RF display illuminates Alarm Sounds four times per second du
107. start of recording DURATION Displays the time length of the clip V FORMAT Displays recording format of the clip FRAME RATE Displays the frame rate for playback REC RATE Displays the recording frame rate For the clips recorded with variable frame rate compatible devices the frame rate at the time of shooting is displayed 5 Clip metadata The items for referencing clip properties clip metadata are displayed For details refer to Setting clip metadata page 116 119 Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips Thumbnail operations Modifying recorded clip metadata a GLOBAL CLIP ID 8 GLOBAL CLIP ID USER CLIP NAME USER CLIP NAME CREATOR CREATOR CREATION DATE 2013 JUL 03 START TC LAST UPDATE DATE 2013 JUL 03 START UB LAST UPDATE PERSON DATE TIME DURATION V_FORMAT AVCA 100 1080 59 94i THUMBNAIL FRAME RATE 59 941 FRAME 59 941 REC PROXY REC RATE i PROXY AVEISER 100 PRESS EXIT BUTTON TO EXIT PRESS EXIT BUTTON EXIT Fig 1 Fig 2 1 Display the metadata details window for the clip to be modified on the clip properties screen 2 Place the cursor on the item to be modified using the cursor buttons Fig 1 The item of the metadata that can be modified is shown as CREATOR etc 3 Press the lt SET gt button Information about keyboard operation is the same as Checking and modifying uploaded metadata page
108. status display 120 Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips Thumbnail operations Contents of P2 card status display settings Select CARD STATUS in the main menu CLIP gt PROPERTY W When REMAIN is selected P2 REMAIN 0 i 5 9196 3 AUTH NG CARD 95 4 95 PRESS EXIT BUTTON TO EXIT W When USED is selected P2 USED 100 9 AUTH NG CARD 5 5 PRESS EXIT BUTTON TO EXIT P2 USED P2 USED m BRAND Panasonic MODEL NO AJ P2E064XG SERIAL NO AZTO2X0015 USER ID B WARNING RUN DOWN CARD BRAND Panasonic MODEL NO AJ P2M032AG SERIAL CAA0002046 ENCRYPTED NO 5 D 5 PRESS EXIT BUTTON TO EXIT PRESS EXIT BUTTON TO EXIT Fig 1 Fig 2 Write protected mark The iti mark appears when the P2 card is write protected P2 card status remaining capacity The remaining memory capacity of the P2 card is shown as a bar graph and percentage The bar graph indicator moves to the left as the remaining capacity decreases The following displays may also appear depending on the card status FORMAT ERROR An unformatted P2 card is inserted NOT SUPPORTED An unsupported card is inserted NO CARD No P2 card is inserted AUTH NG CARD Indicates that the card is a microP2 memory card which cannot authenticate a CPS password Use the cursor buttons to place the cursor on the P2 card for data to be accessed and
109. status display The status display enables confirmation of the SD memory card format condition available memory space etc J Ls SD STANDARD SUPPORTED USED 704 kB ROGET Se BLANK 3 7 TOTAL 3 7 GB X PROXY REM 539 min NUMBER OF CLIPS 1 00 04 44 21 PROTECT OFF 0012 00 05 10 07 00 05 29 20 2 E 0015 Select SD CARD in the main menu CLIP PROPERTY The same information can be displayed in the main menu FILE SD CARD PROPERTY SD STANDARD Indicates whether an SD memory card is formatted according to the SD SDHC SDXC standard SUPPORTED Complies with SD SDHC SDXC standards NOT SUPPORTED Does not comply with SD SDHC SDXC standards USED Used capacity bytes BLANK Available space bytes TOTAL Total capacity bytes PROXY REM Remaining capacity for proxy recording NUMBER OF CLIPS The number of clips on an SD memory card when clips have been copied to an SD memory card PROTECT Write protected status Connecting to external devices using the lt USB3 0 gt terminal host USB storage mode You can use an HDD or SSD that can be connected via USB 2 0 USB 3 0 However there are certain storage devices that cannot be used depending on the device Storage device types and available functions The available functions differ depending on the storage device you will use The storage device type is displayed after PARTITION
110. supports USB 3 0 use a cable that conforms to the USB 3 0 standard You will not be able to achieve transfer rates faster than USB 2 0 rates using a USB 2 0 cable e f the storage device is recognized and is usable Ilf gray on the top right of the thumbnail screen changes to white Formatting a storage device You can initialize the storage device to a usable format using the TYPE S or the FAT file system STORAGE EXPLORE aa 13 5V ITITION NAME DATE TIME 1ULO5 13 16 25 2013 JUL 05 13 16 SET THUMBNAIL 4 SERIAL 1 Select STORAGE in the main menu gt CLIP EXPLORE and press the lt SET gt button This opens the explorer screen 2334 Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips Thumbnail operations 2 Select desired format S FAT in the main menu CLIP FORMAT STORAGE and press the lt SET gt button 3 Select YES the confirmation message and press the SET button 4 Select YES again when the confirmation message appears and press the SET button This formats the storage device NOTE Formatting the storage devices erases all of its contents Data cannot be recovered once it is formatted Always check the data before formatting Exporting to a storage device by card You can export to a storage device write to a storage device from a P2 card by P2 card The copy results and the maximum number of items that can be copied vary depending on for
111. that indicate the setting status of the camera STATUS screen LED screen FUNCTION screen AUDIO screen CAC screen USER SW screen are switched in order in the viewfinder This does not affect the output signals from the camera The display goes out in about five seconds The display of the current selected Screen is continued by holding down the button If the button is pressed towards the lt MCK MCL gt side while the setting menu is displayed this button doubles as the switch for canceling new setting values lt MCK MCL gt 8 lt GAIN gt switch page 49 Switch the video amplifier gain according to the lighting conditions under which you are shooting The gain values for the lt L gt lt M gt lt H gt positions can be set by each S MASTER GAIN of LOW SETTING MID SETTING or HIGH SETTING in the main menu PAINT Factory settings are L 0 dB 6 dB 12 dB 9 lt OUTPUT gt lt AUTO KNEE selector switch Select the video signals output to the memory viewfinder and video monitor from the camera unit Video captured on the camera is output and the auto knee function is activated SEAMISONS Instead of the auto knee function the dynamic range stretcher DRS function can be assigned Video captured with the camera is output and the auto knee function is not activated The knee point is fixed to the level set by the main menu PAINT KNEE LEVEL KNEE MASTER POINT
112. the level by the F AUDIO LEVEL dial so that input does not become too great When adjusting the recording level by the F AUDIO LEVEL dial perform the following operation Select whether to enable FRONT VR CH1 and FRONT VR CH2 on the line selected as the input signal of each channel the main menu I F SETUP MIC AUDIC OFF Disabled FRONT Enabled when lt gt is selected for the input signal W L Enabled when wireless is selected for the input signal REAR Enabled when lt REAR gt is selected for the input signal ALL Enabled on all input lines W Level adjustment of channels 3 4 Automatic adjustment is enabled when AUTO LVL CH3 and AUTO LVL CH4 are set to ON in the main menu gt I F SETUP MIC AUDIO When these items are set to OFF automatic adjustment stops functioning and the audio level can be adjusted by LVL CONTROL CH3 and LVL CONTROL CH4 in MIC AUDIO When the level adjustment dial is assigned to CH3 4 W Selection of level adjustment of channels 3 4 For the level adjustment method of channels 3 4 select AUTO automatic adjustment or MANU manual adjustment by adjustment dial by the AUDIO SELECT CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO SELECT CH2 4 gt switch When lt MANUs gt is selected the volume of channels 3 4 is adjusted by the AUDIO LEVEL CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO LEVEL CH2 4 gt dial W Adjustment by AUDIO LEVEL CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO LEVEL 2 4 gt dial
113. the menu of the camera to enter the password Only one CPS password can be set on the camera Loading the CPS password again overwrites the previously saved password Loading CPS password from SD memory card 1 Download and install the latest P2 Viewer Plus into a computer 2 With P2 Viewer Plus generate a CPS password and write it to the SD memory card 3 Load the CPS password file 1 Start the camera and insert the SD memory card into the SD card slot 2 Open the thumbnail screen and select the main menu CLIP PROPERTY gt CPS PASSWORD LOAD The password file list is displayed 3 Select the file to be used and press the SET button When loading of the CPS password has succeeded the message LOADING PASSWORD COMPLETED is displayed When loading of the CPS password has failed the warning message is displayed For warnings description refer to Warnings description list page 194 NOTE The CPS password file generated on the SD memory card is encrypted If it is no longer used format the SD memory card for security risk management Setting CPS password using the menu of the camera 1 Open the thumbnail screen and select the main menu CLIP gt PROPERTY CPS PASSWORD SET The software keyboard to enter the CPS password is displayed 2 Enter the CPS password with the keyboard Enter PASSWORD and RETRY PASSWORD for verification and select OK to set the CPS pa
114. the playback start position in the main menu CLIP gt THUMBNAIL SETUP PB POSITION Changing thumbnails Replace thumbnails with images that include previously attached text memos while images are recorded or played back TEXT MEMO E TEXT MEMO 0004 1 00041 f ad ee ome PROPERTY F 00 05 47 04 00 05 21 29 00 04 36 14 00 05 02 21 00 05 47 04 0006 0007 0008 ooos 0009 a FORMAT COPY 00 04 44 21 00 05 53 04 00 01 55 11 00 02 05 10 00 04 44 21 EXPORT 2 E CLIP 04 r 0 m 04 00 05 27 00 00 05 29 27 00 05 21 29 00 05 27 00 00 05 29 27 GO ABOVE PRESS EXIT BUTTON TO GO ABOVE Fig 1 Fig 2 1 Add text memos to images to be changed For details on adding text memos refer to Text memo recording function page 40 2 Select TEXT MEMO CLIPS in the main menu CLIP REPOSITION to display thumbnails of the clips with text memos 3 Move the cursor over the clip where you want to change the thumbnail and press the lt SET gt button and then move the cursor to the text memo display on the lower row 4 Select thumbnail to be replaced from the text memos place the cursor on it and select EXCH THUMBNAIL in the main menu gt CLIP Fig 1 112 Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips Thumbnail operations 5 Press the lt SET gt button to display the confirmation screen an
115. the time code Externally locking the time code Setting the camera ID CTL counter setting and display Viewfinder status display Lamp display in the viewfinder Configuration of status display on viewfinder screen Selecting display items on viewfinder screen Screen display Checking and displaying shooting status Mode check display Display modes and setting changes adjustment result messages Setting the marker display Display of marker confirmation screen marker select function 80 Confirmation of return video signal in the viewfinder Zebra patterns display Focus assist function Waveform monitor function Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor Locking the video signal to the external reference signal Adjusting and setting the viewfinder Available viewfinders Handling setting data Setting data file configuration Handling SD memory cards Performing operations on SD memory cards How to use user data How to use scene file data How to restore menu setting status to factory setting values Lens file Writing and reading lens files to and from SD memory card Chapter 5 Preparation 93 Power supply Mounting and setting battery Using external DC power supply Mounting and adjusting the lens Mounting the lens Flange back adjustment White shading compensation Chromatic aberration compensation function CAC Preparing for audio input Using the fron
116. the viewfinder For details refer to Display modes and setting changes adjustment result messages page 79 1 2 VF OUT Selects the image signal displayed on the viewfinder screen Y Luminosity signal NAM Outputs the R G or B signal with the largest level R Rch signal G Gch signal B Bch signal VF DTL Sets the detail level of the viewfinder screen Further emphasizes details of the viewfinder signal If 0 the detail is the same as this line 0 5 10 ZEBRA DETECT ZEBRA2 DETECT Sets the ZEBRA extraction level IRE value 0 70 109 Sets the ZEBRA2 extraction level IRE value 0 85 109 RC MENU DISP ZEBRA2 Switches ZEBRA2 ON OFF and selects SPOT ON SPOT OFF LOW LIGHT LVL Sets how low the amount of light entering the camera must be to display LOW LIGHT OFF 10 15 20 25 30 35 Sets whether to display the menu on the viewfinder screen when the remote control unit or extension control unit is connected ON OFF MARKER CHAR LVL Configures settings for the viewfinder marker and character luminosity 50 60 70 80 90 100 SYNCHRO SCAN DISP Sets the unit in which synchro scan mode is displayed sec Displays in time deg Displays at shutter open angle 143 are factory settings
117. there is no guarantee that the time code will stay externally locked External synchronization of the camera unit while an external lock is active While an external lock is active the generator lock is activated on the camera unit by the reference video signal input to the lt GENLOCK IN gt or lt SDI IN gt terminal NOTE To externally lock multiple units with the camera as the master device set to the same setting as on the camera Note that in a system using a mixture of interlaced and progressive scanning the continuity of the video and time codes is not guaranteed To use the lt SDI OUT1 gt terminal or monitor output terminal SDI OUT2 gt VIDEO OUT as the reference video signal set SDI OUT1 MODE or MONITOR OUT MODE to CAM in the main menu gt I F SETUP OUTPUT SEL Superimposing the time code To display the time code in the viewfinder or LCD monitor during shooting or playback set TCG TCR or TCG TCR in the main menu VF gt VF INDICATOR gt TC To display these time code indicators on a device connected to monitor output or the SDI OUT1 gt terminal perform the following Set the MON OUT CHARACTER switch on the side to lt ON gt and set ON in the main menu gt I F SETUP OUTPUT SEL SDI OUT1 CHAR To display the time code in the color bar display set ON in the main menu VF gt VF INDICATOR TC ON COLOR BAR Setting the camera ID Se
118. thumbnail screen and select CARD STATUS in the main menu CLIP gt PROPERTY On the failed card the slot number frame at the top right of the screen turns red and AUTH NG CARD is displayed on the remaining capacity bar Use the cursor buttons to set the card to the selected state 2 Perform manual authentication 1 On the card status screen select AUTHENTICATE in the main menu CLIP The software keyboard to enter the CPS password is displayed 122 Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips Thumbnail operations 2 Enter the password set on the camera and select OK When entry of the CPS password has succeeded the message AUTHENTICATED SUCCESSFULLY is displayed When entry of the CPS password has failed the warning message page 197 is displayed NOTE Manual authentication is valid temporarily If the target microP2 card is removed or power is turned off the CPS password set manually is disabled Visit the following website for conditions where manual authentication is valid http pro av panasonic net The encrypted microP2 memory card is not recognized on the SD card slot in a computer If the card is unable to be recognized authenticate with the correct password or format the card and use it as recording media or remove it from the camera Do not perform any operation other than manual authentication and formatting with the failed card inserted SD memory card
119. to the lt SHOT MARKER button in the factory setting It can also be assigned to the RET button in the main menu gt CAMERA SW MODE Text memo You can add text memos during recording or playback Text memos can be used to play clips at some point or break clips into chunks and copy the necessary portions Adding a text memo lt TEXT MEMO gt button 1 Press the lt MEMO button while recording playing or displaying thumbnails Pressing this button while recording or playing inserts a text memo at the instance when the button was pressed At that instance TEXT MEMO when successful or TEXT MEMO INVALID when unsuccessful is displayed Pressing this button while the thumbnail screen is displayed inserts a text memo in the clip thumbnail normally at the beginning position NOTE Up to 100 text memos can be recorded to a single clip Playback may stop for a moment when the TEXT MEMO button is pressed This is not a malfunction You cannot record text memos during loop recording 113 Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips Thumbnail operations TEXT MEMO is assigned to the lt TEXT MEMO gt button in the factory setting It can also be assigned to the RET button in the main menu gt CAMERA gt SW MODE Playing back from the text memo position Thumbnail display TEXT MEMO 0004 0001 T d 00 04 36 14 00 05 02 21 00 05 47 04 00 05 21 29
120. to the camera and turning the camera on press the lt MENU gt button while holding down the lt LIGHT gt button OPTION MENU is displayed 2 Use the jog dial button or cursor buttons to select AREA SELECT and select the region to be used from among NTSC NTSC J PAL 3 Press the jog dial button or SET button The camera restarts automatically and the initial data for each region is reflected in the initialization values and the setting values currently in use 4 Select YES the confirmation message and press the jog dial button or SET button NOTE To apply settings select NTSC NTSC by AREA SELECT and then be sure to press the SET button When AREA SELECT is changed AREA SET flashes When making this setting to use the camera for the first time only the following items are changed on the camera Menu setting values other the following items stay at their factory settings Factory settings NTSC NTSC J PAL LINE amp FREQ 1080 59 941 1080 59 941 1080 59 941 1080 501 SETUP 7 5 ON ON OFF OFF REAR LINE IN LVL 4dB 4dB 4dB 0dB AUDIO OUT LVL 4dB 4dB 4dB 0dB HEADROOM 20dB 20dB 20dB 18dB GUI metadata language US English US English Japanese for Japan US English display ENGLISH LANGUAGE No display No display JAPANESE No display For details refer to Setting
121. vacant card slot When inserting a P2 card make sure that there is at least one minute of free space on the card to be recorded to NOTE Hot swap playback is not supported Recording check function After recording ends pressing the RET button on the lens automatically plays back the last few seconds of the latest clip In this way you can check whether video has been recorded properly After playback the camera is again ready to start recording e The recording check function can be assigned to the USER buttons USER MAIN gt lt USER1 gt lt USER2 gt Set USER MAIN USER1 USER2 SHOT MARK U3 or TEXT MEMO U4 to RET SW in the main menu CAMERA gt USER SW Holding down the RET button for one second plays back from the last ten seconds of the latest clip During playback at recording check pressing the RET button again stops the playback NOTE Set REC CHECK in main menu gt CAMERA SW MODE gt RET SW When SDI OUT1 MODE or MONITOR OUT MODE is set to MEM in the main menu gt I F SETUP OUTPUT SEL the playback image is output not only to the viewfinder but also the video output terminal SDI OUT1 gt terminal and the monitor output terminal SDI OUT2 gt lt HDMI OUT gt and VIDEO OUT during recording check Note that when a backup device is connected and the backup image is being recorded the playback image currently in use by the recording check f
122. values are set to factory settings The following data is not returned to factory settings Scene files User data Lens files Black shading data SAVE USER DATA User menu setting values are saved as user data in the camera memory Can be used as saved data the user can uniquely set Load user data in the main menu FILE LOAD USER DATA are factory settings MAINTENANCE SYSTEM CHECK Item Description of settings Remark COLOR CHECK Displays the RGB level near screen center in the viewfinder and displays whether all systems from the optical to digital are transmitting normally are factory settings LENS ADJ Item Description of settings Remark F2 8 ADJ Sets the iris to F2 8 only when set to ON Adjusts so that it becomes F2 8 at the lens ON OFF F16 ADJ Sets the iris to F16 only when set to ON Adjusts so that it becomes F16 at the lens Can be used as saved data the user can uniquely set ON OFF are factory settings 166 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list BLACK SHADING Item Description of settings Remark CORRECT Enables disables digital black shading correction ON OFF DETECTION DIG Executes digital black shading correction factory settings WHITE SHADING Item Description of settings Remark CORRECT E
123. video in the viewfinder Button operations are disabled during recording and playback 6 lt EXIT gt lt CANCEL gt buttons page 110 Restore the display to the previous state while the setting menu or property screen is displayed Pressing this button while holding down the SHIFT button acts as the cancel button This is convenient for example for batch canceling clip selections 7 Cursor lt SET gt button page 110 This is used for setting time codes or user bit values and selecting thumbnails or operating menus When the setting menu is displayed it is used for selecting items or changing settings The four triangular buttons are the cursor buttons and the square button in the center is the SET button 8 MENU buttons cursor page 110 Press this button to display USER MENU on the viewfinder screen Press this button for three seconds or more to display the main menu on the viewfinder screen Press it again to return to the original image This button functions in the same way as the MENU button on the front side 9 lt SHIFT gt button page 110 Press this button with other buttons held down at the same time e lt SHIFT gt button cursor button A V This moves the cursor to the thumbnail of the clip at the start or the end on the thumbnail screen e lt SHIFT gt button SET button This selects all clips from the previously selected clip up to the clip at the cursor position e lt SHIFT gt button lt EXIT gt lt
124. when attempting to record in excess of the maximum total REC WARNING OVER MAX CLIPS number of clips allowed for one P2 card Stop Replace the P2 card or delete unnecessary clips 196 Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspection Warning system Monitor display First row Second row Description Camera operation REC WARNING occurs during recording PULL DOWN occurs during recording PULL DOWN ERROR occurs at times other than during recording synchronized Check the signal The video pull down sequence and time code values are not Continue Displayed when an error occurs in recorded data during recording REC WARNING REC Turn the power off and on before using it again Fondue oret RUN DOWN CARD Nowe The maximum number of overwrites has been exceeded Continue slot number Replacement of the P2 card is recommended An SDHC SDXC memory card is inserted into the microP2 memory SD CARD slot number None card slot The current operation will continue Use of microP2 or P2 Continue memory card is recommended SLOT1 2 CANNOT TE REC or SLOT3 4 microP2 SELECTED or Displayed when the card is inserted into the slot which is not selected Stop CANNOT REC P2 SELECTED as the recording slot TEMPORARY PAUSE IRREGULAR SIG recording does not resume Correct recording is not possible due to disruption of input signals
125. www ptc panasonic de Manufactured by Panasonic Corporation Osaka Japan Importer s name and address of pursuant to EU rules Panasonic Testing Centre Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH Winsbergring 15 22525 Hamburg Germany EU TO REMOVE BATTERY Main Power Battery Ni Cd Ni MH Li ion Battery To detach the battery please proceed in the reverse order of the installation method described in this manual If a battery made by any other manufacturer is to be used check the Operating Instructions accompanying the battery Back up Battery Lithium Battery For the removal of the battery for disposal at the end of its service life please consult your dealer 1 P2HD 5 Year Warranty Repair Program B Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic P2HD device Register as a user for this device to receive a special service warranty up to five years of free warranty repairs Customers who register as users on the website will receive an extended warranty repair valid for up to five years 1st year 2nd year 3rd year 4th year 5th year 5 P2HD device Basic warranty Extended warranty repair 1 Please note that this extended warranty is not available in some countries regions 2 Not all models eligible for extended warranty coverage 3 The basic warranty period may vary depending on the country region 4 Not all repair work is covered by this warranty 5 T
126. 0 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 V REC KNEE POINT When VIDEO REC is selected in GAMMA MODE SEL knee point is set If an item other than VIDEO REC is selected no settings are changed 30 107 FILMLIKE1 Image level Luminosity S CAMERA SETTING are factory settings Item Description of settings Remark SHOOTING MODE Selects the shooting mode according to the shooting environment NORMAL Selects normal sensitivity Applies during shooting in normal brightness HIGH SENS Selects high sensitivity Appropriate when shooting in a dark environment H SENS is displayed on the viewfinder screen e If NORMAL is selected 6dB cannot be assigned to lt LOW gt lt MID gt lt HIGH gt on the GAIN switch DETAIL 2D LPF GAMMA Switches the detail signal ON OFF ON OFF Sets a 2D low pass filter to reduce cross colors ON Reduces cross colors Does not reduce cross colors OFF Enables disables gamma correction ON OFF Operates during 480 59 94i only TEST SAW Enables disables the test signal ON OFF FLARE Enables disables flare correction ON OFF H F COMPE Enables disables aperture correction ON OFF are factory settings All S CAMERA SETTING items are targets of PAINT S SELECT in
127. 0 0deg 45 0deg POSITIONG SEL Sets the shutter speed in the main menu CAMERA gt SHUTTER SPEED gt POSITION6 50 Hz 1 60 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 HALF 180 0deg 172 8deg 144 0deg 120 0deg 90 0deg 45 0deg 59 94 Hz 1 100 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 HALF 180 0deg 172 8deg 144 0deg 120 0deg 90 0deg 45 0deg are factory settings During remote control when connected to the remote control unit AJ RC10G and extension control unit AG EC4G the shutter settings will be the setting values saved in each unit USER SW Item Description of settings Remark USER MAIN Select a Assigns the USER MAIN button function For selectable functions and an explanation of functions refer to Assigning functions to USER buttons page 56 SLOT SEL is assigned in the factory setting Detection Selects a response to accept when the USER MAIN button time is pressed NORMAL Accepts immediately when pressed 1sec Accepts when pressed and held down for approx one second are factory settings 148 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list Description of settings Remark USER1 Select a Assigns the lt USER1 gt button function For selectable functions and an explanation of functions refer to Assigning functions to USER buttons
128. 080 50p 1080 50i 576 501 Recording and playback time AVC Intra 100 DVCPRO HD 16 GBx1 approx 16 min 32 GBx1 approx 32 min 64 GBx1 approx 64 min AVC Intra 50 AVC LongG 50 16 GBx1 approx 32 min 32 GBx1 approx 64 min DVCPRO50 64 GBx1 approx 128 min AVC LongG 25 16 GBx1 approx 64 min DVCPRO DV 32 GBx1 approx 128 min 64 GBx1 approx 256 min Figures are for continuous recording as one clip Depending on the number of clips the overall recording time may be shorter than the above Digital video Sampling frequency AVC Intra 100 AVC LongG 50 AVC LongG 25 Y 74 1758 MHz Ps Pa 37 0879 MHz 59 94 Hz Y 74 2500 MHz 37 1250 MHz 50 Hz DVCPRO HD DVCPRO50 Y 13 5 MHz 6 75 MHz DVCPRO Y 13 5 MHz 3 375 MHz Quantizing AVC Intra 100 AVC Intra 50 AVC LongG 50 AVC LongG 25 10 bits DVCPRO HD DVCPROS0 DVCPRO DV 8 bits Video compression format AVC Intra 100 AVC Intra 50 MPEG 4 AVC H 264 Intra Profile AVC LongG 50 AVC LongG 25 MPEG 4 AVC H 264 DVCPRO HD DV Based Compression DVCPRO50 DVCPRO DV DV Compression Digital audio Recording audio signal AVC Intra 100 AVC Intra 50 48 kHz 16 bits 4CH and 48 kHz 24 bits 4CH switch AVC LongG 50 AVC LongG 25 48 kHz 24 bits 4CH DVCPRO HD 48 kHz 16 bits 4CH DVCPROS50 DVCPRO DV 48 kHz 16 bits Headroom 18 dB 20 dB sw
129. 1 100 1 50 1 1 6000 576 501 90 0deg 45 0deg 1 100 1 50 1 1 6000 Setting the shutter mode and speed Switch the lt SHUTTER gt switch to set the shutter speed in the shutter mode The shutter speed in the synchro scan mode can be easily change by the lt SYNCHRO SCAN adjustment button on the side The shutter speed selection range can be restricted or use of the synchro scan mode can be selected beforehand in the main menu CAMERA gt SHUTTER SPEED and SHUTTER SELECT Once selected the shutter speed is saved even after the camera is turned off lt SHUTTER gt switch 1 Press the lt SHUTTER gt switch positioned at OFF towards ON 2 Press the lt SHUTTER gt switch from ON towards SEL and repeat this operation until the desired mode or speed is displayed on the viewfinder screen e f all modes and speeds are available the display changes in the following order Standard mode POSITION POSITION2 POSITION3 POSITIONS POSITIONS POSITIONG Synchro scan mode Whichever mode the electronic shutter is used the higher the shutter speed the lower the sensitivity of the camera becomes When the aperture is in the automatic mode it will increasingly open and the depth of focus will become shallower as the shutter speed is increased Under lighting conditions using fl
130. 150 in the main menu gt CAMERA SW MODE Whether to display the waveform monitor on either or both of the viewfinder and LCD monitor can be selected by WFM DISP The waveform is not displayed while the focus assist function EXPAND is active The waveform display cannot be recorded 81 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor Adjusting and setting the LCD monitor Locking the video signal to the external reference signal Using the LCD monitor 1 Push the OPEN button towards the right to open the LCD monitor 2 Set the LCD monitor screen to the easiest to view position Rotate up to 180 in the lens direction and 90 in the direction towards you 3 Display the screen brightness in the main menu gt I F SETUP LCD MONITOR BRIGHTNESS the color density of the screen in COLOR LEVEL and screen contrast in CONTRAST 4 Set whether to display the character of status display or the setting menu in the LCD monitor and viewfinder in the main menu SETUP LCD MONITOR gt VF LCD CHAR NOTE When closing the LCD monitor be sure to close it firmly Take care not to apply excessive force on the LCD monitor when it is opened Doing so may result in a malfunction Condensation sometimes forms on the LCD panel of the LCD monitor in locations subject to extreme temperature differences If this happens wipe with a soft dry cl
131. 2 memory card microP2 memory lt gt USB 2 0 device mode Personal computer 1 P2 memory cards and microP2 memory cards are optionally available They are not supplied with the camera 2 The USB 2 0 cable is not supplied with the camera Prepare a commercial USB 2 0 cable double shielded for noise suppression Connecting the external device to the lt USB3 0 gt terminal host The camera directly controls the hard disk drive to transfer data d USB 2 0 USB 3 0 storage mode gt a External storage device The USB 2 0 cable and USB 3 0 cable are not supplied with the camera Prepare a commercial USB 2 0 cable or USB 3 0 cable double shielded for noise suppression Connecting video monitor The camera directly controls the video and the monitor to output video Audio pin cable b Video equipment monitor HDMI cable BNC cable composite SDI 1 Cables are optionally available They are not supplied with the camera 2 Prepare the HDMI cable optional with double or more shielded For the HDMI cable use of the Panasonic HDMI cable is recommended 3 For the BNC cable optional connected to the lt SDI OUT1 gt SDI OUT2 gt and VIDEO OUT gt terminals prepare a double shielded cable equivalent to 5C FB Recording images of external dev
132. 5 Switch used to turn on off the power NOTE Even when the POWER switch is set to the OFF position the camera is not shut off from the main power 2 Viewfinder left right positioning ring To adjust the left right position of the viewfinder loosen this ring and slide the viewfinder to the left or right to adjust it to an easy to view position After adjustment turn in the lt LOCK gt direction and firmly clamp 3 VF terminal Mount the viewfinder AJ HVF21KG optional etc 4 Mount cap page 97 Raise the lens lever to remove the cap Replace the cap when the lens is not mounted 5 Lens cable microphone cable clamp page 97 Used for securing the lens and microphone cables 6 Lens mount 2 3 type bayonet page 97 Mount the lens 7 Tripod mount page 104 Attach the optional tripod adaptor SHAN TM700 when mounting the camera on the tripod 8 Lens lever page 97 After mounting the lens to the lens mount tighten the lever to secure the lens 9 LIGHT switch Select how to turn on off the video light connected to the light output terminal When the video light is left turned on the light is illuminated at the same time that recording starts on the camera and goes out at the same time that recording stops MANUAL The light is illuminated according to whether the video light is turned on off AUTO 10 Shoulder strap fittings page 104 Attach the shoulder strap 11 Battery release lever pa
133. 5 amp S S s S S S S m Item FILE USER MENU Data file By page By item SETUP DATA SD CARD LOAD SAVE SAVE AS n Item FILE USER MENU Data file By page By item SETUP DATA SELECT SYSTEM v CAMERA ID USER MENU SEL PAINT LEVEL PAINT SJSELECT VF CAMERA REC PB CLIP UF SETUP MAINTENANCE OPTION MENU SISISISISISISISISINSIS SISISIS SISISISISISISIS m Item FILE USER MENU Data file By page By item CAC FILE SD CARD LOAD DELETE Item FILE USER MENU Data file By page By item LENS FILE LOAD SAVE CLEAR ALL FILE Item FILE USER MENU Data file By page By item LENS FILE SD CARD LOAD SAVE Item FILE USER MENU Data file By page By item SCENE LOAD SAVE O CLEAR 1 80 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list mm USER MENU Data file FILE By page By item F SD CARD SD STANDARD PROPERTY USED BLANK zn TOTAL PROXY REM NUMBER OF CLIPS A E PROTECT 7
134. 5 SKIN TONE DTL Selects the skin tone table that will display the skin tone detail Create the skin tone table with DETECT TABLE You can shoot smoother skin tones by displaying skin tone detail Select one two or three skin tones from the B and C tables A AB AC BC ABC OFF SKIN TONE DTL works independently from the details set in each item of LOW SETTING MID SETTING HIGH SETTING ADDITIONAL DTL and S CAMERA SETTING S ZEBRA VF S ZEBRA SDI OUT1 Set to display a zebra pattern in the skin tone area displayed in the viewfinder screen The zebra pattern is displayed when this item is set to ON and SKIN TONE DTL is open The zebra pattern displays the area selected in SKIN TONE DTL ON OFF Set whether to display skin tone zebra the SDI OUT1 signal The zebra pattern is displayed when this item is set to ON and SKIN TONE DTL is open The zebra pattern displays the area selected in SKIN TONE DTL ON OFF 5 ZEBRA MONI Set whether to display skin tone zebra in the monitor output SDI OUT2 HDMI OUT VIDEO OUT signal The zebra pattern is displayed when this item is set to ON and SKIN TONE DTL is open The zebra pattern displays the area selected in SKIN TONE DTL ON OFF DETECT TABLE Selects the skin tone table of the subject that displays skin tone detail B C SKIN TONE GET Obt
135. 6 1 GB lt EXIT gt USED 7 5 GB 2 CARDS FREE 98 6 GB 0010 Partitions or folders are displayed in a list 2 Use the cursor buttons to place the cursor on the partition or folder you want to display on the thumbnail screen and press the lt SET gt button This displays the thumbnails of clips in the partition or folder You can go back to the main explorer screen by clicking the lt EXIT gt button NOTE When target partitions are selected you can display thumbnails all partitions selected as targets by pressing lt SHIFT gt SET buttons W Information display items 1 Clip information Clip properties display 2 Storage device information For TYPE S CLIP NAME 004816 a 5 PROPERTY h 00 04 36 14 00 05 02 21 00 05 47 04 00 05 21 29 T gt W U A 00 02 05 10 00 04 44 21 00 05 53 04 00 05 34 01 SERIAL AEC06G0729 MODEL AJ P2C004HG SELECTED PART NO 2 DATE 2013 JUL 05 TIME 13 16 25 VERIFY ON FINISHED NAME 13 JULO5 13 16 25 PARTITION TYPE 8 SIZE 106 1 GB USED 7 5 GB 2 CARDS FREE CAP 98 6 GB 1080 60i AVCINER 100 SERIAL P2 card serial number MODEL P2 card model name SELECTED PART Displays a checkmark when a target partition is selected SELECTED PART NO List of selected partition numbers only displayed when multiple partitions are sel
136. 7 nmm USER MENU Data file CAMERA By page By item C U F LENS IRIS A IRIS LEVEL 4 A IRIS PEAK AVE 4 A IRIS WINDOW 4 S IRIS LEVEL 7 yf IRIS GAIN 2 L IRIS GAIN VALUE 4 TE USER MENU Data file CAMERA By page By item C U F AGC AGC AGC LIMIT 4 AGC POINT 4 men USER MENU Data file CLIP By page By item U F PROPERTY CLIP PROPERTY y CARD STATUS y CPS PASSWORD SD CARD REMAIN SETUP JU J 2 FREE OF PARTITION item USER MENU Data file CLIP By page By item o U F REPOSITION E Z DELETE FORMAT FORMAT STORAGE COPY E EXPORT yn ES IMPORT m REPAIR n EXCH THUMBNAIL Sri EXPLORE AUTHENTICATE ER CHANGE PARTITION NAME DELETE LAST PARTITION n DELETE FOLDER n 1 76 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list iiem USER MENU Data file CLIP By
137. AC ADJ CAC WARNING Displays a warning when operation of CAC has stopped CAC LENS DATA INVALID This is displayed for example when the response data from the lens is not supported LENS INIT NOT COMPLETED This is displayed for example when initialization of the lens cannot complete 78 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder status display USER SW screen Displays the assignment status of each USER button For details refer to Assigning functions to lt USER gt buttons page 56 USER SW USER MAIN UM Displays the assignment to the USER MAIN button USER1 U1 Displays the assignment to the lt USER1 gt button USER2 U2 Displays the assignment to the lt USER2 gt button SHOT MARK U3 Displays the assignment to the lt SHOT MARK button TEXT MEMO U4 Displays the assignment to the TEXT MEMO button OTHER ASSIGN RET SW Displays the assignment to the RET button on the lens GAIN L Displays the gain value assigned to lt L gt of the GAIN switch GAIN M Displays the gain value assigned to M of the GAIN switch GAIN H Displays the gain value assigned to lt H gt of the GAIN switch S GAIN Enumerates and displays the gain value assigned as super gain DS GAIN Enumerates and displays the gain value assigned as digital super gain Display modes setting
138. AIN OFFSET ADDI AWB B GAIN OFFSET SKIN TONE DTL SKIN TONE DTL J Fig 3 Fig 4 1 Press and hold the lt MENU gt button for three seconds more when not recording The main menu is displayed 2 Use the jog dial button or the cursor buttons to place the cursor on the corresponding menu item Fig 1 e Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor up or down e If there is a menu in the next level gt is displayed in the menu items Press the jog dial button the cursor button gt or the lt SET gt button to open lower level menus Fig 2 Press the cursor button lt 1 or the EXIT button to return to the upper levels You can go back to the upper levels by using the jog dial button to place the cursor on the topmost line EXIT then pressing it 3 Press the jog dial button or the SET button 2454 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Setting menu display The confirmation screen is displayed depending on the menu item Select the process using the cursor buttons 7 gt lt and press the SET button A checkmark is placed in front of the set item n some menus a screen for value setting is displayed Fig 3 Press the MENU button to close the menu This brings you back automatically to the previous screen depending on the menu item To perform cancellation while setting Push the MARKER SEL gt lt MODE CHECK MENU CANCEL gt switch towards
139. ATA SD CARD SETUP DATA SELECT Shooting Shot mark Shot mark recording Shoulder strap Shutter mode SHUTTER SELECT Shutter speed SHUTTER SPEED SKIN DTL Specifications Standard recording STORAGE COPY SETUP Storage device Exporting Formatting Importing Information display SW MODE Synchro scan mode SYSTEM SYSTEM CHECK SYSTEM MODE SYSTEM SETUP eret on aee ta ento T TC UB Text memo recording Thumbnail Changing Selecting Setting THUMBNAIL SETUP Time code Time data Time zone ie U UPDATE Device mode Storage mode USB LAN User bits USER buttons User data USER MENU SEL USER SW ar USER SW GAINT 6 dictio diete t n cet V Variable speed playback VERSION VF DISPLAY VF INDICATOR VF MARKER USER Viewfinder Screen display Status display Warning Warning system Waveform monitor function White balance WHITE BALANCE MODE WHITE SHADING White shading compensation Wireless microphone receiver 102 Z Zebra pIE Ssnan naana aa e bee hinten 80 Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries These symbo
140. BOTH Displays the warning for both FBC OFF and SHUTTER SHOOTING MODE 1 FBC OFF Displays the warning when flash band is detected while the flash band compensation function is not active 2 SHUTTER Displays the warning when the flash band compensation function and shutter are both set to ON OFF Disables the warning display Turns the display of H SENS ON OFF which indicates that the main menu PAINT gt S CAMERA SETTING SHOOTING MODE is set to HIGH SENS ON OFF FOCUS BAR Turns the function that displays the degree of focus at bar size ON OFF ON OFF P2CARD REMAIN Turns display of the remaining recording capacity for the P2 card ON OFF ON OFF 145 are factory settings Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list Item REC MEDIA Description of settings Select ON OFF of the display of selection status for recordable media P2 microP2 ON OFF Remark BATTERY Turns battery voltage display ON OFF ON OFF AUDIO LVL Turns audio level meter display ON OFF ON OFF TC ON COLOR BAR Selects whether to display time code when color bars are displayed ON OFF TC Selects a time code to display TCG Displays the time code generator value during recording TCR Displays the time code reader value during playback TCG TCR Displays the time
141. CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO IN CH2 4 gt audio input channel 1 3 2 4 terminals page 103 Connect the audio equipment or the microphone MIC IN microphone input terminal page 102 Connect the microphone optional The phantom microphone can also be used To use this set ON in the main menu gt I F SETUP MIC AUDIO gt FRONT MIC POWER When it is set to ON and a microphone is not connected low frequency noise may occur This is not a problem when a microphone is connected 18 Chapter 2 Description of Parts Audio output function section Audio output function section 1 lt gt volume adjustment dial Adjust the volume of the speaker and earphones 2 lt ALRAM gt alarm volume adjustment dial Adjust the volume of the alarm from the speaker and earphones When set to the minimum position the alarm cannot be heard 3 Speaker During recording EE audio can be monitored and during playback playback audio can be monitored The alarm is output in sync with flashing lighting of the lt WARNING gt lamp or warning indicator Audio from the speaker automatically disappears when earphones are connected to the lt PHONES gt terminal 4 Audio channel selector switch Switch the audio channels output to the speaker earphones and lt AUDIO OUT gt terminal lt CH1 2 gt Outputs the signals of audio channels 1 and 2 lt CH3 4 gt Outputs the signals of audio channels 3 an
142. D o guum eo a iy ej 267 mm 10 1 2 T inches mia E mm Ade PE em inches 102 mm lo 4 1 32 l inches 2 342 mm 13 15 32 inches Specifications General Power DC 12 V 11 0 V 17 0 V Power consumption 29 W body only 1080 59 94i AVC Intra 100 standard recording status LCD ON 70 W with all optional accessories connected and maximum power supplied from each output terminal indicates safety items Ambient operating temperature 0 C 40 C 32 F 104 F Ambient operating humidity 10 85 relative humidity Storage temperature 20 C 60 C 4 140 F Weight Approx 3 4 kg 7 5 Ibs body only excluding the battery and accessories Dimensions WxHxD Body only 147 mmx267 mmx342 mm 5 25 32 inchesx10 1 2 inchesx13 15 32 inches excluding protrusion Camera unit Pickup device 2 3 type 2 2 million pixels MOSx3 Lens mount 2 3 type bayonet Optical filter CC filter A 3200 K B 4300 K C 5600 K D 6300 K ND filter 1 CLEAR 2 1 4ND 3 1 16ND 4 1 64ND Gain setting NORMAL mode 8 0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 dB HIGH SENS mode 6 3 0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 dB Digital super gain Selectable from 6 10 12 15 20 24 28 34 dB DS GAIN Super gain Selectable from 30 36 42 dB S GAI
143. DTL FREQ LEVEL DEPEND MASTER GAMMA BLACK GAMMA B GAMMA RANGE S MATRIX TABLE S COLOR CORRECT KRISIS SI SINISI NISISTSISISIN ISIS ISIS fo SISISIS SISISISISISISTO amp S S S S SIS S n S S S S SS A S m 1 71 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list Item PAINT USER MENU By item Data file MID SETTING S MASTER GAIN lt H DTL LEVEL V DTL LEVEL DTL CORING H DTL FREQ LEVEL DEPEND MASTER GAMMA BLACK GAMMA B GAMMA RANGE S MATRIX TABLE S COLOR CORRECT SISI SISIN ISISI SISS 1 111 111 S S S SS S S S N S S Ss SS SIS S N S S Item PAINT USER MENU Data file By page By item HIGH SETTING S MASTER GAIN lt H DTL LEVEL V DTL LEVEL DTL CORING H DTL FREQ LEVEL DEPEND MASTER GAMMA BLACK GAMMA B GAMMA RANGE S MATRIX TABLE S COLOR CORRECT SINISNISISISISISI SIS SNIS SI SISISISISIN IN IS SISISISISISISISISISIS IO SAIS S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S m Item PAINT USER MENU Data file By page By item ADDITIONAL DTL KNEE APE LVL v DTL GAIN
144. E 30 TURN POWER OFF P2 CARD P2 card removal error 3 Card removal error E 31 TURN POWER OFF SYSTEM MODE System mode error 2 Mismatched format E 33 SYSTEM ERROR CAMERA Camera unit error 1 System error E 34 SYSTEM ERROR LCD MICON LCD microcomputer error 1 System error E 35 SYSTEM ERROR CODEC Codec control error 1 System error E 36 SYSTEM ERROR P2 SYSTEM P2 system error 1 System error E 37 SYSTEM ERROR P2CS P2CS microcomputer error 1 System error E 39 SYSTEM ERROR INITIALIZE Video initialization error 1 System error E 63 No display No display System control microcomputer error 1 System error E 64 2 Standard signal error 1 System error Warning information display Monitor display Description Camera operation First row Second row CPS authentication of microP2 memory card has failed The microP2 AUTH NG CARD slot Nana memory card with CPS authentication failed cannot be recorded or Continue number played back Select AUTHENTICATE in the main menu CLIP and enter the password Displays any reduced voltage detected on the backup battery in the internal clock when the power is turned on 2 BACKUP ATT EMP TY None Follow Charging the built in battery page 193 to charge the Continus battery Displayed when an data error caused by the P2 card occurs during recording CARD ERROR slot Nene Displayed after recording stops until the next operation Also Sto
145. ED gt POSITION2 50 Hz 1 60 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 HALF 180 0deg 172 8deg 144 0deg 120 0deg 90 0deg 45 0deg 59 94 Hz 1 100 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 HALF 180 0deg 172 8deg 144 0deg 120 0deg 90 0deg 45 0deg POSITIONS SEL Sets the shutter speed in the main menu gt CAMERA gt SHUTTER SPEED POSITION3 50 Hz 1 60 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 HALF 180 0deg 172 8deg 144 0deg 120 0deg 90 0deg 45 0deg 59 94 Hz 1 100 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 HALF 180 0deg 172 8deg 144 0deg 120 0deg 90 0deg 45 0deg POSITION4 SEL Sets the shutter speed in the main menu CAMERA gt SHUTTER SPEED gt POSITION4 50 Hz 1 60 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 HALF 180 0deg 172 8deg 144 0deg 120 0deg 90 0deg 45 0deg 59 94 Hz 1 100 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 HALF 180 0deg 172 8deg 144 0deg 120 0deg 90 0deg 45 0deg POSITIONS SEL Sets the shutter speed in the main menu gt CAMERA gt SHUTTER SPEED POSITIONS 50 Hz 1 60 1 120 4 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 HALF 180 0deg 172 8deg 144 0deg 120 0deg 90 0deg 45 0deg 59 94 Hz 1 100 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 HALF 180 0deg 172 8deg 144 0deg 120 0deg 9
146. F SETUP OUTPUT SEL gt MONITOR OUT ZEBRA Focus assist function The focus assist function enables you to focus the target easily 80 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder status display Expanded display EXPAND When the USER button USER MAIN gt lt USER1 gt lt USER2 gt where ASSIST is assigned or the RET button is pressed the center of the screen is expanded approx three times so that you can easily bring the image into focus gt n the expanded display the status display and zebra pattern disappear and EXPANDED is displayed at the top of the screen NOTE Viewfinder screen and LCD monitor screen are expanded Expanded display is unavailable in the video output SDI output and HDMI output Focus bar display FOCUS BAR The focus bar can be displayed when ON is set in the main menu VF gt VF INDICATOR FOCUS BAR The degree of focus is indicated by the length of the bar gt Es Not in focus The bar extends to the right when the viewfinder is in focus Waveform monitor function A waveform of the video can be displayed by assigning the waveform monitor function to the lt USER gt buttons lt USER MAIN gt lt USER1 gt lt USER2 gt and pressing the assigned buttons Press the button again to return to the normal display waveform and vector displays be switched by WFM page
147. FORMAT P2 CARD Cannot import to a P2 card containing clips Format the P2 card LACK OF CAPACITY Not enough space left on the storage device Use a new storage device with sufficient available space or a formatted storage device MISMATCH COMPONENT The P2 card model number of the copy source and copy destination do not match Cannot copy Use the P2 cards of the same model number or import on a clip basis STORAGE DEVICE DISCONNECTED The connection with the storage device is disconnected Reconnect the USB cable to the lt USB3 0 gt terminal host When it does not function normally after that turn off the power once and turn on the power again TOO MANY PARTITIONS There are too many partitions The maximum number of partitions on the storage device is 23 Either reformat or use a new storage device UNKNOWN DEVICE CONNECTED A non compatible DVD drive or other device is connected Change the connected device to the correct storage device and then turn the power off once and turn it on again VERIFICATION FAILED The compare check performed after copying failed Copy it again 198 Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspection Updating the camera firmware Updating the camera firmware There are two ways to update the firmware 1 Use the dedicated tool P2 Status Logger to check and apply the update Only customers registered as memb
148. G m NIN IN lt ITN lt lt IS IS lt 15 14 lt 14 lt lt IS IS 5 lt 15 15 lt 14 lt lt IS lt IN lt 15 14 414 lt lt 4 IS IN Im 170 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list Item PAINT USER By page MENU By item Data file COLOR CORRECTION S L COLOR CORRECT S M COLOR CORRECT S H COLOR CORRECT R SAT R R Mg SAT R Mg SAT Mg SAT Mg B SAT B SAT B Cy SAT Cy SAT Cy G SAT 6 SAT SAT YI SAT YEYER SAT YER SAT YI R R SAT R PHASE R R Mg PHASE R Mg PHASE Mg PHASE Mg B PHASE B PHASE B Cy PHASE Cy PHASE Cy G PHASE G PHASE G YI PHASE YI PHASE YI YI R PHASE YI R PHASE YI R R PHASE SISISISISISISISISISISISISIS ISISISISISISINISISISISISISISISIS IS IS IS on S Ss S IIS mn S SS SS ISIN TS NSS S SS S S m Item PAINT USER MENU Data file By page By item LOW SETTING S MASTER GAIN V H DTL LEVEL V DTL LEVEL DTL CORING H
149. HITE BALANCE MODE gt AWB AREA The factory setting is 25 1 90 H 50 25 When you have no time to adjust the white balance Set the lt WHITE BAL gt switch to lt PRST gt According the shooting conditions turn the CC FILTER gt lt ND FILTER dial and set the filter When the white balance has not been automatically adjusted When the white balance has not been successfully adjusted the viewfinder screen displays an error message Error message Meaning Remedy COLOR TEMP HIGH The color temperature is too high Select the appropriate filter COLOR TEMP LOW The color temperature is too low Select the appropriate filter LOW LIGHT There is insufficient light Increase the amount of light Or increase gain LEVEL OVER There is too much light Decrease the amount of light Or decrease gain CHECK FILTER The CC FILTER gt lt ND FILTER dial setting is out Check the CC FILTER gt lt ND FILTER dial of position TIME OVER Automatic adjustment does not end within the time The shooting conditions might be unstable If there is flickering insert the shutter and execute again under stable conditions White balance memory Values stored to memory are saved until white balance is adjusted again even if the camera is turned off There are two white balance memories A and B When set ON in the main menu CAMERA gt WHITE BALANCE MODE FILTER INH initi
150. IAL NO Displays the serial number MODEL Displays the model name NAME ALTITUDE Displays an altitude LONGITUDE Displays a longitude LATITUDE Displays a latitude 1ST TEXT Displays the first text memo content MEMO THUMBNAIL Displays the thumbnail recording position OFFSET Amaximum of 6 items can be displayed at the same time When 6 items are already selected all unchecked items cannot be selected You can change your item selection by unchecking selected items Items with underlines are selected in the factory settings STORAGE COPY SETUP are factory settings Item Description of settings Remark VERIFY Sets whether to verify or not when exporting in USB storage mode ON Verifies OFF Does not verify Valid for use in storing to type S format only are factory settings REC PB REC FUNCTION Item RECORDING Description of settings Select the recording format NORMAL Performs standard recording LOOP Performs loop recording 2454 Remark Only NORMAL can be selected in the following cases When the main menu gt SYSTEM gt SYSTEM MODE gt REC SIGNAL is set to other than SDI are factory settings Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list Item Description of settings Remark HOLD Selects whether to hold RECORDING settings ON Holds OFF Does n
151. IS P4 V 20 Super iris display VF INDICATOR gt IRIS 4 V 21 Iris F value VF INDICATOR IRIS V 22 Super black display VF INDICATOR gt IRIS V VF INDICATOR gt 23 Zoom display ZOOM FOCUS VF INDICATOR 4 _ _ 24 Focus information display ZOOM FOCUS Information display such as VF INDICATOR gt 25 pre recording P REC i REC v d d VF INDICATOR 26 Gamma mode display GAMMA MODE V Lock status display of auto VF INDICATOR gt _ tracking white balance WHITE d d 4 idi VF DISPLAY DISP u _ _ 28 Type of marker MODE 29 Y GET brightness display 4 gt VF INDICATOR gt 30 High sensitivity mode display SHOOTING MODE 76 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder status display Display status No Display item name Selection of menu item display Relevant Display batch Mode check Display in hide At all times menu items display playback mode only Flash band compensation 31 FBC function display VF INDICATOR gt FBC Chromatic aberration 32 VF INDICATOR CAC compensation VF INDICATOR c 33 Battery charge level voltage BATTERY 2 card remaining free VF INDICATOR is space P2CA
152. IS SELECTED Multiple instances of the same clip copies are included in the clips selected Multiple instances of the same clip copies cannot be copied simultaneously Remove instances of the same clip from selected items TOO MANY CLIPS Too many clips are selected Reduce the number of selected clips UNKNOWN CONTENTS FORMATI UNKNOWN DATA This is a warning of the contents for the version that is not supported by the camera The metadata character code is invalid Match the device and content versions The metadata character code is UTF 8 Enter valid characters using a viewer There is a problem with data in the file Create the file again 197 Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspection Warning system Message USER CLIP NAME MODIFIED Description When adding a counter value to the clip name characters must be deleted Measure For the counter addition setting the user clip name plus the counter value can only contain up to 100 bytes Characters in the clip name are automatically deleted when the total number of characters exceeds this limit WRITE PROTECTED The P2 card or SD memory card is write protected Insert write accessible media W Soft keyboard Message AUTHENTICATION ERRORI Description Manual authentication failed Measure Enter the correct password An attempt is made to enter the PERSON item u
153. JUL 12 21 30 48 matada01 p2 2378 2013 JUL 12 21 30 48 SET EXECUTE 4 EXIT EXIT gt FILE NAME LIST SET EXECUTE 4 META NAME LIST 10 05 34 01 05 10 00 05 29 20 10 05 34 01 00 05 10 07 00 05 29 20 00 00 10 26 0029 he E D uw 00 00 10 26 0029 Fig 1 Fig 2 1 Insert the SD memory card that contains the clip metadata metadata upload file 2 Select LOAD in main menu REC PB REC METADATA and press the SET button The metadata name of the metadata upload file on the SD memory card is displayed Fig 1 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the desired file to be loaded and select YES Upload starts Uploaded metadata is retained even if the power is turned off For confirmation of uploaded data refer to Checking and modifying uploaded metadata page 117 NOTE While displaying metadata names press the cursor button gt to switch to display of file names Fig 2 Press the cursor button lt 1 to return to display of metadata names Clip metadata items Clip metadata includes the following items Underlined items can be set by loading the metadata upload file on the SD memory card Other items are set automatically during shooting Using the latest update version of P2 Viewer Plus metadata upload files can be written to SD memory cards using a computer Download and install the latest version of P2 Viewer Plus from the following website http pro av panasonic net For
154. Lead Pb not over 0 1 or 1000wt ppm Cadmium Cd not over 0 01 or 100wt ppm Mercury Hg not over 0 1 or 1000wt ppm Hexavalent chromium Cr6 not over 0 1 96 or 1000wt ppm Polybrominated biphenyls PBBs not over 0 1 or 1000wt ppm Polybrominated diphenyl ethers PBDEs not over 0 1 or 1000wt ppm npo 1057 OBHP 2 1 0 1 1000 2 0 01 100
155. MERA gt USER SW In the factory settings SLOT SEL is assigned to the USER MAIN button S GAIN to the lt USER1 gt button DS GAIN to the lt USER2 gt button SHOT MARK to lt SHOT MARKER the button and TEXT MEMO to the TEXT MEMO button Selectable functions Item name Description INHIBIT Disables assignment of functions S GAIN Assigns the super gain function Automatic white balance does not function while the super gain function is ON Assigns the digital super gain function DS GAIN The digital super gain function is activated only during shooting in the 59 94P 59 94i 50P and 50i While the function is activated the IPS l shutter becomes OFF Video at the instant that the digital super gain function is enabled or disabled becomes discontinuous S IRIS Assigns the super iris function This is enabled when performing backlight compensation Assigns the iris override function Changes the target value reference value in the auto iris mode To change the target value set to this mode and press the jog dial button The target value can be changed Turning the jog dial button to the left and right changes the target value or is displayed on the left side of the iris display area on the viewfinder screen Stop turning the jog dial button at the position to change the target value and press the jog dial button to apply the new target value LOVR
156. N Shutter speed When SYSTEM MODE 59 94 Hz 60i 60p mode 1 100 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 sec HALF 180 0 deg 172 8 deg 144 0 deg 120 0 deg 90 0 deg 45 0 deg When SYSTEM MODE 50 Hz 50i 50p mode 1 60 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 sec HALF 180 0 deg 172 8 deg 144 0 deg 120 0 deg 90 0 deg 45 0 deg Synchro scan shutter 1 60 1 1 7200 sec 1080 59 94p 1080 59 94i 480 59 94i 1 50 1 1 6000 sec 1080 50p 1080 50i 576 50i Shutter open angle Configurable between 3 deg and 359 5 deg in 0 5 deg steps Sensitivity NORMAL mode F9 2000 Ix 3200 K 89 9 reflection 1080 59 94i F10 2000 Ix 3200 K 89 9 reflection 1080 50i HIGH SENS mode F12 2000 Ix 3200 89 9 reflection 1080 59 94i F13 2000 Ix 3200 89 9 reflection 1080 50i Minimum subject illumination Approx 0 004 Ix F1 4 42 dB S GAIN 34 dB DS GAIN 201 Chapter 10 Specification Dimensions and specifications Image S N Horizontal resolution 62 dB standard 1000 TV or higher center Memory card recorder Recording media P2 memory card microP2 memory card System format 1080 59 94p 1080 59 94i 480 59 94i 1080 50p 1080 50i 576 50i Recording format AVC Intra 100 AVC Intra 50 AVC LongG 50 AVC LongG 25 Switching DVCPRO HD DVCPROS0 DVCPRO DV formats Recording video signal 1080 59 94p 1080 59 94i 480 59 94i 1
157. ND Selects the near end voltage in steps of 0 1 V when the main menu gt I F SETUP BATTERY P2CARD BATTERY SELECT is set to PAG L96e 12 0V 13 0V 15 0V TYPE A FULL Selects the voltage for full display in steps of 0 1 V when the main menu gt I F SETUP BATTERY P2CARD BATTERY SELECT is set to TYPE 13 0V 15 6V 17 0V TYPE A NEAR END Selects the near end voltage in steps of 0 1 V when the main menu gt I F SETUP BATTERY P2CARD BATTERY SELECT is set to TYPE 11 0V 13 2V 15 0V TYPE A END Selects the end voltage in steps of 0 1 V when the main menu gt I F SETUP gt BATTERY P2CARD BATTERY SELECT is set to TYPE A 11 0V 12 5V 15 0V The TYPE A factory setting corresponds to the IDX ENDURA ELETE TYPE B FULL Selects the voltage for full display in steps of 0 1 V when the main menu gt I F SETUP gt BATTERY P2CARD BATTERY SELECT is set to TYPE 13 0V 15 9V 17 0V TYPE B NEAR END TYPE B END Selects the near end voltage in steps of 0 1 V when the main menu I F SETUP BATTERY P2CARD BATTERY SELECT is set to TYPE 11 0V 12 9V 15 0V Selects the end voltage in steps of 0 1 V when the main menu gt I F SETUP gt BATTERY P2CARD BATTERY SELECT is set to TYPE 11 0V 12 5V 15 0V The TYPE B factory setting co
158. NU Data file SETUP By page By item DOWNCON DOWNCON MODE 7 m V SETTING DETAIL 9 H DTL LEVEL Z V DTL LEVEL ES DTL CORING H DTL FREQ 4 2D LPF Item USER MENU Data file SETUP By page By item GENLOCK GENLOCK GL PHASE m 7 J H PHASE COARSE H PHASE FINE 178 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list Item USER MENU Data file SETUP By page By item U F MIC AUDIO VR SELECT V FRONT VR CH1 CH3 s FRONT VR CH2 CH4 y AUTO LVL CH3 CH1 v AUTO LVL CH4 CH2 P LVL CONTROL CH3 CH1 2 LVL CONTROL CH4 CH2 LOWCUT CH1 J MIC LOWCUT CH2 J MIC LOWCUT CH3 7 J MIC LOWCUT CH4 E 7 J LIMITER CH1 J J LIMITER CH2 J LIMITER CH3 J LIMITER CH4 y V TEST TONE FRONT POWER Z REAR POWER Z MONITOR SELECT FRONT LEVEL REAR CH1 3 LVL REAR MIC CH2 4 LVL REAR LINE IN LVL n AUDIO OUT LVL 7 HEADROOM
159. ON OFF LIMITER Selects the channel 3 limiter Disabled when automatic adjustment of recording levels is selected ON OFF LIMITER CH4 Selects the channel 4 limiter Disabled when automatic adjustment of recording levels is selected ON OFF TEST TONE Selects test signals NORMAL Outputs test tones to all channels if the OUTPUT switch is BARS and lt CH1 gt on the AUDIO IN switch is set to lt gt ALWAYS Outputs test tones to all channels at all times when the lt OUTPUT gt switch is lt BARS gt CHSEL Outputs test tones to the channels where lt CH1 gt or lt CH2 gt on the lt AUDIO IN gt switch is set to lt FRONT gt when the lt OUTPUT gt switch is set to BARS The test tones are output to CH3 CH4 OFF Does not output the test tone FRONT MIC POWER Sets the phantom power of the front microphone ON OFF REAR MIC POWER Sets the phantom power of the rear microphone Phantom power is not output when OFF is selected even if the lt REAR AUDIO CH1 gt and lt REAR AUDIO CH2 gt switches are set to lt 48V gt ON OFF MONITOR SELECT Selects the signal method to output to the monitor when the MONITOR SELECT gt switch is set to ST stereo STEREO MIX FRONT MIC LEVEL Selects the front microphone input level 40dB 50dB REAR MIC CH1 3 LVL Selects the rear microphone input le
160. ON MENUJ SETUP DATA SD CARD The factory settings are as follows SYSTEM CAMERA ID OPTION MENU gt without v Other present CAC FILE SD CARD are factory settings Item Description of settings Remark LOAD Selects the chromatic aberration compensation data file saved to the SD memory card and loads to the camera STORE the file number when saving chromatic aberration No compensation data of the SD memory card loaded in LOAD to the camera DELETE Selects and deletes the chromatic aberration compensation data file saved to the SD memory card LENS FILE are factory settings Item Description of settings Remark LOAD Selects the lens file saved to the camera memory loads it and uses it as a setting value for the current operation SAVE Specifies and saves the title and number of current lens setting values to the CLEAR ALL FILE memory of this camera Clears and initializes all values saved to the lens file LENS FILE SD CARD are factory settings Item Description of settings Remark LOAD Selects a lens file saved to the SD memory card and loads it as one set of lens files 8 file set in the camera SAVE Specifies and saves the title and number of a lens file 1set of 8 files in the camera to the SD memory card are factory settings SCENE Item Description of settings Remar
161. ONT VR CH2 CH4 2 AUDIO LEVEL CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO LEVEL CH2 4 gt audio channel 1 3 2 4 recording level adjustment dial e When the AUDIO SELECT CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO SELECT 2 4 gt switch is set to lt MANU gt the recording level of audio channels 1 2 3 4 can be adjusted by these dials Set which of audio channels 1 2 or 3 4 is to be adjusted at the main menu I F SETUP MIC AUDIO VR SELECT These knobs have a locking mechanism so turn the dial while pressing in when making adjustments 3 AUDIO IN audio input selector switch Select the input signal to be recorded to audio channel 1 2 3 4 lt FRONT gt Records the microphone input signal connected to the lt MIC IN gt microphone input terminal lt W L gt Records the input signal from the wireless microphone receiver Records the audio input signal from the audio equipment connected to lt AUDIO IN CH1 3 gt and lt AUDIO IN CH2 4 gt audio input channels 1 3 2 4 terminals lt REAR gt NOTE When the stereo microphone AJ MC900G optional is used set both lt CH1 gt and lt CH2 gt or lt CH3 gt and lt CH4 gt to lt FRONT gt L CH is recorded to lt CH1 gt lt CH3 gt and R CH is recorded to lt CH2 gt lt CH4 gt respectively 4 lt AUDIO SELECT CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO SELECT CH2 4 gt audio channel 1 3 2 4 automatic manual level adjustment selector switch Select the method to adjust the recording level for audio
162. OTE P REC indicator when PRE REC is set to OFF When PRE REC is set to OFF REC is displayed until recording of video or audio to the P2 card is completely finished after recording is stopped Refer to Information display such as pre recording page 75 for information about the P REC indicator This indicator can be turned off by setting OFF in the main menu VF gt VF INDICATOR gt P REC i REC Press the USER button to which PRE REC is assigned to simply toggle between PRE REC ON OFF For details refer to Assigning functions to lt USER gt buttons page 56 Video and audio according to the preset time sometimes cannot be recorded in the following cases Immediately after the power is turned on After recording related settings have been altered in the setting menu Immediately after the P2 card is inserted After playback or recording check is performed The pre recording function does not function in the following cases When an item other than NORMAL is selected in the main menu REC PB gt REC FUNCTION RECORDING When SDI is selected in the main menu SYSTEM gt SYSTEM MODE REC SIGNAL When 1080 59 94P or 1080 50P is selected in the main menu gt SYSTEM gt SYSTEM MODE LINE amp FREQ Loop recording This function successively records to two P2 cards inserted in the card slots When there is no more free space on the card recording ret
163. OW 2CH MOV MOV 1080i mode H 264 30 fps 25 fps 800 kbps 480x270 Baseline Profile 1080 59 94P mode 60 fps 50 fps 320x180 1080 50P mode 320x180 W Audio Recording mode File format Codec Number of channels Bitrate per channel Sampling frequency STD 2CH MP4 MP4 AAC LC 2ch 64 kbps 24 kHz 41 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback Proxy recording Recording mode File format Codec Number of channels Bitrate per channel Sampling frequency SHQ 2CH MOV MOV LPCM 2ch 768 bps 48 kHz HQ 2CH MOV MOV AAC LC 2ch 64 kbps 48 kHz HQ 4CH MOV MOV AAC LC 4ch 64 kbps 48 kHz LOW 2CH MOV MOV AAC LC 2ch 64 kbps 48 kHz Recording the proxy data Select P2 or P2 amp SD in the main menu REC PB PROXY SETUP REC MEDIA and press the REC button to start proxy recording at the same time as recording of the sources Push the MODE CHECK MENU CANCEL switch towards the lt MCK MCL gt side three times to display the proxy data recording information on the viewfinder screen Recording the SD memory To record the proxy data use SD SDHC or SDXC memory cards with an indication of class2 or higher For the latest information not included in these Operating Instructions refer to the support desk at the following website http pro av panasonic net When recording the proxy data to an SD memory card always format the card using the camera Checking the SD memory card 1
164. Operations Menu list Item Description of settings Remark EXPORT When in USB storage mode exports writes from the P2 card or SD memory card Enabled only in USB storage mode to a storage device by units of card If ALL SLOT is selected card data from both slots currently in use slots 1 and 2 or slots 3 and 4 can be combined and exported IMPORT Imports writes back clips from a storage device to a P2 card in units of card Valid for type S storage only when in USB storage mode Only writes back to a card with a serial number matching the original card serial number Displayed only in storage explorer REPAIR Repairs a clip displayed in the defective clip indicator yellow occurring as a result Repair may be impossible depending on how of sudden power loss during recording or other reasons it was damaged When repair is impossible a yellow indicator is displayed RE CONNECT If clips that were recorded over multiple P2 cards are not recognized as Incomplete clips are formed in the following consecutive clips and the incomplete clip indicator is displayed use this cases function to restore the clips to the consecutive clips the original combined clips When clips recorded to multiple P2 cards are copied separately to individual P2 cards When clips recorded to multiple cards are copied separately to individual storage device cards and then re written to P2 cards Even if
165. RD REMAIN din 4 i d VF INDICATOR REC 35 Recording media display MEDIA VF INDICATOR 36 System mode SYSTEM MODE 4 VF INDICATOR REC i STATUS 37 pod status or _ _ _ play REC PB SETUP REC TALLY VF INDICATOR gt REC 38 Recording format FORMAT 1 Setin the main menu gt VF gt 2 Warnings and display during changes cannot be turned off 3 Warning cannot be turned off 4 5 6 Partially displayed Displays the input information of all four channels Not displayed when there is no information VF DISPLAY DISP CONDITION Mode check display The camera settings and status can be displayed on the viewfinder screen Pushing the MARKER SEL gt lt MODE CHECK MENU CANCEL switch on the camera towards the lt MCK MCL gt side switches the six screens STATUS screen display LED screen display FUNCTION screen display AUDIO screen display CAC screen display gt USER SW STATUS screen display no display Each screen is displayed for approximately five seconds Pushing the MARKER SEL gt lt MODE CHECK MENU CANCEL switch towards the MCK MCL gt side while the screen is displayed moves the display to the next screen ON OFF of each screen display be selected in the main menu gt VF MODE CHECK IND For details on STATUS screen displays refer to Checking and d
166. RKER SEL gt lt MODE CHECK MENU CANCEL switch is pushed towards the lt MCK MCL gt side when the pre recording function is set to ON The status is displayed when the USER button where PRE REC is assigned is pressed to switch to the pre recording mode P REC s OFF illuminated 26 Gamma mode display Displays the gamma mode currently selected by GAMMA MODE SEL in the main menu PAINT gt gt GAMMA HD SD FLK1 FLK2 FLK3 FREC VREC 27 Lock status display of auto tracking white balance Displayed when the lt USER gt button where ATW LOCK is assigned is pressed and the color temperature is fixed while auto tracking white balance is active 28 Type of marker Displays the type of currently displayed marker MKR A B OFF 29 Y GET brightness display In the Y GET mode the image level in the frame displayed near the center of the screen is displayed as 0 to 109 30 High sensitivity mode display Displayed when set HIGH SENS in the main menu PAINT gt S CAMERA SETTING SHOOTING MODE 31 Flash band compensation FBC function display Displayed when the flash band compensation function is activated 32 Chromatic aberration compensation CAC Displayed when the chromatic aberration compensation function is active 33 Battery charge level voltage kV Displays the battery charge level in 0 1 V units 5 k96 Displays the charge level of batteries with
167. RMAL Accepts immediately when pressed 1sec Accepts when pressed and held down for approx one second are factory settings SW MODE Item Description of settings Remark RET SW Sets the function when the RET button on the lens is pressed The return video is not displayed correctly when INHIBIT The lt RET gt button function is disabled an image signal that differs from the video system of this camera REC CHECK Recordi heck function is enabled Records can be checked Serre eck onto etd Records can be chake Ven ne menu VF SETUP gt GENLOCK GENLOCK is set to INT return CAM RET Return video function is enabled While the RET button is video images may sometimes be skewed slightly pressed the signal supplied to the SDI IN terminal can be in the horizontal direction checked on the viewfinder and LCD monitor When switching between camera images and ASSIST Turns the focus assist display ON OFF return video images the image on the viewfinder D ZOOM Digital zoom function is enabled Digital zoom can be switched and LCD monitor may be disrupted for an instant ONV OFF This is not a malfunction EVF CLR Selects whether to display video in the viewfinder in color or in black and white TEXT MEMO Text memo function is enabled A text memo can be recorded to the frame selected when the button is pressed SHOT MARK Shot mark function is enab
168. Recording or playback operation The current operation will continue Action to take 11 Fan stop Display in display window Change the P2 card or insert an additional card as needed Does not display Warning lamp Flashes four times per second Tally lamp Does not display Viewfinder The FAN STOPPED display is illuminated at all times Alarm Does not sound 195 Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspection Warning system Warning content set There is an error in the fan and it stops Otherwise OPTION MENU OPTION gt FAN MODE OFF has been Recording or playback operation Operation will continue but if the camera is operated with the fan stopped the temperature rises and recording playback may not operate normally Action to take If the fan has stopped with error stop using immediately and consult your dealer If the fan has stopped temperature of the camera will rise Therefore do not use the camera for a long period of time Use the tripod etc and do not touch the camera directly Error code If errors occur on the camera for any cause the following error code is displayed on the time code display in the display window Check the types of warning and deal with the error according to Warnings description list page 194 Code No Message display Description Type of warning First row Second row
169. Remark USER BOX Sets whether to display the user box in the viewfinder ON OFF USER BOX WIDTH Sets the width of the user box 1 13 100 USER BOX HEIGHT Sets the height of the user box 1 13 100 USER BOX H POS Sets the horizontal position of the center of the user box 50 0 50 USER BOX V POS Sets the vertical position of the center of the user box 50 0 50 are factory settings 144 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list VF INDICATOR Item Description of settings Remark EXTENDER Turns extender display ON OFF ON OFF SHUTTER Turns shutter speed display ON OFF ON OFF FILTER Turns filter no display ON OFF ON OFF WHITE Turns AWB PREJ A B display ON OFF ON OFF GAIN Turns the currently selected gain S GAIN and DS GAIN displays ON OFF ON OFF IRIS Selects displays of super iris and super black operation status and iris value Coordinates iris value display and iris override IRIS Only the iris value is displayed display When iris override is changed it is A displayed for three seconds even if OFF is set S IRIS All are displayed S Displays super iris and super black operation status OFF Does not display CAMERA ID Sets whether to record camera ID BAR Camera ID is
170. T1 gt terminal MEM In playback mode these are playback images CAM When the main menu SYSTEM SYSTEM MODE gt REC SIGNAL is CAM output is always camera images MONITOR OUT Selects whether the zebra pattern is superimposed over the output video signals ZEBRA from the monitor output terminals lt SDI OUT2 gt lt HDMI OUT gt and VIDEO OUT gt The remote VBS signal also interlocks ON Superimposes OFF Does not superimpose SDI EDH Sets whether to add an error detection flag to SD SDI output ON OFF THUMBNAIL OUT Selects whether to output the thumbnail of a clip displayed on the LCD monitor to the SDI OUT1 gt terminal lt SDI OUT2 gt terminal HDMI OUT gt terminal and VIDEO OUT gt terminal ON Performs output OFF Does not output SDI OUT1 MARKER are factory settings Item Description of settings Remark MARKER SW Switches the marker ON Displays OFF Does not display CENTER MARK Switches the center marker SAFETY MARK 11 large 2 Open center large 3 small 4 Open center small OFF Does not display Selects the type of frame for the safety zone marker 1 Box 21 Corners OFF Does not display SAFETY AREA Sets the size of the safety zone marker The constant ratio of length to width can be set in 1 increments 8054 9094 100 FRAME
171. TA These are various types of setting items when performing camera recording and playback SETUP OUTPUT SEL SDI OUT1 MARKER MONI OUT MARKER DOWNCON SETTING GENLOCK MIC AUDIO USB LAN LCD MONITOR BATTERY P2CARD BATTERY SETTING These are items for setting related to audio and video input output and display and setting battery audio video output etc FILE SETUP DATA SD CARD SETUP DATA SELECT CAC FILE SD CARD LENS FILE LENS FILE SD CARD SCENE SD CARD PROPERTY FORMAT SD CARD LOAD USER DATA INITIALIZE These are items for performing file related operations such as reading from an SD memory card containing menu settings data and handling lens files and lens chromatic aberration correction CAC files These menu items cannot be set when the thumbnail screen is displayed MAINTENANCE SYSTEM CHECK LENS ADJ BLACK SHADING WHITE SHADING LENS FILE ADJ CAC ADJ These are items for performing maintenance inspection of the camera These menu items cannot be set when the thumbnail screen is displayed 132 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Setting menu structure SYSTEM SYSTEM MODE These items are used for checking and updating the camera s firmware version SYSTEM SETUP Set the system fr
172. TROL Turns chromatic aberration correction CAC ON OFF ON Compensates for chromatic aberration OFF Does not compensate for chromatic aberration LIST DELETE Views the list of CAC FILE stored in the camera internal memory and deletes files of the numbers selected from the list of CAC FILE No1 No32 are factory settings 167 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list SYSTEM MODE Item Description of settings Remark LINE amp FREQ Sets the system number of lines and frequency recording format and audio The setting values are saved together with the quantizing bit quantity When the number of lines and frequency are selected settings of REC FORMAT and AUDIO SMPL only the items that can be selected for those frequencies are displayed If the RES on each setting of LINE amp FREQ When frequency is changed the device must be restarted If a restart is required a the settings of LINE amp FREQ are restored to the confirmation dialog will be shown previous settings these items are reset to the 1080 59 94P Selects the number of lines 1080P and system frequency previous settings at the time 59 94 Hz 1080 50P Selects the number of lines 1080P and system frequency 50 Hz 1080 59 94i Selects the number of lines 1080i and system frequency 59 94 Hz 1080 501 Selects the number of lines 1080i and system frequency 50 Hz 480 59 94i Sele
173. TUP REC MEDIA Only the following functions can be assigned to the lt SHOT MARKER and TEXT MEMO buttons e lt SHOT MARKER button INHIBIT Y GETJy ASSIST JREC SW RET SW PRE REC SLOT SEL USB MODEJ LCD B L SHOT MARK e TEXT MEMO button INHIBIT Y GETy ASSIST REC SW RET SW PRE REC SLOT SEL USB MODEJ LCD B L TEXT MEMO NOTE When the remote control unit AJ RC10G optional or the extension control unit AG EC4G optional is connected and I OVR or C TEMP is assigned to the USER buttons on the AJ RC10G and AG EC4G side operation of the jog dial button on the camera is disabled The following functions also turn off when the camera is turned off ILL OVRy S BLK B GAMMA Y GET DRS ASSIST C TEMP ATW ATW LOCKJ D ZOOMY S GAIN DS GAIN FBC WFM AUD CH1 3 AUD CH2 Ay USB MODE Note however that the C TEMP color temperature is held after it is altered USER SW GAIN switching setting In addition to L M H standard gain the S GAIN super gain mode for increasing analog gain to 30 dB or more and DS GAIN digital super gain for incrementally increasing gain using progressive drive can also be used on the camera For selection of this function set the gains to be used in S GAIN and DS GAIN respectively in advance Each item can be selected in the main menu CAMERA gt USER SW GAIN With S GAIN analog gain increase with ON set is enabled and analo
174. TUP DATA SD CARD 4 CAC file Number of files 32 CAC ADJ gt CAC CONTROL Menu operation Setting valve changed INITIALIZE 4 SAVE USER DATA SCENE 4 SAVE Scene file Current data SCENE Number of files 4 operation status of camera 4 LOAD Number of files 1 LENS FILE LOAD Lens file a LENS FILE Number of files 8 LOAD USER DATA SAVE INITIALIZE 4 LOAD FACTORY DATA User data Number of files 1 LENS FILE SD CARD LENS FILE SD CARD 4 SAVE Factory data cannot be rewritten Number of files 1 Camera internal files Menu operation NOTE 8 setup files can SD memory card Number of files 8x8 Lens file be written to SD memory For details on items for setup data user data and scene file etc refer to Setting items to USER MENU and loading reading the settings to a data file page 170 Setting up using SD memory cards An SD memory card optional can be used as a setup card that stores setting menu content Use of this data allows you to quickly reproduce optimum setup states Handling SD memory cards The SD memory card can be removed and inser
175. The data selected in SETUP DATA SELECT is loaded SAVE Overwrites the current menu setting values in the camera to the file selected from the existing file list saved to the SD memory card Data selected in SETUP DATA SELECT is saved SAVE AS Enters the current menu setting values of the camera to file name and title as a new file and saves it to the SD memory card Data selected in SETUP DATA SELECT is saved SETUP DATA SELECT are factory settings Item Description of settings Remark SYSTEM Handles the menu in the main menu SYSTEM Select menu items to save to read from to SD CAMERA ID Handles the menu in the main menu CAMERA CAMERA ID memory in the main menu gt FILE gt USER MENU SEL Handles the menu in the main menu USER MENU SEL PAINT LEVEL Handles the menu adjustment value in the main menu PAINT PAINT S SELECT Handles the menu setting value items with S in the main menu PAINT VF Handles the menu in the main menu VF CAMERA Handles the menu in the main menu CAMERA REC PB Handles the menu in the main menu REC PB CLIP Handles the menu setting value in the main menu CLIP I F SETUP Handles the menu in the main menu gt I F SETUP MAINTENANCE Handles the menu setting value in the main menu gt MAINTENANCE OPTION MENU Handles OPTI
176. UDIO SELECT CH2 4 gt switch to AUTO 2 Set the AUDIO IN switch to lt FRONT gt 3 Turn the microphone connected to the MIC IN terminal to an appropriate audio source and ensure that both level displays for CH1 CH2 change according to the audio volume Inspecting the audio level manual adjustment 1 Set the AUDIO IN switch to lt FRONT gt 2 Set the lt AUDIO SELECT CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO SELECT CH2 4 gt switch to lt MANU gt 3 Turn the AUDIO LEVEL CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO LEVEL 2 4 gt Turn to the right to increase the level display Inspecting the earphones and speaker 1 Adjust the MONITOR dial and ensure that the speaker volume changes 2 Connect earphones to the PHONES terminal Ensure that the speaker is muted and the output from the microphone is directed to the earphones 3 Adjust the MONITOR dial and ensure that the earphones volume changes Inspections for using an external microphone 1 Connect the external microphone to the AUDIO IN CH1 3 gt terminal or AUDIO IN CH2 4 gt terminal 2 Set the AUDIO IN CH1 gt lt AUDIO IN CH2 gt switch to lt REAR gt 3 Toggle the microphone input ON OFF switch according to the power supply for the external microphone Selection items 448V Microphones with an external power supply OFF Microphones with an internal power supply 4 Turn the microphone towards an audio source and ensure that the audio level display on the viewfinder screen ch
177. VC 150 24BIT 16BIT 4 4 v AVC G50 24BIT 4 AVC G25 24BIT DVCPRO HD 16BIT 4 A 1080 59 94P AVC 1100 24BIT 16BIT 4 V 1080 50P AVC 1100 24BIT 16BIT V V 480 59 94i DVCPRO50 16BIT DVCPRO 16BIT V DV 16BIT 576 501 DVCPRO50 16BIT DVCPRO 16BIT DV 16BIT List of recording settings recording functions The recording modes of the camera act as follows depending on the setting of REC SIGNAL in the main menu SYSTEM gt SYSTEM MODE and the setting of RECORDING in REC PB REC FUNCTION Even in Available cases recording functions are restricted in some system modes For details refer to the table in System modes and recording functions Setting Recording setting setting menu Recording operation enabled disabled Operation mode REC SIGNAL RECORDING Pre recording Proxy Text memo Shot mark Loop recording CAM LOOP Not available Not available Not available Not available Standard recording NORMAL Available i Available Available Available Input recording of SDI signal SDI Disabled Not available 47 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Multi formats Selecting video output The video output method can be selected Video output etc can be selected by the setting of OUTPUT SEL in the main menu
178. a SLOT n Displays clips in the specified P2 card n indicates slot number 1 to 2 P2 REMAIN Displays media information remaining capacity P2 USED Displays media information used capacity 108 Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips Thumbnail operations META DATA Displays the set metadata 4 Simple properties display This displays the various properties of the clip on which the pointer is positioned You can select the items to display from the menu For details refer to Properties page 119 NOTE If the maximum number of characters is exceeded it will only display the maximum number of characters that can be displayed 5 Thumbnail Displays the thumbnail recorded in each clip This thumbnail can be changed using the EXCH THUMBNAIL function For details refer to Thumbnail screen display settings page 111 6 Clip information display Displays any one of the time code TC at the start of clip recording user bits UB at the start of clip recording shooting time TIME shooting date DATE shooting date and time DATE TIME clip name CLIP NAME user clip name USER CLIP slot number SLOT time cord of the thumbnail THUMBNAIL TC according to the setting 7 Recording mode Displays the recording mode for the clip on which the cursor is positioned 8 System format Displays the format for the clip on which the cursor is positioned 9 Duration Displays the
179. a ID is recorded at the same time as the color bar signal The position where the camera ID is superimposed on the color bar can be selected in ID POSITION When setting DATE TIME to ON date and time information as well as the camera ID can be superimposed on the color bar When setting TC ON COLOR BAR to ON the time code is displayed at color bar output The time code is not recorded CTL counter setting display When the lt DISPLAY gt switch is set to lt CTL gt the CTL counter value appears in the time counter display in the LCD display window The counter value is 12 hour display Besides the time code drop frame and non drop frame can be set the main menu REC PB TC UB gt DF MODE The playback order of clips recorded to P2 cards is not linear such as with VTR Each time that thumbnail operation is performed or that some of the P2 cards are re inserted the counter value will be re organized and the positioning of the clips recorded so far will change Accordingly in the recording and playback modes separate counter values are displayed CTL counter in the recording mode recording CTL In the recording mode record recording pause stop and recording check the recording CTL counter value is displayed and counting is performed continuously from the previous recording end point The CTL counter value is held even if the camera is turned off Counting is continued from the previous value when the c
180. age 49 Adjusts white balance automatically When this switch is operated with the WHITE BAL switch on the side set to the lt A gt or lt B gt lt AWB gt position adjustment is performed in several seconds and adjustment values are stored in memory Note that this does not work when the lt WHITE BAL gt switch is at the lt PRST gt position 20 Chapter 2 Description of Parts Shooting and recording playback functions section Adjusts black balance automatically lt ABB gt When ON is set in main menu CAMERA SW MODE gt SHD ABB SW CTL the automatic adjustment function for black shading can be assigned to this switch NOTE When white balance or black balance is automatically adjusted each of these automatic adjustments is canceled by pushing the ABB side or AWB side again The adjustment values at this time return to the values before automatic adjustment was performed 7 MARKER SEL gt lt MODE CHECK MENU CANCEL switch page 80 This is the spring switch to check selection of the marker and the shooting status of the camera Each time the switch is pressed towards the lt MKR gt side the marker display switches in the viewfinder between A marker display gt lt MKR gt B marker display hidden When the power is turned on the status before the power was turned off is displayed Each time the switch is pressed towards the lt MCK MCL gt side the six screens
181. ains the color information of A B or C selected in DETECT TABLE from near the center marker If executed data from I CENTER to PHASE are automatically obtained The obtained data becomes the table data of A B or C selected in DETECT TABLE Multiple color information for A B and C cannot be obtained simultaneously SKIN DTL EFFECT Sets the effective level of the skin tone detail 0 16 31 CENTER Sets the center position of the upper axis setting the area that displays skin tone 0 35 255 WIDTH Sets the width of the area that displays the skin tone of the upper axis that focus on I CENTER 0 55 255 Q WIDTH Sets the width of the area that displays the skin tone of the upper Q axis that focus on I CENTER 0 10 90 Q PHASE Sets the phase of the area that displays the skin tone regarding to the Q axis 180 0 179 are factory settings 140 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list I CENTER direction Skin tone area When saving or reading setup files from an SD memory card you can save items with an S and items without an S separately Items with an S in front of the item name are the targets for PAINT S SELECT in the main menu FILE SETUP DATA SELECT Items without S are targets for PAINT LEVEL KNEE LEVEL Item Description
182. al setting memory on each of A and lt B gt is limited to one respectively In this case content in memory is not interlocked with the filter When FILTER INH is set to OFF the adjustment values of each filter can be automatically stored to memory corresponding to the WHITE BAL switch setting lt A gt or lt B gt The camera has four built in filters so a total of eight 4x2 adjustment values can be stored to memory When the super gain function is enabled the lt AUTO W B BAL switch does not function and the message AWB UNABLE S GAIN MODE is displayed Viewfinder display for white balance For details refer to Viewfinder status display page 70 Setting the auto tracking white balance ATW function The camera is equipped with the Auto Tracking White Balance ATW function that automatically tracks the white balance of images according to the lighting conditions The auto tracking white balance function can be assigned to lt B gt of the WHITE BAL switch Select ATW in the main menu gt CAMERA WHITE BALANCE MODE AWB The auto tracking white balance function can be assigned to the USER buttons USER MAIN gt lt USER1 gt lt USER2 gt For details refer to Assigning functions to USER buttons page 56 50 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Adjusting the white and black balance Canceling the auto tracking white balance Press the lt USER gt bu
183. amera is next turned on NOTE If the RESET button is pressed while the recording CTL counter value is displayed only the recording CTL counter value is reset Note however that the counter value cannot be reset during a recording check 68 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting the time data CTL counter in the playback mode playback CTL Example Example Top frame Current position Top frame Current position Z Y Z Y Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 03 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 03 00 00 Delete Clip 2 Reset l Current position Top frame l V V Z Clip 1 Clip 3 Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 03 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 Fig 1 Fig 2 In the playback mode playback fast forward cue playback paused the playback CTL counter value is displayed For the playback CTL counter value each time that the playback order of the clip is changed clip is sorted in recording date and time order the playback CTL counter value so far is disabled and is re calculated referenced to the start frame of the initial clip and displayed again Fig 1 The clip playback order is changed in the following cases When a clip is deleted copied or repaired or a P2 card is formatted When the thumbnail display is switched For details refer to Thumbnail screen display settings pag
184. anges according to the audio volume You can check each channel by connecting one microphone to each channel Inspections for the clock time code and user bits 1 Set the user bits as needed For details refer to User bits settings page 63 2 Set the time code For details refer to Setting the time code page 64 3 Set the lt TCG gt switch to R RUN 4 Press the lt REC gt button Ensure that the number in the counter display changes when the recording starts 5 Press the lt REC gt button again Ensure that the number in the counter display stops changing when the recording stops 6 Set the lt TCG gt switch to lt F RUN gt Ensure that the number in the counter display changes regardless of the recording status 191 Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspection Inspections before shooting 7 Set the lt DISPLAY gt switch to lt UB gt Check that each time the HOLD button is pressed VTCG DATE TIME gt no display time zone TCG value is displayed and that this value is accurate If DATE TIME and the time zone is incorrect set the correct date time page 30 NOTE Note that date and time data based on DATE TIME and the time zone settings is recorded in the clip and affects the playback order in the thumbnail operations 192 Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspection Maintenance Maintenance Charging the built in battery The camera uses the
185. aperture so that the white window in the center of the grayscale chart is about 80 5 Press the lt AUTO W B BAL switch towards lt AWB gt White balance is automatically adjusted 6 Measure the signal level of RGB in the waveform monitor 7 Replace the lens with the one to be used for creating the lens file 8 Fine adjust the lens aperture so that the signal level of Gch becomes the same as the signal level obtained in step 6 9 Set ON in the main menu MAINTENANCE LENS FILE ADJ gt gt LENS FILE ADJ MODE 1 0 Adjust so that the signal level of Rch becomes the same as Gch in the main menu gt MAINTENANCE LENS FILE ADJ gt LENS R GAIN OFFSET 1 1 Likewise adjust LENS B GAIN OFFSET so that the signal level of Bch becomes the same as Gch Writing lens files to internal memory TITLE EXIT EXIT LOA SETUE CAC CLEA SCENE SD CARD PR FORMAT SD LOAD USER DATA v ui A 2 3 4 LENS FILE S 5 6 7 8 1 Select SAVE in the main menu FILE LENS FILE and press the jog dial button or SET button The list of lens files currently saved in camera memory is displayed 2 Select the file to write from the list The title entry screen and keyboard are displayed 3 Enter the desired characters with the keyboard 4 Use the jog dial button or cursor buttons lt gt to select OK and press the jog dial button or SET button The confirma
186. ard is not available for recording e If the selection of P2 memory card or microP2 memory card does not match the inserted card the P2 card access LED is not illuminated in orange even when the card is inserted In this case match the recording target media in the main menu REC PB gt REC PB SETUP REC MEDIA Inspecting the camera unit 1 Set the zoom to the electric zoom mode and check the behavior of the electric zoom Ensure that the image changes between telescopic and wide angle 2 Set the zoom to the manual zoom mode and check the behavior of the manual zoom Rotate the manual zoom lever and ensure that the image changes between telescopic and wide angle 3 Set the iris to automatic adjustment mode and ensure that the automatic adjustment works when the lens is pointed at objects with different degree of brightness 4 Set the iris to manual mode and rotate the iris ring to check the manual iris adjustment 5 Set the iris back to automatic adjustment mode and check the followings by switching the GAIN switch setting to L M and then lt H gt The iris is adjusted for objects with same degree of brightness as the setting changes The gain value display on the viewfinder screen changes as the setting changes 6 If a lens with an extender is attached set the extender to its usage position to ensure that it works properly Inspecting the memory recording functions Perform procedures from In
187. ation visit the P2 support page on the following website http pro av panasonic net REC SIGNAL Switches the video input signal Once the power is turned off it is always set to CAM Record signal from the camera CAM the next time power is turned on SDI Record input from the lt SDI IN gt terminal ASPECT Selects the aspect ratio to record Only in SD 16 9 Recorded using the 16 9 aspect ratio 4 3 Recorded using the 4 3 aspect ratio SCAN REVERSE Sets whether to use function to correct video when using an anamorphic lens or film lens ON Corrects video Inverts the top bottom left and right sides of a video OFF Does not correct video are factory settings SYSTEM SETUP Item Description of settings Remark SETUP 7 5 Switches the setup ON Setup 7 5 is on OFF Setup 7 5 is off P OFF LCD DISPLAY Selects whether to set the time code of window display or display the count when the power is off ON Sets and displays time code even when the power is off OFF Settings and display on the display window are not available while the power is off are factory settings 168 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list HOURS METER Item Description of settings Remark OPERATION Displays the total time the camera power was turned on TIMES Displays the total number of times the camera power was tur
188. atus display SDI OUT2 Displays the status of the signal output from the SDI OUT2 gt terminal OUTPUT Displays the status of MEM CAM or OFF set by SDI OUT2 and MONITOR OUT MODE in the main menu I F SETUP OUTPUT SEL SELECT Displays the signal format set by SDI2 HDMI OUT and 1080P SDI2 HDMI OUT in the main menu gt I F SETUP OUTPUT SEL by SYSTEM DOWNCON 1080i CHAR Displays the position of the MON OUT CHARATER switch by ON OFF P2CARD STATUS Displays the status of the P2 card inserted in the card slot remaining capacity and total used capacity _ The statuses of cards to be displayed are as follows ACTIVE ACCESSING INFO READINGJ FULL PROTECTED NOT SUPPORTED FORMAT NG REC IMPOSSIBLE NO CARD For details refer to P2 card access LEDs and status of P2 cards page 32 TOTAL P2 mP2 Displays the remaining capacity total capacity totaled for slots 1 2 or slots 3 4 and the recording medium P2 or mP2 SLOT1 or SLOT3 Displays the status of the P2 card in slot 1 or slot 3 and remaining capacity total capacity SLOT2 or SLOT4 Displays the status of the P2 card in slot 2 or slot 4 and remaining capacity total capacity PROXY MEDIA Displays the media selection status for proxy recording P2 P2 amp SD OFF MODE Displays the setting status for proxy recording mode STD 2CH MPA SHQ 2CH
189. avigate through setting menus select items and set values 3 LCD monitor Displays the video in the viewfinder Clips on the P2 card can also be displayed as thumbnails During thumbnail display clips can be operated or deleted and P2 cards can be formatted for example by operating the cursor lt SET gt button or operating the main menu CLIP NOTE The quality of the image displayed in this monitor is different from the quality of the image that is actually recorded output to the camera Bear this in mind in particular when 480 59 94i or 576 501 is set in the main menu gt SYSTEM gt SYSTEM MODE LINE amp FREGQ When 480 59 94i or 576 501 is set in the main menu SYSTEM gt SYSTEM MODE LINE amp FREQ and camera video and playback video are switched the image on the monitor is temporarily disrupted This is not a malfunction If the battery is removed or the external DC power plug is removed while the power is on a residual image might remain in the LCD screen This is not a malfunction It will disappear if the screen is left as it is At lower temperatures residual images sometimes appear to increase on screen This is not a malfunction 4 OPEN button This is used to open the LCD monitor 5 lt THUMBNAIL gt button page 110 This switches the video in the LCD monitor from video in the viewfinder to thumbnail display of clips Pressing this button again returns the display to the original
190. be recognized immediately in the following instance Immediately after a pre recording Immediately after a recording slot is switched The P2 card access LED can be set to off at all times in the main menu REC PB REC PB SETUP ACCESS LED In this case turn off the power before removing the card or after the card is inserted or after operation recording playback etc has stopped and wait for the charging to complete before removing the card Preventing accidental erasure To prevent the content of a P2 card from being accidentally erased set the write protect switch on the P2 card to the Protect or LOCK position E Write protect switch Write protect switch NOTE Write protect switch can be switched while the card is being accessed during recording or playback but does not take effect until accessing of the card stops P2 card access LEDs and status of P2 cards P2 card access LED P2 card status Mode check display Is illuminated green Recording possible Reading writing are both possible ACTIVE Is illuminated orange Recording target Reading writing are Dol possible Thacardiis curranty the recording target including loop recording Flashing orange Accessing card Reading writing are currently being performed ACCESSING Flashing orange rapidly Then i being The P2 card is being recognized INFO READING recognized Card full There is no free space o
191. bits page 63 USER EXT Records internal user values as VITC UB only VITC UBG MODE Same value as the user bit that is displayed when UBG MODE is set to USER or EXT TIME Records the time measured by the internal clock DATE Records the hour digit of year month day date time measured by the internal clock EXT Records the user bit values currently input to the lt TC IN terminal User values held internally also change this input value only UBG MODE TCG Records the time code value FRAME RATE Records the camera photo frame rate information When playing back clips recorded in native format the same frame rate information as VITC UB is output regardless of the recorded value Use at this setting when the editing device such as a computer uses the frame rate information of the user bits REGEN Reads the user bit last recorded to P2 card that is currently to be recorded to and recording this value as it is How to input user bits By setting user bits information such as memos date time up to eight digits long hexadecimal can be recorded a lt DISPLAY gt switch b Cursor buttons A V lt d gt c lt TCG gt switch 1 Set the DISPLAY switch to UB 2 Set the lt TCG gt switch to SET 3 Set the user bits by the cursor buttons Screen display gt The digit to be set flashing moves to the right lt The digit to be set flashin
192. but are displayed as Only alphanumeric characters can be entered Formatting a P2 card 1 Select FORMAT in the main menu CLIP Select the slot number where the P2 card to be formatted is inserted and press the SET button Select EXIT when you do not wish to format the card 2 Use the cursor buttons and the SET button to select YES The selected P2 card is formatted NOTE Data deleted as a result of formatting cannot be restored Always check the data before formatting If the CPS password has been set the confirmation message whether to select the encrypted format CPS ENCRYPT or normal format NORMAL is displayed when selecting a slot When the encrypted format is selected the microP2 memory card is encrypted Formatting SD memory cards SD memory cards can also be formatted from the thumbnail screen With an SD memory card inserted into the camera perform the following operation 1 Select FORMAT in the main menu CLIP Select SD CARD and press the SET button Select EXIT when you do not wish to format the card 2 Use the cursor buttons and the SET button to select YES The SD memory card is formatted NOTE SD memory cards can also be formatted in the main menu FILE FORMAT SD CARD For details refer to Formatting SD memory cards page 86 Data deleted as a result of formatting cannot be restored Always check the data before formatting
193. button DISABLE Forbids the operation of the flash band compensation function with the USER button RC CHECK SW Selects camera operation when the remote control unit AJ RC10G CHECK 5 button or the extension control unit REC CHK gt button is pressed upgrades REC CHECK Recording check function is enabled PLAY Performs playback WHITE BALANCE MODE are factory settings Item Description of settings Remark FILTER INH Selects whether white balance memory Ach or Bch data is held or not held for each CC filter ON Holds Ach and Bch memory data 2 memories regardless of the CC filter OFF Holds Ach and Bch memory data 8 memories for each CC filter SHOCKLESS AWB When the position of the WHITE BAL switch is changed set the time until when the white balance starts at the changed position FAST Approx 1 second NORMAL Approx 2 seconds SLOW1 Approx 3 seconds SLOW2 Approx 10 seconds SLOW3 Approx 20 seconds OFF Moves instantly are factory settings 150 This item is scheduled to be supported in future Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list Description of settings Remark AWB AREA Switches the detection area that automatically adjusts white balance 25 Detects 25 of the area near screen center 50 Detects 50 of the area near screen center 90 Detects 90
194. by its handle while the tripod is attached When the tripod is attached its weight will also affect the unit s handle possibly causing the handle to break and hurting the user To carry the unit while the tripod is attached take hold of the tripod CAUTION To reduce the risk of fire and annoying interference use the recommended accessories only CAUTION Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss CAUTION To reduce the risk of fire refer mounting of the optional interface boards to qualified service personnel CAUTION Do not jar swing or shake the unit by its handle while the conversion lens or another accessory is attached Due to the added weight of the conversion lens any strong jolt to the handle may damage the unit or result in personal injury CAUTION Do not leave the unit in direct contact with the skin for long periods of time when in use Low temperature burn injuries may be suffered if the high temperature parts of this unit are in direct contact with the skin for long periods of time When using the equipment for long periods of time make use of the tripod CAUTION A coin type battery is installed inside of the unit Do not store the unit in temperatures over 60 C 140 F Do not leave the unit in an automobile exposed to direct sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows closed Rea
195. cal symbol In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved Panasonic Corporation Web Site http panasonic net Panasonic Corporation 2013
196. channel 1 2 3 4 lt AUTO gt Adjusts automatically lt MANU gt Adjusts manually Set which of audio channels 1 2 or 3 4 is to be adjusted at the main menu I F SETUP MIC AUDIO VR SELECT 5 Wireless slot page 102 Mount the UniSlot wireless microphone receiver optional 6 lt LINE gt lt MIC gt line input microphone input selector switch page 103 Switch the audio input signal connected to AUDIO IN 1 3 gt and AUDIO IN CH2 4 gt audio input channels 1 3 2 4 terminals LINE Inputs audio signals from line input audio equipment MIC Inputs audio signals from the microphone 7 Microphone input power selector switch page 191 Turn on off the power supply to the microphone connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 3 gt and AUDIO IN CH2 4 gt audio input channels 1 3 2 4 terminals lt 48V gt Supplies 48 V power to the microphone lt OFF gt Does not supply power to the microphone NOTE When microphone input lt 48V gt is set and microphones are not connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 3 gt and AUDIO IN CH2 4 gt terminals low frequency noise may occur This is not a problem when a microphone is connected 17 Chapter 2 Description of Parts Audio input function section When ON is not set in the main menu I F SETUP gt MIC AUDIO gt REAR MIC POWER power is not supplied regardless of the switch position lt AUDIO IN
197. code generator value during recording and the time code reader value during playback OFF Does not display the time code SYSTEM INFO Selects ON OFF for displays of system information and warnings ON OFF SAVE LED REC STATUS Sets operation of the SAVE lamp When the viewfinder has the SAVE lamp P2CARD Links to a warning message and flashes when recording capacity on the P2 card becomes low OFF Selects whether to display REC in the viewfinder and the LCD monitor when the camera is recording Always off do not use Even if this item is OFF if CHAR is selected in the main menu gt REC PB gt REC PB SETUP gt REC TALLY REC is displayed ON Displays REC OFF Does not display REC PROXY DISP Turns proxy information display ON OFF This can also be set in the main menu REC ON OFF PB gt PROXY SETUP gt PROXY DISP Error information is displayed even when the function is OFF P REC i REC Turns pre recording information display ON OFF Pre recording mode switch information is ON Flashes P REC or REC access connection status OFF Does not flash P REC displayed regardless of this menu setting MODE CHECK IND are factory settings Item Description of settings Remark STATUS Sets whether to display the status screen when the
198. cted target partition folder is valid until the storage device is disconnected or the power is turned off To cancel the selected partition folder hold down the lt SET gt button for one second or more again on the selected partition Press the lt CANCEL gt button to deselect all partitions folders NOTE In TYPE S storage devices MODEL is UNKNOWN and clips recorded across other partitions will not be one normal clip Copying clips to a TYPE S storage device changes the copy destination s partition MODEL to UNKNOWN The setting of the partition name can be made for the TYPE S storage device The preset partition name is displayed in PARTITION NAME on the explorer screen Setting a partition name in the explorer screen When the storage device is TYPE S the name up to 20 characters can be set to the partition The preset partition name is displayed in PARTITION NAME on the explorer screen 1 In the explorer screen place the cursor on the partition you want to set up You can display the thumbnail list and set a name for the partition by pressing the SET button 2 Press the MENU button 3 Select CHANGE PARTITION NAME in the main menu CLIP and press the SET button This displays the soft keyboard 4 Enter the partition name and select OK The partition name is set Deleting the last partition in the explorer screen You can delete the last partition on a storage device 1 In the explo
199. cting SMALL in the main menu CLIP gt THUMBNAIL SETUP THUMBNAIL SIZE Amaximum of 6 items can be displayed at the same time When 6 items are already selected all unchecked items cannot be selected You can change your item selection by unchecking selected items Playing back clips 1 Press the lt THUMBNAIL gt button The thumbnail screen appears on the viewfinder screen 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor over the clip to be played back 3 Press the lt PLAY PAUSE gt button Playback starts from the beginning of the clip indicated by the cursor After playback of the clip indicated by the cursor ends the clips will be played back in the order displayed on the thumbnail screen The screen returns to the thumbnail screen when playback of the last clip ends By changing the thumbnail display settings you can set it to play clips on a specified slot or clips with an inserted text memo only To change the playback order of the clips select the clips in the order to be played back Select SELECTED CLIPS in the main menu CLIP REPOSITION to display the clips in the selected order During playback of clips press the amp REW button to start 4x speed reverse playback and the lt gt button to start 4x speed fast playback Press the lt PLAY PAUSE gt button to return to normal playback During playback of clips press the lt PLAY PAUSE gt button to pause the playback Dur
200. cts the number of lines 480i and system frequency 59 94 Hz 576 501 Selects the number of lines 576i system frequency 50 Hz REC FORMAT Select the recording codec AVC G50 and AVC G25 cannot be selected in AVC 100 Selects AVC Intra 100 the following cases When the main menu REC PB gt REC ANC 150 Selects AVC Intra 50 I 1 Sers 4 FUNCTION RECORDING is set to other AVC G50 Selects AVC LongG 50 than NORMAL AVC G25 Selects AVC LongG 25 DVCPRO HD Selects DVCPRO HD 100 Mbps DVCPRO50 Selects DVCPROS0 50 Mbps DVCPRO Selects DVCPRO 25 Mbps DV Selects DV 25 Mbps AUDIO SMPL RES If the recording format is AVC Intra 100 AVC Intra 50 selects number of the audio When the recording format is AVC LongG 50 recording quantizing bits or AVC LongG 25 select 24BIT When the recording format is DVCPRO HD DVCPROS50 DVCPRO or DV select 16BIT Clips recorded at 24 bit should be played back using a 24 bit compatible P2 device or P2 Viewer Plus The clip numbers of P2 devices that are not 24 bit compatible are displayed in red and 16BIT 16 bit is the audio recording bit quantity cannot be used for playback Audio does not play back correctly on a P2 Viewer that is not 24 bit compatible Always use the latest P2 Viewer Plus version 24BIT 24 bit is the audio recording bit quantity For 24 bit compatible P2 devices and the latest P2 Viewer Plus inform
201. d 4 The channel display of the audio level meter on the display window and viewfinder are also switched interlocked to operation of this switch 5 MONITOR SELECT gt audio selection selector switch Select audio output from the speaker earphones and lt AUDIO OUT gt terminal interlocked with the audio channel selector switch lt CH1 3 gt Outputs the signal of either audio channel 1 or audio channel 3 lt ST gt Outputs either the stereo audio signals of audio channels 1 and 2 or the stereo audio signals of audio channels 3 and 4 Stereo audio signals can be changed to the MIX signals in the main menu I F SETUP MIC AUDIO gt MONITOR SELECT lt CH2 4 gt Outputs the signal of either audio channel 2 or audio channel 4 MONITOR SELECT gt audio selection Audio channel selector switch selector switch CH1 2 CH3 4 lt CH1 3 gt Audio channel 1 Audio channel 3 lt ST gt Stereo output from audio channels 1 and 2 Stereo output from audio channels 3 and 4 lt CH2 4 gt Audio channel 2 Audio channel 4 STEREO or MIX can be switched to the main menu gt I F SETUP gt MIC AUDIO gt MONITOR SELECT 6 lt PHONES gt earphones terminal mini jack This is the terminal for connecting the audio monitor earphones stereo Audio that is output is the same on both terminals front side rear side 7 AUDIO OUT gt terminal Output audio signals recorded on audio c
202. d displays on the viewfinder are factory settings 162 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list BATTERY P2CARD Item Description of settings Remark BATTERY SELECT Selects the battery to use When the battery charge level percentage HYTRON140 Detects the battery charge level according to the selected cannot be detected it will follow the setting value DIONIC9o battery when the Anton Bauer HYTRON140 or DIONIC90 the Of TYPE A even if it is set to BATT STAT or IDX ENDURA10 E 10 and the PAG PAG L96e are selected ENDURA STAT Make sure that the TYPE A ENDURA10 setting values FULL fully charged NEAR END PAG L96e near end or END end is appropriate for the TYPE A Select any item when a battery other than HYTRON140 patel TYPE B DIONIC90 ENDURA10 or PAG L96e is used At this time set FULL full voltage NEAR END near end warning TYPE C voltage and END end voltage in the main menu gt I F SETUP BATTERY SETTING page 163 according to the battery in use BATT STAT When using a battery whose charge level is detected as a percentage value near end and end operation is conducted according to the percentage value of the charge level if BATT STAT is selected Set the percentage value of BATT STAT NEAR END near end and BATT STAT END end the main menu gt I F SETUP BATTERY SETTING page
203. d this first indicates safety information FCC NOTICE USA Declaration of Conformity Model Number AJ PX5000G Trade Name Panasonic Responsible Party Panasonic Corporation of North America Two Riverfront Plaza Newark NJ 07102 Support contact 1 800 524 1448 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation To assure continued compliance follow the attached installation instructions and do not make any unauthorized modifications CAUTION This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures R
204. d use the cursor buttons and the lt SET gt button to select YES Fig 2 The menu closes and the thumbnail for the clip is replaced g NOTE You can view the thumbnail position number of frames from the top of the clip from the THUMBNAIL item of the clip information display Since thumbnails usually come from the top of the clip O is displayed Even if you change the thumbnail playback from the thumbnail screen will still start from the beginning of the clip The thumbnail image with the mark may be displayed for clips of a format with a different number of lines and frequencies when displaying a text memo clip without displaying the thumbnail of the text memo position displayed at the bottom section lt SHOT MARKER button 1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor over the clip to which you want to add a shot mark 2 Press the lt SHOT MARKER button A shot mark is added to the thumbnail of the clip at the cursor position e To delete a shot mark place the cursor again and press the lt SHOT MARKER button NOTE You can attach a shot mark during recording Add shot marks after recording stops to attach the shot mark to the most recently recorded clip For details refer to Shot mark recording function page 39 When adding a shot mark to or deleting the shot mark from a clip recorded across multiple P2 cards do this with all these P2 cards inserted into card slots SHOT MARK is assigned
205. data The COUNT value is indicated as a four digit number The COUNT value is incremented each time a new clip is generated if clip metadata has been loaded and TYPE2 has been selected as the recording method The COUNT value can be reset using the following method When selecting PROPERTY the main menu gt REC PB gt REC METADATA and selecting USER CLIP NAME the following screen is displayed Move the cursor over COUNT RESET and press the SET button to reset the COUNT value to 1 META DATA REC META DATA REC ON CREATOR META NAME LAST UPDATE PERSON Panasonic LOAD DATA COUNT REC DATA DATA 0010001 COUNT RESET PRESS EXIT BUTTON TO EXIT Initializing the metadata setting Select INITIALIZE in the main menu gt REC PB gt REC METADATA and press the SET button Select YES when the confirmation screen is displayed The settings the main menu REC PB gt REC METADATA and onwards including loaded metadata are initialized Setting metadata display language You can set the language for displaying metadata Select LANGUAGE in the main menu REC PB REC METADATA select the display language and press the SET button When you select the NTSC J region you can choose either ENGLISH or JAPANESE Refer to Setting the region of use setting frame frequency etc page 11 NOTE Hidden English characters are not displayed properly
206. data to an SD memory card or reading the written data perform FORMAT SD CARD and SETUP DATA SD CARD in the main menu FILE If the SD memory card that was formatted in a standard other than the SD SDHC SDXC standards on a device other than the camera is inserted LOAD or SAVE operation of the file cannot be performed Format the SD memory card again Formatting SD memory cards EXIT SURE SETUP DATA SD CARD gt SETUP DATA SELECT NO FILE SD CARD LENS FILE LENS FILE SD CARD SCENE SD CARD PROPERTY LOAD USER DATA 1 Select main menu FILE FORMAT SD CARD and press the jog dial button or lt 5 gt button The confirmation screen is displayed 2 Select YES the confirmation screen and press the jog dial button or SET button To not format the memory card select NO and press the jog dial button or SET button 3 When the completion message is displayed select OK and press the jog dial button or SET button For details on error messages refer to Warning error displays in the thumbnail operation menu operation and USB storage mode page 197 NOTE SD memory cards can also be formatted from the thumbnail screen For details refer to Formatting SD memory cards page 118 Data deleted as a result of formatting cannot be restored Always check the data before formatting 86 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recordi
207. de input to the lt TC IN terminal Recording run The time code can be regenerated to the time code of clips recorded to P2 cards and recorded as a continuous value W User bits Two types of user bits are built in e LTC UB Recorded as LTC and output from the lt TC OUT terminal It is also output as LTC of the HD SDI signal e VITC UB Recorded as VITC recorded to VIDEO AUX area by DVCPRO It is also output as VITC of the HD SDI signal You can select and record user set values time year month day the same value as time codes camera frame rate information and input value of external signals from the TC IN terminal etc respectively NOTE Only one type of user set values is recorded E Date time real time The internal clock is used for measuring the free run time code while the power is off and as the time and year month day data of the user bits It is also used as the reference for file generation times during clip recording which determine the sorting order of thumbnails and the order of playback t is also used to generate clip metadata For details refer to Setting the date time of the internal clock page 30 W CTL counter During recording the CTL counter measures the total recording time since the last reset During playback it is also the value for counting the beginning of playable clips as a reference point It can be used as a means for relatively learning the current playback position E
208. depending on the setting in the main menu gt I F SETUP gt MIC AUDIO gt WIRELESS WARN 1 System error Display in display window The error code is displayed in the time code display Warning lamp Flashes four times per second Tally lamp Flashes four times per second Viewfinder The SYSTEM ERROR display error codes and on the lower line of these the cause are displayed Alarm Sounds continuously Warning content Standard signal error or communication error Recording or playback operation Stops Action to take Check the factor display Error code and consult your dealer 2 Mismatched format Display in display window The error code E 31 is displayed in the time code display Warning lamp Flashes four times per second Tally lamp Flashes four times per second Viewfinder TURN POWER OFF and SYSTEM MODE are displayed Alarm Sounds continuously Warning content An internal mismatch occurs in system mode and a restart is required Recording or playback operation Does not operate Action to take Follow the message to turn the power off once turn the power on again and check that there is no error display 3 Card removal error Display in display window The error code E 30 is displayed in the time code display Warning lamp Flashes four times per second Tally lamp Flashes four times per second Vie
209. der has the SAVE lamp and P2CARD is set in the main menu gt VF gt VF INDICATOR SAVE LED the SAVE lamp flashes four times per second Alarm It continues to sound until some operation is performed after recording Warning content The P2 card space is used up Recording or playback operation Recording will stop Action to take Delete clips in the recording media or insert a new recording media 194 Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspection Warning system 6 Recording error Display in display window Does not display Warning lamp Flashes four times per second during continuous recording Tally lamp Flashes four times per second during continuous recording Viewfinder The REC WARNING display and rows beneath display the cause Displayed only while the error occurs during recording However it is retained for at least three seconds When recording stops due to an error it is displayed until the P2 card operates TEMPORARY PAUSE may be displayed instead of REC WARNING For details refer to Warning information display page 196 Alarm Sounds four times per second during continuous recording Warning content This is a recording or recording circuit setting error Recording or playback operation Recording may be continued or stopped Action to take Start recording again Or turn the power off once and then start
210. der screen the chromatic aberration compensation function is in operation If the letters CAC are not displayed the chromatic aberration compensation function is not in operation 2 Set ON in the main menu gt VF gt VF INDICATOR CAC The letters CAC are displayed at the top right of the viewfinder screen ON is set in the factory settings Loading the chromatic aberration compensation file from the SD memory card EXIT EXIT SETUP DA NO TITLE SETUP DA EXIT EXIT SETUP DATA f SETUP DATA DELETE EXIT LENS FILE 2 A22X7 8BERM M58 f LENS FILE PASE 4 HJ17ex7 6B LENS FILE LENS FILE SD CARD SCENE SD CARD PROPERTY FORMAT SD CARD LOAD USER DATA Fig 1 SCENE SD CARD _ FORMAT SD CARD LOAD USER DATA Fig 2 1 Insert the SD memory card written with the chromatic aberration compensation data you downloaded from out website into the camera For details on downloading refer to the following website http pro av panasonic net 2 Select LOAD from the main menu FILE CAC FILE SD CARD Fig 1 The list of CAC files on the SD memory card is displayed 3 Select the file number to load and press the jog dial button or lt SET gt button Fig 2 The confirmation screen is displayed 4 Select YES and press the jog dial button or lt SET gt button The list of CAC files saved in camera memory is displayed 5 Select the file number to save and press the jo
211. ding cannot be stopped until the P2 card is recognized Push the MARKER SEL gt lt MODE CHECK MENU CANCEL switch three times towards the lt MCK MCL gt side and check the P2 card status on the SLOT1 SLOT2 rows SLOT3 SLOT4 displayed on the viewfinder screen 27 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback Special recording functions Special recording functions When recording to P2 cards the special recording functions of pre recording and loop recording can be performed by setting on the main menu gt REC PB gt REC FUNCTION This function enables recording of video and audio from a fixed amount of time 0 to 8 seconds and max 15 seconds in DVCPRO and DV before recording is actually started Operation to start recording Operation to stop recording 4 i Time 1 lt lt 1 I Actual recording time 1 1 Pre recording time 1 Check the settings of each item in the main menu gt SYSTEM SYSTEM MODE For details on system modes in which the pre recording function can be used refer to the table in System modes and recording functions page 47 For details on menu operations refer to Setting menu basic operations page 134 2 Set ON in the main menu gt REC PB REC FUNCTION PRE REC and set pre recording by PRE REC TIME P REC is displayed at the top of the display window page 75 3 Press the lt REC gt button N
212. ding the red lever down move the black lever in the direction of the arrow and slide the camera backward to remove it J os aig Red lever Black lever e NOTE If the tripod adaptor pin does not return to its original position after the camera has been removed hold the red lever down and move the black lever in the direction of the arrow again in order to return the pin to its original position Note that the camera cannot be mounted if the pin remains in the center Attaching the shoulder strap Attach the shoulder strap to the shoulder strap fittings To detach the shoulder strap first open the hooks then detach the strap Shoulder strap NOTE Make sure that the shoulder strap is securely attached 241042 Chapter 5 Preparation Mounting accessories Attaching the rain cover The figure below shows an example of use of the rain cover SHAN RC700 Tighten the cord Secure with the surface fastener 105 Chapter 5 Preparation Connecting the lt DC OUT gt terminal with the external recording start stop switch Connecting the DC OUT gt terminal with the external recording start stop switch It is possible to retrieve 1 5 A current from the lt DC OUT gt terminal of the camera Recording start stop can be controlled by connecting an external switch to this terminal An LED connected to this terminal can al
213. djustment is canceled and the level can also be adjusted by LVL CONTROL CH1 and LVL CONTROL CH2 NOTE The values of each item when VR SELECT is changed are carried over 58 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Selecting audio input and adjusting recording levels When the level adjustment dial is assigned to CH1 2 W Selection of level adjustment of channels 1 2 For the level adjustment method of channels 1 2 select AUTO automatic adjustment or MANU manual adjustment by adjustment dial by the AUDIO SELECT CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO SELECT CH2 4 gt switch When lt MANUs gt is selected the volume of channels 1 2 is adjusted by the AUDIO LEVEL CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO LEVEL CH2 4 gt dial W Adjustment by AUDIO LEVEL CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO LEVEL 2 4 gt dial Adjustment the lt AUDIO LEVEL CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO LEVEL 2 4 gt dial while viewing the audio channel level meter in the display window or the audio level meter in the LCD monitor When the topmost bar 0 dB is exceeded the OVER display is illuminated to indicate that input audio is excessive The maximum level must be adjusted so that the display does not reach 0 dB W Adjustment by F AUDIO LEVEL dial When operating the camera alone we recommend using the F AUDIO LEVEL dial to adjust the audio level Select the audio channel to be adjusted in advance and while viewing the level meter of the viewfinder screen adjust
214. e 63 0 63 R R Mg PHASE Corrects the hue between red and colors between red and magenta 63 10 63 137 are factory settings Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list Item R Mg PHASE Description of settings Corrects the hue between red and magenta 63 5 63 Remark Mg PHASE Corrects the magenta hue 63 3 63 Mg B PHASE Corrects the hue between magenta and blue 63 4 63 B PHASE Corrects the blue hue 63 0 63 B Cy PHASE Corrects the hue between blue and cyan 63 0 63 Cy PHASE Corrects the cyan hue 63 12 63 Cy G PHASE G PHASE Corrects the hue between cyan and green 63 15 63 Corrects the green hue 63 10 63 G YI PHASE Corrects the hue between green and yellow 63 10 63 YI PHASE Corrects the yellow hue 63 6 63 YI YI R PHASE Corrects the hue between yellow and colors between yellow and red 63 22 63 YI R PHASE Corrects the hue between yellow and red 63 7 63 YI R R PHASE Corrects the hue between colors between yellow and red and red 63 13 63 are factory settings When saving or reading setup files from an SD memory card you can save items with an S and items w
215. e 111 When a P2 card is inserted or removed The reference value value of start frame of initial clip is changed in the following cases When the power is turned on or all P2 cards are removed the top frame becomes 0 When the playback CTL counter value is reset the current playback position is taken as 0 and the location that was the reference location becomes a minus number value Fig 2 NOTE If the RESET button is pressed while the playback CTL counter value is displayed only the playback CTL counter value is reset 69 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder status display Viewfinder status display In addition to video the viewfinder displays messages that indicate the camera settings and operation status a center marker safety zone marker zebra patterns camera ID and other information Lamp display in the viewfinder The example is for the AJ HVF21KG For information on the viewfinder refer to the Operating Instructions for the optional viewfinder 1 TALLY REC am SAVE 2 3 4 1 TALLY REC recording lamp Illuminated red during recording and flashes if an abnormality occurs For details refer to Warning system page 194 2 Irregular operation status warning lamp Lights when the camera enters an irregular operation status among the items set ON in the main menu VF gt LED 3 BATT battery lamp Star
216. e flange back adjustment chart approximately 3 m from the lens and adjust the lighting on the chart to obtain an appropriate image output level If the image level is too high use the filters or the shutter 4 Loosen the F f Flange focus ring clamping screw 5 Set the zoom ring to the telephoto end position either manually or by electric drive 6 Aim the lens at the flange back adjustment chart and turn the distance ring to bring the chart into focus 7 Set the zoom ring to the wide angle end position and turn the F f Flange focus ring to bring into focus At this time do not move the distance ring 8 Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the lens is in focus at both the telephoto and wide angle positions 9 Firmly tighten the F f Flange focus ring clamping screw NOTE F b Lens flange back ring may be indicated on some lenses as the lens flange focus ring White shading compensation Adjusting the white shading This is a method of combining the sawtooth shaped waveform and parabola waveform to compensate to a flatter waveform based on the respective R G and B waveforms of the video signal We recommend adjusting the R G and B waveforms in the horizontal and vertical directions while monitoring them on the waveform monitor Be sure to set DS GAIN and D ZOOM to OFF before adjusting white shading H SAW NMa i r 1 Before white shading After white shading compensation f X compensation H PARA
217. e level in low brightness areas DRS The compression level be varied in the main menu PAINT gt KNEE LEVEL l The dynamic range stretcher function compresses the image level in high brightness areas and stretches the image level in low brightness areas A slight difference in coloring might occur by turning the dynamic range stretcher function ON OFF When the dynamic range stretcher function is set to ON the knee function or the black gamma function are not activated ASSIST Switches ON OFF for the focus assist display This is a function to set a focus easily enlarging the image center on the viewfinder and LCD monitor Assigns the function for switching to the mode for changing the color temperature by the jog dial button This is effective for intentionally varying the color temperature after white balance has been performed To change the color temperature press the lt USER gt button C TEMP assigned with this function and then press the jog dial button The color temperature indicator in the viewfinder screen flashes in reverse 4 to indicate that the mode is entered for changing the color temperature While the indicator is flashing turn the jog dial button to change the color temperature At this time the setting value of the position lt PRST gt lt A gt lt B gt where the lt WHITE BAL gt switch is current set also is changed FBC Switches the flash band compensation function to enabled disabled WFM
218. e recorded to the SD memory card E If the error message is displayed when recording starts The SD memory card format is different The SD memory card contains 1000 clips or more An attempt is made to record to an SD memory card containing data for updating the firmware of the camera E If the error message is displayed during recording The SD memory card was ejected during recording An error occurred in recording to the SD memory card SD min or SD WP Proxy data will not be recorded to the SD memory card but Check the status of the SD memory card recording to the P2 card will be performed No SD memory card is inserted SD min The SD memory card is write protected SD WP Copying proxy data to the SD memory card 1 Press the lt THUMBNAIL MENU button to display the thumbnail screen 2 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the clip to be copied and press the lt SET gt button 3 Press the lt MENU gt button 4 Select SD CARD in the main menu CLIP COPY 5 Select YES in the confirmation message and press the SET button e NOTE If SD END is displayed and the proxy data being recorded to the SD memory card is deleted perform this procedure to copy the proxy data from the P2 card and enable the deleted proxy data to be restored Source data is not copied 44 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback Normal and variable speed playback Norma
219. e signal matching the system frame frequency is supplied to the lt GENLOCK IN gt terminal To enable the reference signal input to the lt GENLOCK IN terminal GL IN must be set in the main menu gt I F SETUP gt GENLOCK GENLOCK Select the output signal to lock to the input reference signal at GL PHASE at 1080 59 94i 1080 50i only Adjust the horizontal phase of the reference signal and output signal at H PHASE COARSE and H PHASE FINE NOTE The sub carrier of the camera s composite signal is not locked to the sub carrier of the reference signal Generator locking to the reference signal supplied from the SDI IN terminal The SDI matching the system frame frequency is supplied to the SDI IN terminal To enable the reference signal input to the SDI IN terminal SDI IN must be set the main menu gt I F SETUP GENLOCK GENLOCK When SDI is selected in the main menu SYSTEM SYSTEM MODE gt REC SIGNAL the signal is synchronized with the reference signal input to the SDI IN terminal regardless of the selection of GENLOCK The phase of the output signal at this time is the same as the reference signal supplied to the SDI IN terminal Adjust the horizontal phase of the reference signal and output signal at H PHASE COARSE and H PHASE FINE Output status The output status changes as follows according to selection of the external reference signal and generator lock s
220. e value as the value of the external time code is output to the counter display area Do not set to the recording mode for several seconds until the sync generator has stabilized Furthermore lock the time code to the TC IN terminal signal The time code of the HD SDI signal input from the SDI IN terminal is not locked When PRE REC is set to ON in the main menu REC PB REC FUNCTION disrupted images or stopped time codes may be recorded if the time code is switched from recording run to free run immediately before recording or an external time code is input to be slaved to the TC IN terminal Setting of user bits when the time code is externally locked When the lt TCG gt switch is set to lt F RUN gt only the time code is locked to the time code from the external source To lock the user bits to the input value from an external source set EXT in the main menu REC PB gt TC UB UBG MODE and set USER EXT in the main menu REC PB gt TC UB gt VITC UBG MODE Canceling the external lock Set the lt TCG gt switch to lt R RUN gt after stopping supply of the external time code Cautions when switching the power supply from the battery to the external power supply while an external lock is active To keep on the time code generator power supply continuously connect an external power supply to the lt DC IN gt terminal and then remove the battery pack If the battery pack is removed first
221. ect the type of menu to read beforehand in the main menu FILE SETUP DATA SELECT PAINT EXIT EXIT EXIT VF SETU SYSTEM CAME CAMERA ID CAC FILE SD CARD v USER MENU SEL REC LENS FILE VF SE LENS FILE SD CARD lv PAINT S SELECT SCENE v VF MAIN SD CARD PROPERTY v CAMERA SYST FORMAT SD CARD REC PB USER LOAD USER DATA v CLIP 1 Select LOAD in the main menu FILE SETUP DATA SD CARD and press the jog dial button or SET button A list of setup files stored in the specified folder in the SD memory card is displayed 2 Select the file name to read and press the jog dial button or lt SET gt button The confirmation screen is displayed If SYSTEM RESTART is displayed on the confirmation screen the camera will restart after reading is complete 3 Select YES and press the jog dial button or SET button Loading of the file begins For details on error messages if an error message is displayed refer to Warning error displays in the thumbnail operation menu operation and USB storage mode page 197 How to use user data The content of setting data can be written to and read written data from user area on the camera s internal memory Use of this data allows you to quickly reproduce optimum setup states Writing setting data to user area 1 Select SAVE USER DATA in the main menu gt FILE INITIALIZE and press the jog dial button or SET button
222. ected NO Partition number DATE Partition record date TIME Partition record time VERIFY Verification settings and results during recording ON FAILED ON FAILED Verification performed Items match e ON FINISHED Verification performed but no match found For P2STORE is displayed OFF Verification not performed NAME Partition name defined by the user SIZE Total capacity of the storage device USED Used storage device capacity FREE CAP Remaining storage device capacity For FAT SELECTED PART Displays a checkmark when a target partition is selected SELECTED PART NO List of selected folder numbers only displayed when multiple folders are selected NO Folder number DATE Folder creation date TIME Folder creation time FOLDER Folder name creation date and time are not displayed in the root folder SIZE Total capacity of the storage device 128 Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips Thumbnail operations FREE CAP Remaining storage device capacity NOTE You can change the thumbnail screen display if necessary The 1001st clips onwards are not displayed Displaying clip information You can display each type of metadata of clips saved in a storage device The display mode is the same as the P2 card clip properties 1 In the storage device thumbnail screen move the cursor to the target clip
223. ed NO Folder number FOLDER NAME Folder name excluding the CONTENTS folder DATE Folder creation date 126 Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips Thumbnail operations TIME Folder creation time NOTE For TYPE S storage devices you can switch between the partition name and serial name display using the cursor buttons If there is an invalid partition in P2STORE the partition information is displayed in gray You can also check the remaining capacity of the target partition in the main menu CLIP gt PROPERTY FREE CAP OF PARTITION Selecting the target folder partition in the explorer screen You can display all clips included in the selected partition folder as thumbnails by selecting partitions folders as targets You can display up to six partitions folders When the seventh partition folder is specified setting is disabled and a warning is displayed STORAGE EXPLORE FOLDER NAME STORAGE PARTITION FAT 2 VENDOR 13 06 28 16 27 33 2013 JUN 28 MODEL SIZE 238 4 GB USED GB CARDS FREE CAP 225 7 GB SET HOLD SELECT RELEASE SET THUMBNAIL SELECTED PART 2 6 SHIFT SET THUMB ALL SEL PART AVC EET 100 PRESS EXIT BUTTON TO EXIT 1 In the explorer screen place the cursor on the partition folder 2 Press and hold the lt SET gt button for one second or more The partition folder is selected and a checkmark is displayed The sele
224. ed images UPPER Superimposes the time code display at the top of the recorded images LOWER Superimposes the time code display at the bottom of the recorded images OFF Does not superimpose time code on recorded images PROXY DISP Selects whether to display proxy data recorded information or messages in the e This can also be set in the main menu VF gt viewfinder and LCD monitor VF INDICATOR PROXY DISP ON Displays proxy recording information and SD memory card remaining capacity at the start of recording Warning information is displayed at all times OFF Displays proxy and SD memory card warning information for only three seconds when warning occurs are factory settings TC UB Item Description of settings Remark UBG MODE Selects the user bits mode USER Selects the user bits value set in the display window TIME Selects the local time hh mm ss DATE Selects the local date and time YY MM DD hh EXT Records the user bits values currently entered to the TC IN terminal TCG The TCG value is entered to the user bits FRAME RATE Selects camera imaging information such as frame rate REGEN Reads the value recorded to the card and continuously records that value VITC UBG MODE DF MODE Selects the VITC user bits mode USER EXT If UBG MODE is operating in EXT that value is followed and when not EXT a user value set
225. ed information about proxy data FORMAT The file format of the recorded data is displayed VIDEO CODEC Video codec information of the recorded data is displayed VIDEO FRAME RATE Video frame rate information of the recorded data is displayed VIDEO BIT RATE Video bitrate information of the recorded data is displayed VIDEO RESOLUTION The video resolution of the recorded data is displayed ASPECT RATIO The aspect ratio of the recorded data is displayed TC SUPER An indication whether the TC time code display is superimposed over the recorded video AUDIO CODEC Audio codec information of the recorded data is displayed AUDIO BIT RATE Audio bitrate information of the recorded data is displayed AUDIO SAMPLING RATE Audio sampling rate information of the recorded data is displayed NUM OF AUDIO CH The number of audio channels of the recorded data is displayed Error displays about proxy data recordings If an error occurs during recording the proxy data check the entries in the following table and take necessary actions Error displays pn Behavior and cause Action to take viewfinder screen PROXY ERROR or PROXY Proxy data recording will stop but recording of the material will The proxy data will not be properly recorded Turn the camera REC WARNING continue off and turn it on again to check the recording and playback If An error occurred in the internal proxy module the e
226. eorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help The user may find the booklet Something About Interference available from FCC local regional offices helpful FCC Warning To assure continued FCC emission limit compliance follow the attached installation instructions and the user must use only shielded interface cables when connecting to host computer or peripheral devices Also any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment could void the user s authority to operate this device NOTIFICATION Canada CAN ICES 3 B NMB 3 B A rechargeable battery that is recyclable powers the product you have purchased Read this first Declaration of Conformity with the requirements of Technical Regulation on the Restriction Of the use of certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment adopted by Order Ne1057 of Cabinet of Ministers of Ukraine The Product is in conformity with the requirements of Technical Regulation on the Restriction Of the use of certain Hazardous Substances in electrical and electronic equipment TR on RoHS The content of hazardous substance with the exemption of the applications listed in the Annex Ne2 of TR on RoHS
227. eparing for audio input Using audio devices je A o e Z amp AUDIO IN switch AUDIO IN CH1 3 gt terminal lt AUDIO IN CH2 4 gt terminal d lt LINE gt lt MIC gt selector switch 1 Connect the audio equipment to the AUDIO IN CH1 3 or AUDIO IN CH2 4 gt terminal of the camera with the XLR cable 2 According to the channel to which the XLR cable is connected switch the lt AUDIO gt switch to lt REAR gt 3 Set the lt LINE gt lt MIC gt selector switch on the rear panel to lt LINE gt 103 Chapter 5 Preparation Mounting accessories Mounting accessories Mounting the camera on a tripod When mounting the camera on a tripod use the optional tripod adaptor SHAN TM700 Tripod adaptor Pan head Fig 1 Fig 2 1 Mount the tripod adaptor on the tripod Fig 1 2 Mount the camera on the tripod adaptor Fig 2 Slide the camera forward along the grooves until you hear a click NOTE Select an appropriate hole in the adaptor taking into account the center of gravity of the camera and tripod adaptor combined Also make sure that the diameter of the selected hole matches the diameter of the pan head screw Removing the camera from the tripod adaptor While hol
228. equency the number of lines and recording format HOURS METER VERSION UPDATE USER MENU SEL This menu is used to set the items to be displayed in USER MENUJ For details on items that can be set refer to Setting items to USER MENU and loading reading the settings to a data file page 170 OPTION MENU structure OPTION AREA SETTING 133 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Setting menu display Setting menu display Setting menu basic operations You can change camera settings using the setting menu according to the shooting scene and recording details The menu is divided into the main menu sub menu and setting item menu Set data are written and saved in the camera s internal memory This section describes main menu operations Main menu operation is the same as the other menus except when opening the menu screen a Jog dial button b lt MENU gt button c AP Y 4 cursor buttons E lt SET gt button d MENU button cursor E E PAINT PAINT EXIT EXIT VF CAMERA ID Y CAME RET SW REC CHECK SHUTTER SPEED SHUT S BLK LVL 10 SHUTTER SELECT SHUT REC PB E C USER COLOR BARS VF SETUP FS WFM FILE WHIT WFM DISP MAINTENANCE 5 MAIN USER EXIT RGB GAIN AWB PRE MATA AWB A GAIN AWB A LOW RGAIN AWB B MID 9 B GAIN AWB B MIDL HIGH AWB AGAIN OFFSET HIGH AWB A GAIN OFFSET ADDI AWB B G
229. er to Setting CPS password page 122 NOTE Set or delete the CPS password in the main menu CLIP gt PROPERTY gt CPS PASSWORD 33 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback P2 card Up to 16 characters can be input The encrypted microP2 memory card is not recognized on the SD card slot in a computer If the card is unable to be recognized authenticate with the correct password or format and use the card as recording media Recording data on the card failed to be recognized cannot be checked Do not perform any operation other than manual authentication and formatting with the failed card inserted To access the encrypted card from a computer in USB device mode authenticate the encrypted card with P2 Viewer Plus How to handle data recorded P2 cards P2 cards are semiconductor memory cards that are used as the recording medium in the professional video production and broadcasting devices that make up the DVCPRO P2 series Since data recorded in the P2 format is in a file format they have excellent compatibility with computers The file structure is a unique format which in addition to video and audio data in MXF files contains various other important information items The folder structure links data recorded in the P2 format as shown below Drive CONTENTS AVCLIP AUDIO CLIP ICON PROXY VIDEO VOICE LASTCLIP TXT All these folders are required If even part of this informati
230. ers to PASS P2 Asset Support System can log in to PASS to use the dedicated P2 Status Logger tool With P2 Status Logger you can check the version information of the device used and jump to the page to download the required firmware For details about downloading and using P2 Status Logger refer to the pages displayed after logging in to PASS Other benefits are offered to registered users For details refer to the website http panasonic biz sav pass e of PASS P2 Asset Support System Check the version using the camera and apply the update Check the version of the camera in the main menu SYSTEM VERSION and access the latest information on the firmware from the website described in NOTE and then download the firmware as needed NOTE Update completes by loading the downloaded files to the camera via the SD memory card For details on update visit the support desk at the following website http pro av panasonic net On the camera use SD memory cards that are compliant with the SD standard SDHC standard or the SDXC standard Always use the camera or P2 Viewer Plus to format the SD memory card 199 Chapter 10 Specification This chapter describes the dimensions specifications and connector signals Chapter 10 Specification Dimensions and specifications Dimensions and specifications 147 mm 5 25 32 inches
231. etting Set GENLOCK and GL PHASE in the main menu gt I F SETUP gt GENLOCK Selection of external reference signal Generator lock setting Output signal status System mode GENLOCK Input signal and GL PHASE phase relationship with external reference signal input terminal HD SDI output matches the HD SDI input signal HD SDI Down converter output has a delay of approx 90 H from the HD SDI SDI IN HD SDI input signal terminal Down converter output matches the HD SDI input signal SDI IN COMPOSITE HD SDI output has an advance of approx 90 H from the HD SDI input signal HD SDI HD SDI output is not locked to the SD SDI input signal SD SDI lt SDI IN Down converter output is not locked to the SD SDI input terminal COMPOSITE si gnal HD SDI output matches the HD Y input signal HD SDI Down converter output has a delay of approx 90 H from the 10801 1080 HD Y lt GENLOCK HD Y input signal IN gt terminal Down converter output matches the HD Y input signal COMPOSITE HD SDI output has an advance of approx 90 H from the HD Y input signal GL IN HD SDI output matches the VBS input signal HD SDI Down converter output has a delay of approx 90 H from the VBS GENLOCK VBS input signal IN terminal Down converter output matches the VBS input signal COMPOSITE HD SDI output has an advance of approx 90 H from the VBS input sig
232. etting USER MENUJ page 135 Displayed by pressing the MENU button Main menu You can set all items in the setting menu The main menu has a structure of categorized layers according to intended use and setting frequency Displayed by pressing and holding the MENU button for three seconds or more OPTION MENU Menu items are prepared to take into account additional functions in the future Please consult your vendor for more details Displayed by pressing the MENU button while pressing and holding the LIGHT button Main menu structure PAINT RB GAIN CONTROL RGB BLACK CONTROL MATRIX configure these settings COLOR CORRECTION LOW SETTING MID SETTING HIGH SETTING ADDITIONAL DTL SKIN TONE DTL KNEE LEVEL GAMMA S CAMERA SETTING These are items for performing fine image adjustments while monitoring the output waveform of the camera using the waveform monitor You will need support from video engineers to use These menu item settings are enabled when using the camera as a standalone device These menu items can be set from an external remote controller These menu items cannot be set when the thumbnail screen is displayed VF VF DISPLAY VF MARKER VF USER BOX VF INDICATOR MODE CHECK IND ILED These items are shown when selecting contents to show in
233. evant Display batch Mode check Display in hide Atalltimes menu items off display playback mode only VF INDICATOR gt _ 1 Shutter speed mode SHUTTER V VF INDICATOR 2 Camera mode CAMERA MODE VF INDICATOR gt PROXY DISP 3 Proxy information display or P4 V PROXY SETUP gt PROXY DISP VF INDICATOR gt PROXY DISP 4 SD id E status or ye 4 _ pay PROXY SETUP gt PROXY DISP 5 Camera warning notification VF DISPLAY DISP Vn m _ V _ display area MODE 6 USER button assignment VF DISPLAY DISP 1 V E information MODE VF INDICATOR 7 Focus bar display FOCUS BAR 8 Digital zoom ratio display VF Extender INDICATORJO EXTENDER VF INDICATOR _ 10 Color temperature COLOR TEMP P4 V 11 Filter position V INDICATOR gt FILTER lt WHITE BAL gt switch VF INDICATOR gt 12 position WHITE d id d Dynamic range stretcher 13 DRS function display VF INDICATOR DRS 14 Incremental gain display VF INDICATOR gt GAIN V 15 Gain display VF INDICATOR gt GAIN V 16 System information and VF INDICATOR gt _ _ 4 warning SYSTEM INFO 17 Time code display VF INDICATOR TC V Audio input line and level VF INDICATOR gt 19 meter display AUDIO LVL d 4 Ai 19 Iris override display VF INDICATOR gt IR
234. f the viewfinder For details refer to Focus assist function page 80 8 Digital zoom ratio display Displays the digital zoom factor DZx2 2 times DZx3 3 times DZx4 4 times 9 Extender EX Displayed when the lens extender is used 10 Color temperature Displays the color temperature assigned to lt A gt lt B gt and lt PRST gt of the lt WHITE BAL gt switch This is sometimes a memory value at execution of automatic white balance and sometimes a menu setting value Not displayed when auto tracking white balance is performed 11 Filter position 1 to 4 Displays the position of the ND FILTER dial A to D Displays the position of the CC FILTER dial flashing The filter position is not set to the specified position 12 WHITE BAL switch position A The WHITE BAL switch is set to lt A gt B The WHITE BAL switch is set to lt B gt P The WHITE BAL switch is set to lt PRST gt T The switch is set to ATW Note however that this flashes when brightness and color are outside the operation range 13 Dynamic range stretcher DRS function display DRS Displayed when the image level in high brightness areas is compressed and the dynamic range is stretched 14 Incremental gain display Displays the value when incremental gain is functioning e 71110 Ty 12Ty 151 y 201 241 y 28t y 341
235. f the white balance is automatically adjusted in the lt A gt position the color temperature at that time is recorded to the lt WHITE BAL gt switch lt A gt position lt 2300K 3200K gt 15000K AWB B TEMP Sets color temperature when the lt WHITE BAL gt switch is in the lt B gt position If the white balance is automatically adjusted in the lt B gt position the color temperature at that time is recorded to the lt WHITE BAL gt switch lt B gt position lt 2300K 3200K gt 15000K are factory settings USER SW GAIN Item Description of settings Remark S GAIN Selects the gain to enable to the SUPER GAIN switch lt USER gt button Set to be valid invalid per gain value All gain 30dB 36dB 42dB values are valid in the factory settings DS GAIN Selects the accumulated gain to enable to the lt DS GAIN gt switch lt USER gt Set to be valid invalid per gain value The gain button value of 20dB or lower is valid in the factory 6 10dB 12dB 15dB 20dB 24dB 28dB 34dB setting When DS GAIN function is operating the shutter mode is OFF are factory settings LENS IRIS Item Description of settings Remark A IRIS LEVEL Sets the auto iris target value 0 50 100 A IRIS PEAK AVE Sets the ratio included in the peak for auto iris standard Larger ratios correspond to a peak within the IRIS detection window and smaller ones correspond to average va
236. ff it is always set to ON OFF OFF the next time power is turned on When DEVICE is selected for USB MODE SELECT and USB MODE is set to ON in USB device mode the menu cannot be opened In this case you can exit the USB device mode return to OFF by pressing the EXIT mode For details refer to Connecting to a computer in the USB device mode page 185 The setting cannot be changed while the thumbnail screen is displayed are factory settings LCD MONITOR Item Description of settings Remark BACKLIGHT Adjusts the brightness of the LCD monitor backlight 3 Becomes the most dark 2 Darkens more than normal 1 0 Normal brightness 1 Brightens more than normal BRIGHTNESS Adjusts the brightness of the LCD monitor 15 0 15 COLOR LEVEL Adjusts the LCD monitor hue 15 0 15 CONTRAST Adjusts the contrast of the LCD monitor 30 0 30 SELF SHOOT Selects whether to invert the right and left sides of the LCD monitor NORMAL Does not invert the left and right sides MIRROR Inverts the left and right sides VF LCD CHAR Selects whether to display a character on the image of the LCD monitor and This item can be set in the main menu VF viewfinder VF DISPLAY as well ON Displays a character on both the viewfinder and LCD monitor VF OFF Does not superimpose on the viewfinder and displays on the LCD monitor LCD OFF Does not superimpose on the LCD monitor an
237. finder adjustment is canceled by pushing the AUTO W B BAL switch towards ABB again The adjustment values at this time return to the values before automatic adjustment was performed Black balance memory Values stored to memory are saved even if the camera is turned off 52 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting the electronic shutter Setting the electronic shutter Shutter mode The shutter modes available on the camera s electronic shutter and shutter speeds that can be selected are as follows Using a fixed shutter speed To remove flicker caused by lighting To shoot fast moving subjects clearly Using the synchro scan mode To shoot so that stripe patterns are eliminated in the horizontal direction when shooting on the monitor screen To shoot moving subjects with special effects Using the half shutter speed To shoot films with special effects LINE amp FREQ Shutter speed Half shutter speed Variable range of synchro scan mode 1080 59 94P 1 100 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 120 1 60 1 1 7200 1080 59 941 1 1000 1 2000 HALF 180 0deg 1 120 1 60 1 1 7200 172 8deg 144 0deg 120 0deg 480 59 94i 90 0deg 45 0deg 1 120 1 60 1 1 7200 3 0 deg 359 5 deg 1080 50P 1 60 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 100 1 50 1 1 6000 in 0 5 deg steps 1 1000 1 2000 HALF 180 0deg 1080 50 172 8deg 144 0deg 120 0deg
238. for recording target b GAIN switch Normally set this to lt L gt 0 dB If it is too dark set the gain to an appropriate value 35 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback Basic procedures c lt OUTPUT gt lt AUTO KNEE gt switch Set this switch to lt CAM gt lt ON gt d lt TCG gt switch Set this switch to lt F RUN gt or lt R RUN gt e lt AUDIO SELECT CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO SELECT CH2 4 gt switches Set these switches to lt AUTO gt NOTE The SLOT SEL function is assigned to the USER MAIN button in the factory setting You can switch to the P2 card to be recorded from two or more inserted P2 cards When the P2 to record to is switched the number of the card slot in which the P2 card to be recorded to is inserted is displayed on the P2 remaining card capacity indicator in the viewfinder For details on indications in the viewfinder refer to Configuration of status display on viewfinder screen page 70 The SLOT SEL is enabled also during recording The SLOT SEL indicator flashes in the viewfinder until switching of the P2 card to be recorded to is completed If the card could not be switched immediately after recording is started or immediately after the P2 card is switched SLOT SEL INVALID will be displayed Switch the recording media between P2 memory cards slots 1 2 and microP2 memory cards slots 3 4 from the main menu REC PB gt REC PB SETUP gt REC MEDIA REC
239. g moves to the left A The value of the digit to set flashing is incremented by one V The value of the digit to set flashing is decremented by one 4 Set the lt TCG gt switch to lt F RUN gt or lt R RUN gt 5 Set USER in the main menu gt REC PB gt TC UB gt UBG MODE For details refer to Setting menu basic operations page 134 63 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting the time data NOTE Thumbnail operations and menu operations on thumbnail operation section are not possible while the lt TCG gt switch is set to lt SET gt To confirm VITC UB press the HOLD switch to display VTCG on the display window Retention of user bits in memory User bit settings are automatically recorded and are retained even if the power is turned off Setting the time code 1 Set the lt DISPLAY gt switch to lt TC gt 2 Set the lt TCG gt switch to lt SET gt Set DF or NDF in the main menu REC PB gt TC UB gt DF MODE For details refer to Setting menu basic operations page 134 Set DF to advance the time code in the drop frame mode and set NDF to advance it in the non drop frame mode 4 Set the time code by the cursor buttons Screen display gt The digit to be set flashing lt The digit to be set flashing A The value of the digit to set V The value of the digit to set moves to the right moves to the
240. g dial button or lt SET gt button The confirmation screen is displayed 6 Select YES and press the jog dial button or lt SET gt button The CAC files are loaded to camera memory 7 To store two or more chromatic aberration compensation data to the camera repeat steps 2 to 6 8 To end menu operations press the lt MENU gt button The setting menu disappears and the camera status display is returned to 100 Chapter 5 Preparation Mounting and adjusting the lens NOTE Up to 32 files can be loaded to the camera To load a new file delete any file before loading the new file For details refer to Deleting the chromatic aberration compensation file from the camera page 101 Deleting the chromatic aberration compensation file from the camera 7 Set OFF in the main menu gt MAINTENANCE gt CAC ADJ gt CAC CONTROL NO PAINT EXIT o VF svsr CAMB LENS WHITE SH REC LENS FILE 4 1 2 VF SB FILE SYSTEM USER MENU SEL 2 At LIST DELETE use the jog dial button or lt SET gt button to select the lens model number to delete The confirmation screen is displayed 3 Select YES and press the jog dial button or lt SET gt button The file is deleted When the chromatic aberration compensation data is not functioning properly When the chromatic aberration compensation function is not functioning properly or when the chromatic aberration compensat
241. g gain increase with OFF set does not function With DS GAIN incremental analog gain increase with ON set is enabled and analog gain increase with OFF set does not function When S GAIN and DS GAIN are assigned to one of the USER MAIN lt USER1 gt or lt USER2 gt buttons gain can be increased by a combination with each of the USER buttons When increasing gain without an increase in noise Use the digital super gain function When increasing regular analog gain Use only the super gain function Noise is increased Note that the precision of auto iris white balance and black balance is affected since noise increases When using as a super high sensitivity mode Use a combination of the super gain and digital super gain functions Note however that residual images will stand out more with moving subjects the greater the value for increasing gain by digital super gain is set Pay sufficient care when using this combination of functions For moving subjects use DS GAIN at 12dB or below 57 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Selecting audio input and adjusting recording levels Selecting audio input and adjusting recording levels The camera supports independent 4 channel sound recording in all recording formats HD SD When the AUDIO SELECT CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO SELECT CH2 4 gt switch is set to AUTO the recording level of audio channels 1 2 3 4 according to the main menu
242. g timing will no longer match lt TC OUT gt terminal lt TC OUT gt terminal m To next camera Reference video signal Reference video signal Reference camera TC IN terminal i lt GENLOCK IN gt or lt SDI lt GENLOCK IN gt or lt SDI IN gt terminal IN gt terminal W When the camera and external device are locked to the external time code generator and the TC OUT output signal of the camera is used for simultaneous recording lt GENLOCK IN or SDI IN terminal REF IN terminal TC IN terminal lt TC OUT gt terminal TC IN terminal TC OUT terminal TC IN terminal Recording device External time code generator Device capable of recording without delay lt HDMI gt terminal lt SDI OUT1 gt terminal lt SDI OUT2 gt terminal VIDEO OUT gt terminal HDMI IN terminal SDI IN terminal VIDEO IN terminal TC OUTPUT REF setting VIDEO OUT 65 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting the time data W When the camera and external devices are locked to the external time code generator and two or more cameras are connected in a cascade configuration Reference video signal lt GENLOCK IN or lt SDI IN terminal lt GENLOCK IN gt or lt SDI IN terminal lt GENLOCK IN gt or SDI IN terminal
243. ge 94 Pull this battery release lever down to release the battery 12 Battery holder page 94 Mount the Anton Bauer battery 13 DC IN terminal page 95 This is the input terminal for the external power supply Connect to the external DC power supply 14 DC OUT gt DC power supply output terminal page 106 This is the DC12 V output terminal It provides a maximum current of 1 5 A NOTE Make sure that polarity is correct before connecting an external device Doing so may result in a malfunction 15 lt gt terminal page 188 page 187 Connect the remote control unit AJ RC10G optional to remote control some functions Connect the extension control unit AG EC4G optional to remote control some functions The remote control function is scheduled to be supported in future upgrades 45 Chapter 2 Description of Parts Power supply and accessory mounting section 16 Cable holders Used for clamping the light and microphone cables in place 17 Accessory mounting holes Attach accessories Do not use for purposes other than attaching accessories Mounting hole size 1 4 20 UNC screw length 10 mm or shorter 3 8 16 UNC screw length 10 mm or shorter 18 Light shoe Attach the video light Mounting hole size 1 4 20 UNC screw length 6 mm or shorter 19 Viewfinder front back position clamp lever To adjust the front back position of the viewfinder loosen this lever and slide the viewfinder to the lef
244. ge and restart the camera Select the codec of AVC Intra AVC LongG or DVCPRO HD in the HD mode and select the codec of DVCPROS0 DVCPRO and DV in the SD mode Select the number of audio bits 24BIT or 16BIT when REC FORMAT is AVC 1100 or AVC 150 At REC FORMAT other than these recording is performed at the number of audio bits fixed to 24 bits or 16 bits For details refer to System modes and recording functions page 47 LINE amp FREQ REC FORMAT SYSTEM MODE AUDIO SMPL RES Switch CAM recording of camera shooting with the camera and SDI input recording from the PEC SIGNALI lt SDI IN terminal ASPECT In the SD mode select the video aspect ratio for recording and output g NOTE When LINE amp FREQ REC SIGNAL or REC FORMAT is changed video or audio may be interrupted This is not a malfunction System modes recording functions The following shows the relationship between system modes and recording functions on this camera e are supported and are not supported System mode Recording function LINE amp FREQ REC FORMAT AUDIO SMPL RES Standard recording Pre recording Proxy recording Loop recording AVC 150 24BITJ 16BIT 4 4 AVC G50 24BIT 4 AVC G25 24BIT 4 DVCPRO HD 16BIT V 4 A 1080 50i AVC 1100 24BIT 16BIT A A
245. ghts when UB is selected by the DISPLAY switch and the VIUB reader value is displayed TIME Lights when UB is selected by the DISPLAY switch and the real time hours minutes seconds value is displayed 27 Chapter 2 Description of Parts Description on display window DATE No display time zone Lights when UB is selected by the DISPLAY switch and the real time year month day value is displayed VTCG TIME and DATE go out when UB is selected by the DISPLAY switch and the real time hours minutes value of the time zone is displayed Time counter display Indicates the time code user bits CTL and real time NOTE When UB is selected by the DISPLAY switch each press of the HOLD button repeats VTCG VTC gt DATE gt TIME gt no display time zone TCG TC 7 Mode display W Lights during operation in the SD mode 480 59 94i 576 50i and in the 16 9 mode HD Lights during operation in the HD mode DV Lights when the recording playback format is DV P REC Lights when set ON the main menu REC PB gt REC FUNCTION PRE REC P REC flashes when recording is continued after the tally lamp goes out 28 Recording and Playback This chapter describes the basic procedure for recording and playback It also describes special shooting methods such as pre recording and loop
246. gnal processing This setting superimposes the detail components exclusive to down converter output to that signal Even if this setting is OFF the detail components set during HD signal processing cannot be disabled H DTL LEVEL Sets horizontal detail correction level for the down converter output signal 0 8 31 V DTL LEVEL Sets vertical detail correction level for the down converter output signal 0 4 31 DTL CORING Sets the detail noise removal level 0 1 15 H DTL FREQ Selects the horizontal detail frequency 2 5MHz 3M Hz 3 5MHz 4MHz 4 5MHz 2D LPF Sets the filter ON Reduces cross colors OFF Does not reduce cross colors are factory settings 159 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list GENLOCK Item Description of settings Remark GENLOCK Switches the synchronization signal of the camera signal e When the main menu gt SYSTEM gt SYSTEM INT Synchronizes to the internal standard signal independent of MODE gt REC SIGNAL is set to SDI standard signals input to the GENLOCK IN terminal or SD camera synchronizes to the reference signal input IN terminal to the lt SDI IN terminal regardless of this setting GL IN Synchronizes to the standard signal input to the lt GENLOCK IN terminal SDI IN Synchronizes to the standard signal input to the SDI IN termina
247. gt peaking dial Adjusts the contour of the video in the viewfinder to make it easier to focus This does not affect the output signals from the camera lt CONTRAST gt contrast dial Adjusts the contrast of the screen in the viewfinder This does not affect the output signals from the camera lt gt brightness dial Adjusts the brightness of the screen in the viewfinder This does not affect the output signals from the camera Front tally lamp Operates when the lt TALLY gt switch is at the HIGH or LOW position and lights during shooting It also flashes in the same way as the REC lamp in the viewfinder and displays warnings The brightness when it is lit can be switched by the lt TALLY gt switch lt HIGH gt or LOW Back tally lamp Lights during shooting It also flashes in the same way as the REC lamp in the viewfinder and displays warnings The back tally lamp is hidden when the lever is pushed towards the OFF side Eyepiece Do not point the eyepiece directly at the sun Doing so might damage the devices inside 83 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Adjusting and setting the viewfinder 10 Visibility adjusting ring Adjust this ring to match the visibility of the cameraman so that the image on the viewfinder screen appears the sharpest The visibility adjustment range of the viewfinder is lt 0 9 D gt to lt 4 4 D gt For details on the eyepiece for presbyopia cons
248. hannel 1 2 or 3 4 Select output signals by the MONITOR SELECT selector switch 19 Chapter 2 Description of Parts Shooting and recording playback functions section Shooting and recording playback functions section Na W Shooting and recording Camera unit 1 SYNCHRO SCAN adjustment button In the synchro scan mode the speed of synchro scan be adjusted Pressing the lt gt button slows down the shutter speed Pressing the lt gt button speeds up the shutter speed For example when taking shots of a computer monitor adjust to a position where the noise for the horizontal bar in the viewfinder will be reduced CC FILTER gt lt ND FILTER filter switching dial page 36 Select the filter to suit the luminance or color temperature of the subject Position of CC FILTER Setting Description dial large diameter lt A gt lt 3200 K gt Sets the color temperature to 3200 K lt B gt lt 4300 K gt Sets the color temperature to 4300 K lt C gt lt 5600 K gt Sets the color temperature to 5600 K lt D gt lt 6300 K gt Sets the color temperature to 6300 K iti lt gt opes Setting Description lt 1 gt lt CLEAR gt Does not use the ND filter lt 2 gt lt 1 4ND gt Reduces the amount of light entering the MOS sensor to 1 4 lt 3 gt lt 1 16ND gt Reduces the amount of light entering the MOS sensor to 1 16
249. he GND terminal in error it may cause fire or malfunction 095 Chapter 5 Preparation Power supply DC IN GND NC NC 412V Panasonic Part No K1AA104H0038 Manufacturer Parts No HA16RX 4P SW1 76 Hirose Electric Co Aio m O On Ow Of NOTE When both the battery and the external DC power supply are connected the power supply from the external DC power supply has priority The battery may be removed while using the external DC power supply When using an external DC power supply always turn the power switch of the external DC power supply on before turning the POWER switch of the camera ON If the operations are performed in reverse the camera may malfunction because the external DC power supply output voltage rises too slowly When power is supplied from the DC IN terminal the light circuit does not function The light circuit can be used only when power is supplied from the Anton Bauer battery plate When connecting the battery to the DC IN terminal set the battery type in the main menu gt I F SETUP gt BATTERY P2CARD gt EXT DC IN SELECT However in that case display is not possible for batteries with a battery level indicator function 96 Chapter 5 Preparation Mounting and adjusting the lens Mounting and adjusting the lens Mounting the lens Lens lever Mark Mount cap Fig 1 Fig 2
250. he camera e If set GREEN or CHAR the viewfinder front RED The red tally lamp lights tally lamp back tally lamp and rear tally lamp do GREEN The green tally lamp lights not light while this camera is recording e green tally la i The characters REC displayed in the viewfinder ACCESS LED Selects whether to light the access LED of the P2 card ON Lights OFF Does not light SEEK POS SEL Selects the position to move when the lt FF REW gt button is pressed while playback is paused CLIP Top of the clip CLIP amp TEXT Top of the clip and text memo location MEMO 155 are factory settings Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list PROXY SETUP Item Description of settings Remark REC MEDIA Selects media for recording proxy data n the following case proxy data cannot be P2 Records proxy data to the P2 card P2 amp SD OFF Records proxy data to both the P2 card and SD memory card Does not record proxy data recorded even if REC MEDIA is set to P2 or P2 amp SD When the main menu REC PB REC FUNCTION RECORDING is set to other than NORMAL REC MODE HD Sets the recording mode of proxy data in the HD mode only STD 2CH MP4 LOW 2CH MOV HQ 2CH MOV HQ 4CH MOV SHQ 2CH MOV TC SUPER Sets whether to superimpose time code display on the proxy data record
251. he main unit 2 Forthe latest information on P2 cards and SD memory cards that are not described in the Operating Instructions visit the support desk at the following website http pro av panasonic net Expanded configuration devices The following devices are also available in addition to the basic configuration devices Part name Part No Remark Remote control cable AJ C10050G Connecting to the remote control unit Remote control unit AJ RC10G AJ RC10G page 187 3 Connecting to the extension control unit Extension control unit AG EC4G AG ECAG page 188 LCD monitor BT LH80W BT LH900 etc Storage device UniSlot wireless microphone receiver TN External DC power supply Using external DC power supply page 95 Part Part No Remark Soft carrying case AJ SC900 Hard carrying case AJ HT901G Rain cover SHAN RC700 Attaching the rain cover page 105 Tripod adaptor SHAN TM700 Mounting the camera on a tripod page 104 43 Chapter2 Description of Parts This chapter describes the names functions and operations of parts on the camera Details displayed on the display window are also described Chapter 2 Description of Parts Power supply and accessory mounting section Power supply and accessory mounting section 1 POWER switch page 3
252. he maximum warranty period may be adjusted depending on the number of hours the device has been used m 1 gt Free 5 years of Warranty Repairs Make sure to save the Registration Notice e mail Purchase Register online Registration Notice during the warranty period P2 product within 1 month e mail sent Details about user registration and the extended warranty http panasonic biz sav pass e Please note this is a site that is not maintained by Panasonic Canada Inc The Panasonic Canada Inc privacy policy does not apply and is not applicable in relation to any information submitted This link is provided to you for convenience 5 SDXC logo is a trademark of SD 3C LLC HDMI HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and or other countries MMC Multi Media Card is a registered trademark of Infineon Technologies AG Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Screenshots are used according to Microsoft Corporation guidelines Apple Macintosh Mac OS and QuickTime are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc in the United States and or other countries UniSlot logo is a registered trademark of Ikegami Tsushinki CO LTD All other names company names product names etc contained in thi
253. heck the accessories Chapter 1 Overview Before using the camera Before using the camera W Caution regarding laser beams The MOS sensor may be damaged if the MOS sensor is subjected to light from a laser beam Take sufficient care to prevent laser beams from striking the lens when shooting in an environment where laser devices are used W Note the following points When preparing to record important images always shoot some advance test footage to verify that both pictures and sound are being recorded normally Should video or audio recording fail due to a malfunction of the camera or the P2 cards used we will not assume liability for such failure W What to remember when throwing memory cards away or transferring them to others Formatting memory cards or deleting data using the functions of the camera or a computer will merely change the file management information it will not completely erase the data on the cards When throwing these cards away or transferring them to others either physically destroy them or use a data deletion program for computers commercially available to completely erase the data Users are responsible for managing the data stored in their memory cards W Software information about this product 1 This product includes software licensed under GNU General Public License GPL and GNU Lesser General Public License LGPL and customers are hereby notified that they have rights to obtain re engineer a
254. here are following restrictions All P2 cards constituting clips must be inserted into the slots Ashot mark is added only to the top clip among combined clips 209 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback Special recording functions Text recording function Text memos can be added to any video point while a clip is being recorded or played back Only clips with a text memo added can be selected and displayed as thumbnails Also thumbnails at text memo positions can be displayed in order and played back from text memo points and only required portions can be selected and copied page 113 Adding text memos 1 Make sure that TEXT MEMO is set to in the main menu CAMERA USER SW TEXT MEMO U4 e If itis set the text memo function is assigned to the TEXT MEMO button The text memo function can be assigned to the RET button To assign the function to the RET button set TEXT MEMO in the main menu gt CAMERA SW MODE RET SW 2 During recording or a playback press the button to which the text memo is assigned TEXT MEMO is displayed and the text memo is added to the video clip that was displayed when the button was pressed NOTE Up to 100 text memos can be recorded to a single clip Text memos cannot be added during loop recording If an operation is invalid TEXT MEMO INVALID is displayed when the button is pressed 40 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback Proxy rec
255. here flash strobe light such as that from still cameras is present Change over time Shot image FBC OFF Flash band Setting the flash band compensation function Assign the flash band compensation function to the USER buttons USER MAIN gt lt USER1 gt lt USER2 gt By pressing the USER buttons USER MAIN gt lt USER1 gt lt USER2 gt that are assigned with the flash band compensation function the function turns on and flash strobe from a still camera etc can be detected and compensated For details refer to Assigning functions to USER buttons page 56 USER MAIN gt lt USER1 gt lt USER2 gt buttons When the flash band compensation function is enabled FBC is displayed on the status screen El 599 mn 14 6vV 2 1 9 9 min NOTE When the flash strobe lights the following phenomena may occur These are due to the flash band compensation function and are not malfunctions Moving subjects look as if they have stopped suddenly The resolution when the flash strobe light drops Horizontal lines appear in the video when the flash strobe lights Using the flash band compensation function The flash band compensation function is activated when there are large changes in brightness at the bottom of the screen regardless of whether there is flash strobe light The flash band compensation function may be activated depending on the shooting environment such as where a bright windo
256. hing processing of the recording slot on the P2 card is being executed SLOT SELECT Displayed when the USER button assigned with SLOT SEL is pressed and switching processing of the recording slot on the INVALID P2 card is not possible For details on warnings refer to Warning information display page 196 17 Time code display TCG 12 59 59 20 Displays the time code generator value TCR 12 59 59 20 Displays the timecode reader value VUBG AB CD EF 00 UBG CD EF 00 VUBR 12 34 56 78 UBR 12 34 56 78 Displays the user s bit generator value Indicates the user s bit reader value CTL 1 59 59 20 Displays the CTL counter value 18 Audio input line and level meter display B Displays the selected channel and its audio level F Displayed when the AUDIO IN switch is lt FRONT gt IW Displayed when the AUDIO IN switch is lt W L gt R Displayed when the lt AUDIO IN gt switch is lt REAR gt 19 Iris override display Displays the compensation level when the iris overwrite is functioning Aperture opens by about 1 Aperture opens by about 0 5 Aperture closes by about 1 Aperture closes by about 0 5 No display Reference state 20 Super iris display Displayed when super iris is active 21 Iris F value NC Displayed when the lens cable is not connected OPEN Di
257. i or 576 50i is selected in the main menu gt SYSTEM gt SYSTEM MODE gt LINE amp FREQ and camera image and playback image switched the image in the viewfinder is sometimes temporarily disrupted This is not a malfunction If 480 59 941 or 576 501 is set the main menu gt SYSTEM gt SYSTEM MODE gt LINE amp FREQ and INT is set in the main menu I F SETUP gt GENLOCK GENLOCK the image is sometimes disrupted in the vertical direction when the return video image of the SDI input signal is checked in the viewfinder This phenomenon is not a malfunction Disruption can be eliminated by setting GENLOCK to SDI IN Names of parts in viewfinder For details on method of use refer to the Operating Instructions for the respective viewfinder For AJ HVF21KG 13 14117 9 Viewfinder Black and white video can be viewed during recording and playback The operation status of the camera setting related warning displays messages zebra patterns markers safety zone marker center marker and other information can also be viewed lt ZEBRA gt zebra pattern switch Displays the zebra pattern in the viewfinder ON Displays zebra patterns OFF Does not display zebra patterns lt TALLY gt switch Controls the front tally lamp HIGH Makes the front tally lamp brighter OFF Turns out the front tally lamp lt LOW gt Makes the front tally lamp darker lt
258. ices Input images from other cameras to record to this camera BNC cable SDI Other cameras For the BNC cable optional connected to the lt SDI IN gt terminal prepare a double shielded cable equivalent to 5C FB 184 Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices Connection function via lt USB2 0 gt or lt USB3 0 gt terminals Connection function via lt USB2 0 gt or lt USB3 0 gt terminals Connecting to a computer in the USB device mode By connecting the camera to a computer via USB 2 0 the P2 card inserted in the camera can be used as mass storage Connecting to a computer EL 9 a Q i fepe ANANAS t lt USB3 0 gt terminal host 56 USB DEVICE CONNECTED Push EXIT to Return to CAMERA MODE lt USB2 0 gt terminal device Fig 1 Fig 2 EXIT STORAGE EXIT EXIT OUT USB MODE SELECT v OFF 501 MONI OUT MARKER OUT SDI USB MODE MONI OUT MARKER GENLOCK MIC AUDIO GENLOCK MIC AUDIO LCD MONITOR BATTERY P2CARD v LCD MONITOR BATTERY P2CARD v Fig 3 Fig 4 1 Connect the USB cable to the lt USB2 0 gt terminal device Fig 1 2 Set DEVICE in the main menu gt SETUP gt USB LAN USB MODE SELECT Fig 3 For details refer to Setting menu basic operations page 134
259. iles can be stored in internal memory qe The contents of the eight lens files can be written to and read from SD memory cards as a card file with a single title Card file Title 1 Title 2 Title 3 Title 4 Eight lens filesx8 64 lens files can be written Title 8 OOO 9 FILE TITLE DATE TIME EXIT EXIT EXIT 1 lens_f1 LENS1_SD JUL 09 2013 10 08 42 SETUP DATA S LOAD SETUP DATA sE CAC FILE SD CARD LENS FILE CAMI 3 RECA 4 VE s 5 6 SCENE SD CARD PROPERTY FORMAT SD CARD LOAD USER DATA 8 sys USER LOAD USER DATA v v Fig 1 Fig 2 1 Select SAVE in the main menu FILE LENS FILE SD CARD and press the jog dial button or SET button Fig 1 The list of lens files currently saved in camera memory is displayed 2 Select the file to write from the file list Fig 2 The title entry screen and keyboard are displayed 3 Enter the desired characters with the keyboard 4 Use the jog dial button or cursor buttons lt gt to select OK and press the jog dial button or SET button The confirmation screen is displayed 5 Select YES and press the jog dial button or SET button The file is saved and the file list is updated For details on error messages if an error message is displayed refer to Warning error displays in the thumbnail operation menu operation and USB storage mode
260. in USER is recorded TIME Selects the local time hh mm ss DATE Selects the local date and time YY MM DD hh TCG The time code generator value is entered to the user bits FRAME RATE Selects camera imaging information such as frame rate REGEN Reads the value recorded to the card and continuously records that value Sets drop frame mode non drop frame mode of the CTL and TCG DF Uses the drop frame mode NDF Uses the non drop frame mode TCG SET HOLD If the internal time code generator is set with the lt TCG gt switch before turning power off switch ON OFF for the function that recording starts from the preset value when turning on the power to start recording ON OFF FIRST REC TC TC OUT Selects whether to regenerate the time code to the value on the P2 card at the first recording after power is turned on a P2 card is inserted or the P2 card targeted for recording is switched PRESET Uses the internal time code of the camera REGEN Regeneration is performed for the time code of the clip with the newest date and time of the clips recorded to the P2 card targeted for recording Selects the time code output to the lt TC OUT gt terminal TCG Outputs the time code generator value at all times TCG TCR Outputs the time code generator value during recording and the time code reader value during playback Make sure the da
261. in menu FILE SETUP DATA SELECT 1 Select SAVE AS in the main menu FILE SETUP DATA SD CARD and press the jog dial button or SET button The file name entry screen and keyboard are displayed 2 Enter the desired characters with the keyboard 3 Use the jog dial button or cursor buttons lt gt to select OK and press the jog dial button or SET button The confirmation screen is displayed 4 Select YES and press the jog dial button or SET button After the file name is set the title entry screen and keyboard are displayed 5 Enter the desired characters with the keyboard 6 Use the jog dial button or cursor buttons lt gt to select OK and press the jog dial button or SET button The confirmation screen is displayed 7 Select YES and press the jog dial button or SET button Saving of the title name begins 8 When the completion message is displayed press the jog dial button or SET button For details on error messages if an error message is displayed refer to Warning error displays in the thumbnail operation menu operation and USB storage mode page 197 NOTE Setup files saved on the camera cannot be used on other models Setup files saved on other models cannot be used on the camera 87 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling setting data Reading setup data written to SD memory card Sel
262. ing a pause press the lt lt 4 lt REW gt button to pause the playback at the beginning of the clip Press the amp REW button again to pause the playback at the beginning of the previous clip During a pause press the lt gt button to pause the playback at the beginning of the next clip Pressing the STOP button during clip playback stops the playback and returns the display to the thumbnail screen NOTE When playing clips it is not necessary to select the clips blue frames around the thumbnails Clips with clip numbers displayed in red cannot be played back These are the clips in different video formats such as 1080i 480i When playback is stopped the cursor moves to the position of the clip that was being played back regardless of where the playback started Press the lt PLAY PAUSE gt button again to start playback from the beginning of the clip under the cursor To continue to play back from where previously stopped select RESUME in the main menu CLIP THUMBNAIL SETUP PB POSITION Playing different compressed recording formats may cause audio and video distortions in between clips Continuously playing clips of the same format but of different audio bit rates mutes the audio in between clips You can play back clips from the text memo position by switching the thumbnail screen to the text memo display page 114 When playing back clips from a thumbnail you can set
263. ing white balance B rupe H M B Mounting Setting BATTERY P2CARD BATTERY SETTING Black balance BLACK SHADING Built iri batlery ceca ente bieten CAC ADJ CAC FILE SD CARD CAMERA Camera ID CAMERA ID Chromatic aberration compensation function Copying ae 115 Deleting Metadata Playback Properties Reconnecting Restoring COLOR CORRECTION Connector signal CTL counter 159 DOWNCON SETTING Dynamic range stretcher function s 56 E Electronic shutter 53 Error code Error displays External DC power supply Exteralipower Supply trie amita ceret cette ege een 95 F Fast forward playback Fast reverse playback FILE Flange back adjustment Flash band compensation Focus assist FORMAT SD CARD Formatting SD memory card Storage device Lente rtr ee AERA 102 G GAMMA etc 141 Hot swap recording HOURS METER 1 VE SETUP e 157 INITIALIZE ett tette return 166 K KNEEILEVEL te tui 141 L LCD MONITOR ILED Lens Adjusting Mounting LENS ADJ Lens file LENS FILE LENS FILE ADJ LENS FILE SD
264. ings When saving or reading setup files from an SD memory card you can save items with an S and items without an S separately Items with an S in front of the item name are the targets for PAINT S SELECT in the main menu FILE SETUP DATA SELECT Items without an S are targets for PAINT LEVEL HIGH SETTING Item Description of settings Remark S MASTER GAIN Selects the master gain 6dB 3dB OdB 6 9dB 12dB 15dB 18dB 21dB 24dB 27dB 30dB H DTL LEVEL Sets the horizontal detail correction level 0 6 63 V DTL LEVEL Sets the vertical detail correction level 0 10 31 DTL CORING Sets the detail noise removal level 0 12 60 H DTL FREQ Selects the horizontal detail frequency 0 18 31 LEVEL DEPEND Sets the LEVEL DEPEND Compresses the details of dark areas when Y detail is emphasized Details of bright areas are also compressed if the value is large 0 1 5 MASTER GAMMA BLACK GAMMA Sets the master gamma in 0 01 steps 0 30 0 55 0 75 Sets the gamma curves of dark areas 8 1 Compresses the dark areas Standard state OFF 1 8 Expands the dark areas B GAMMA RANGE Sets the maximum level of compression expansion 1 About 20 2 About 30 3 About 40
265. ion data could not be loaded normally the viewfinder displays an error message Error message Meaning Remedy CAC FILE DATA NOT FOUND There is no chromatic aberration compensation data matching the connected lens when the chromatic aberration compensation function is ON This is displayed when the camera is turned on Load chromatic aberration compensation data matching the connected lens to the camera CAC LENS DATA INVALID The response data from the lens is not supported or the response contains information other than that defined in the chromatic aberration compensation data The lens is not a lens compatible with the chromatic aberration compensation function The chromatic aberration compensation will not function but will not cause any problems in use LENS INIT NOT COMPLETED Position detection focus zoom of the lens is encoder type and initialization is not completed Turn the focus zoom ring to pass through the center of the operating range NOTE When mounting lens optical system accessories converter lens attachments the chromatic aberration compensation function sometimes does not function properly since the optical characteristics of the lens change In this case set the chromatic aberration compensation function to OFF When a focus servo is used on CANON lenses enable recording after initialization is completed in the automatic initialization mode Data is so
266. ip After selecting a clip move the cursor to another clip and press the lt SHIFT gt button SET button to select all clips from the previously selected clip to the cursor position As clips are selected the number of selected clips displayed on the lower right corner of the screen changes according to the selection Deselecting clips 1 Move the cursor to the selected clip and press the SET button This deselects the clip NOTE While holding down the lt SHIFT gt button press the EXIT button to deselect all the clips at once 110 Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips Thumbnail operations Thumbnail screen display settings You can customize the thumbnail screen according to usage Setting example for thumbnail screen INDICATOR EXIT ALL HIDE 00 05 29 20 0121 1 Select THUMBNAIL SETUP in the main menu CLIP The thumbnail setting items INDICATOR DATA DISPLAY THUMBNAIL SIZE PB POSITION PROPERTY DISP are displayed For details refer to THUMBNAIL SETUP page 153 Setting thumbnails to be displayed 1 Select REPOSITION in the main menu CLIP 2 Move the cursor to the type of the clip you want to display using the cursor buttons 3 Press the SET button Thumbnail size settings You can customize the thumbnail size 1 Select THUMBNAIL SIZE in the main menu CLIP THUMBNAIL SETUP 2 Move the cursor to the type of the clip you
267. is independent color correction on off ON OFF e 6dB in S MASTER GAIN cannot be selected when NORMAL is set in main menu PAINT S CAMERA SETTING SHOOTING MODE coloration phenomenon may occur in videos of high brightness areas if shooting was done with the master gain set to 6dB or 3dB After switching the lt OUTPUT gt lt AUTO KNEE gt selection switch to lt CAM gt lt OFF gt and setting ON in the main menu PAINT gt KNEE LEVEL gt S MANUAL KNEE you can reduce the coloration phenomenon by changing the following menu items Reduce the KNEE MASTER SLOPE value of KNEE LEVEL when HD SD FILMLIKE1 FILMLIKE2 or FILMLIKE3 is selected in the main menu PAINT gt GAMMA GAMMA MODE SEL Reduce the F REC DYNAMIC LVL value of GAMMA when FILM REC is selected in main menu gt PAINT gt GAMMA GAMMA MODE SEL Reduce the V REC KNEE SLOPE value of GAMMA when VIDEO REC is selected in the main menu gt PAINT gt GAMMA GAMMA MODE SEL are factory settings When saving or reading setup files from an SD memory card you can save items with an S and items without an S separately Items with an S in front of the item name are the targets for PAINT S SELECT in the main menu FILE SETUP DATA SELECT Items without an S are targets for PAINT LEVEL 138 Chapter 7 Menu Operations
268. is replaced when CH3 4 is selected CH3 CH1 CH3 CH1 in VR SELECT Setting values are inherited ON Automatic adjustment is enabled between replaced channels OFF Automatic adjustment is disabled Can be adjusted using LVL CONTROL CH3 CH1 at this time AUTO LVL Selects whether to automatically adjust the level adjustment method for audio The channel is replaced when CH3 4 is selected CH4 CH2 CH4 CH2 in VR SELECT Setting values are inherited ON Automatic adjustment is enabled between replaced channels OFF Automatic adjustment is disabled Can be adjusted using LVL CONTROL 2 at this time LVL CONTROL Can be manually adjusted with this item when automatic level adjustment of audio The channel is replaced when CH3 4 is selected CH3 CH1 CH3 CH1 is OFF in VR SELECT Setting values are inherited 0 70 100 between replaced channels 160 are factory settings Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list Item LVL CONTROL CH4 CH2 Description of settings Can be manually adjusted with this item when automatic level adjustment of audio CH2 is OFF 0 70 100 Remark The channel is replaced when CH3 4 is selected in VR SELECT Setting values are inherited between replaced channels MIC LOWCUT CH1 Selects the microphone lowcut filter for input channel 1
269. isplay page 77 CANNOT PLAY Displayed when playback is not possible for example when there are no clips on the P2 card or the P2 card is not inserted TEXT MEMO Displayed when a text memo is recorded TEXT MEMO INVALID Displayed when a text memo could not be recorded MARK ON OFF Displayed when shot marks are added or deleted For details on shot marks refer to Shot mark recording function page 39 SHOT MARK INVALID Displayed when shot marks cannot be added UPDATING Displayed when playback operation is not accepted during updating of the clip information for playback USB DEVICE Displayed when the USB device mode is set Flashes during migration through modes and after migration through modes is completed CONNECTED is displayed when communication is possible and DISCONNECTED is displayed when communication is not possible USB STORAGE Displayed when the USB storage mode is set Flashes during migration through modes and from then on CONNECTED is displayed when the external hard disk is recognized successfully and DISCONNECTED is displayed when it cannot be recognized THUMBNAIL OPEN Displayed during thumbnail operation TC REGEN Displayed when the RET button on the lens is pressed to regenerate to the time code of the last recorded clip to the P2 card SLOT SELECT Flashes when the USER button assigned with SLOT SEL is pressed and while switc
270. isplaying shooting status page 76 LED screen Displays items that are causes of LED lighting is attached to items currently selected at LED e lil is attached to items currently targeted for LED lighting GAIN 0dB Displays the gain status DS GAIN Displays the digital super gain value SHUTTER Displays the shutter status WHITE PRE Displays the white balance status EXTENDER Displays the extender status by EX OFF B GAMMA Displays the black gamma status by ON OFF MATRIX Displays the MATRIX status by A B OFF COLOR COR Displays the COLOR CORRECTION status by ON OFF FILTER Displays the filter status ATW Displays the status of automatic tracking white balance FUNCTION screen Displays the video output status and information of the recording media SDI OUT1 Displays the status of the signal output from the SDI OUT1 gt terminal Displays the status of MEMI CAM or OFF set by SDI OUT1 and SDI OUT1 MODE in OUTPUT the main menu gt I F SETUP gt OUTPUT SEL TYPE Displays the format of the signal output from the lt SDI OUT1 gt terminal by HD SDI SD SDI CHAR Displays the superimposition status of characters selected in the main menu gt I F SETUP gt OUTPUT SEL gt SDI OUT1 CHAR by ONJ OFF F Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder st
271. itchable menu Proxy Video compression format MPEGA Simple Profile H 264 AVC Baseline Profile H 264 AVC High Profile Audio compression format AAC LC Linear PCM Approximate recording time 1 STD 2CH MP4 Approx 78 min SHQ 2CH MOV Approx 25 min HQ 2CH MOV Approx 78 min HQ 4CH MOV Approx 72 min LOW 2CH MOV Approx 135 min These are reference values for continuous recording using the Panasonic products The recording time may differ depending on the scene or the number of clips 202 Chapter 10 Specification Dimensions and specifications Video input output lt SDI IN gt terminal BNCx1 HD 3G 1 5G SD 0 8 V 75 Q Switch the menu to use as VIDEO IN terminal return video input terminal lt GENLOCK IN terminal SDI OUT1 gt terminal BNCx1 HD 3G 1 5G SD 0 8 V 75 Q SDI OUT2 gt terminal 1 HD 3G 1 5G SD 0 8 V p p 75 Q lt VIDEO OUT gt terminal 1 1 0 V 75 Q lt HDMI OUT gt terminal HDMIx1 HDMI type A terminal not compatible with VIERA Link Audio input output lt AUDIO IN gt terminal XLRx2 3 pin lt CH1 gt lt CH2 gt lt LINE gt lt MIC gt lt MIC 48V gt switchable type lt LINE gt 4 dBu 3 0 4 dBu selectable menu lt MIC gt 60 dBu 60 50 dBu selectable menu lt MIC 48V gt Phantom 48 V supported
272. ithout an S separately Items with an S in front of the item name are the targets for PAINT S SELECT in the main menu FILE SETUP DATA SELECT Items without an S are targets for PAINT LEVEL LOW SETTING Item Description of settings Remark S MASTER GAIN Selects the master gain 6dB 3dB 0dB 12dB 15dB 18dB 21dB 24dB 27dB 30dB H DTL LEVEL Sets the horizontal detail correction level 0 12 63 V DTL LEVEL Sets the vertical detail correction level 0 15 31 DTL CORING Sets the detail noise removal level 0 1 60 H DTL FREQ Selects the horizontal detail frequency 0 18 31 LEVEL DEPEND Sets LEVEL DEPEND Compresses the details of dark areas when Y detail is emphasized Details of bright areas are also compressed if the value is large 0 1 5 MASTER GAMMA Sets the master gamma in 0 01 steps 0 30 0 45 0 75 BLACK GAMMA Sets the gamma curves of dark areas 8 1 Compresses the dark areas OFF Standard state 1 8 Expands the dark areas B GAMMA RANGE Sets the maximum level of compression expansion 1 About 20 2 About 30 3 About 40 S MATRIX TABLE Selects the color collection table for the linear matrix A OFF 5 COLOR CORRECT Switches the 15 ax
273. jog dial button or lt SET gt button The confirmation screen is displayed If SYSTEM RESTART is displayed on the confirmation screen the camera will restart after reading out is complete 2 Select YES and press the jog dial button or SET button Reading out of data for the factory setting begins NOTE Data scene files and lens files and data saved as user data is not deleted by performing this operation Eight lens files are stored to internal memory on the camera Eight titles total 64 of lens files can be written to SD memory cards with eight lens files saved as a single title The following data is recorded to lens files Title name White shading compensation values Flare compensation values RB gain offset compensation values How to create lens files Adjusting the white shading For details on adjusting white shading refer to White shading compensation page 98 Adjusting flare Adjust flare by LENS R FLARE LENS G FLARE and LENS B FLARE in the main menu MAINTENANCE LENS FILE ADJ Adjusting RB gain offset Compensate for changes in white balance that occur when the lens is replaced 1 Mount the lens to be used as a reference on the camera 2 Shoot a grayscale chart under appropriate lighting 2000 Ix or 3200 K preferred 3 Set the WHITE BAL switch to lt A gt 89 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling setting data 4 Adjust the lens
274. k LOAD Selects and loads a scene file saved in the camera memory 165 are factory settings Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list Item Remark Description of settings SAVE Specifies a title and file number for the current setting values and saves them as a scene file in the camera memory CLEAR Selects and initializes a scene file saved in the camera memory The title is removed and saved data is returned to factory settings are factory settings SD CARD PROPERTY Displays the SD memory card status The format condition available space etc can be confirmed Item Description of settings Remark SD STANDARD Indicates whether an SD memory card is formatted according to the SD SDHC SDXC standard SUPPORTED Complies with SD SDHC SDXC standards NOT SUPPORTED Does not comply with SD SDHC SDXC standards USED Displays used capacity bytes BLANK Displays available space bytes TOTAL Displays total capacity bytes PROXY REM Displays remaining recording capacity of SD card when recording proxy NUMBER OF CLIPS Copy and proxy records display the clip quantity inside an SD memory card PROTECT Write prohibited are factory settings FORMAT SD CARD Formats an SD memory card LOAD USER DATA Loads a user file saved in the camera memory INITIALIZE Item Description of settings Remark LOAD FACTORY DATA All menu
275. l GL PHASE Selects the output signal of phase to be locked to the signal input to the lt GENLOCK IN terminal at 1080 59 94i 1080 50i only HD SDI Locks the HD SDI output signal to generator lock input The video start position of the down converter output signal lags by approx 90 lines COMPOSITE Locks the down converter output signal to generator lock input The video start position of the HD SDI output signal advances by approx 90 lines PHASE COARSE Roughly adjusts to match horizontal synchronization phase when building System 100 0 100 H PHASE FINE Minutely adjusts t System o match horizontal synchronization phase when building a 100 0 100 MIC AUDIO are factory settings Item Description of settings Remark VR SELECT Selects which channel to assign to the AUDIO LEVEL CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO LEVEL When CH3 4 is selected VR SELECT 2 4 gt and F AUDIO LEVEL dials channels are also replaced for the following six items CH 1 2 Assigns level adjustment of channels 1 2 Channels 3 4 can be FRONT VR CH1 FRONT VR CH3 automatically adjusted or adjusted by LVL CONTROL CH3 or VR Cle K On VR e LVE CONTROL CH AUTO LVL CH3 gt AUTO LVL CH1 CH3 4 Assigns level adjustment of channels 3 4 Channels 1 2 canbe AUTO LVL CH4 gt AUTO LVL CH2
276. l and variable speed playback W Normal speed playback Color playback images can be viewed on the viewfinder screen by pressing the lt PLAY PAUSE gt button Likewise color playback images can be viewed on a color video monitor connected to the lt SDI OUT1 gt terminal and monitor output terminal SDI OUT2 gt lt HDMI gt and VIDEO OUT Playback can also be paused by pressing the lt PLAY PAUSE gt button during playback E Fast forward and fast reverse playback The lt FF gt and lt lt lt REW gt buttons provide 32x and 4x fast forward and fast reverse playback Pressing these buttons during a stop and playback fast forwards and fast reverses at 32x and 4x speed respectively W Cueing clips If the lt FF gt button is pressed with playback paused the clip being played back is paused at the start point of the next clip cued up state If the lt 4 gt button is pressed with playback paused the clip being played back is paused at the start point of the clip currently being played back cued up state NOTE When playing back or switching to the thumbnail screen immediately after removing or inserting the P2 card or the power is turned on it may take time to read the clip information During this time UPDATING is displayed on the thumbnail screen If a P2 card is inserted while another card is being played back the clips on the inserted card cannot be played back A P2 card inserted during
277. layed when the lt OUTPUT gt lt AUTO KNEE selector switch where ON or OFF is assigned in the main menu gt CAMERA SW MODE gt AUTO KNEE SW is set to lt ON gt lt OFF gt DRS ON OFF Displayed when the lt OUTPUT gt lt AUTO KNEE selector switch where DRS is assigned in the main menu CAMERA gt SW MODE AUTO KNEE SW is set to lt ON gt lt OFF gt GAIN dB 7 Displayed when gain is switched by the GAIN switch or USER button When digital super gain is active that value is displayed at the same time 66 1 or When the shutter speed is switched that value is displayed deg SS 1 Displayed when syncro scan is selected for the shutter speed gt kK Kd Displayed when the CC FILTER dial position is switched ND Displayed when the ND FILTER dial position is switched EXTENDER ON OFF Displays the status of the lens extender IRIS Displayed when the iris override compensation value is altered Drop in brightness warning display LOW LIGHT Displayed when brightness has dropped Flash band compensation warning display FBC OFF SHUTTER amp FBC Displayed when a flash band is detected while flash band compensation is off Displayed when the SHUTTER switch is ON and flash band compensation is set to on 6 USER button assignm ent info
278. le that clip cannot be copied to a recording in the microP2 memory card that exceeds 32 GB in AVC LongG P2 memory card or 32 GB microP2 memory card format or copied or exported to storage ONE FILE Records in 1 file SPLIT Divides in 4 GB units START TEXT MEMO Selects the function that automatically adds a text memo at recording start Text memos added when this item is ON indicate position each time recording is started ON A text memo is added to each recording OFF Does not add a text memo the recording start position To record text memos as character information refer to Setting clip metadata page 116 P ON REC SLOT SEL Selects the slot order targeted for recording when power is turned on HOLD Records from the recording slot used the last time power was turned off SLOT 1 3 Each time the power is turned on this changes in order from slot 1 or 3 slot selected in REC to the recording target card REC START Selects acceptance of the start of recording e If the main menu REC PB REC ALL Accepts start of recording during stop during recording pause FUNCTION RECORDING is set to other than and during playback NORMAL operation will be NORMAL even when this item is set to ALL NORMAL Accepts start of recording during stop and during recording pause REC TALLY Selects the method to display recording status at t
279. led Press to add a shot mark and press again to remove it S BLK LVL Sets the super black level 30 20 10 OFF AUTO KNEE SW Enables disables auto knee function and DRS function DRS When the lt AUTO KNEE gt switch is in the lt ON gt position DRS function is enabled ON When the lt AUTO KNEE gt switch is in the lt ON gt position auto knee function is enabled OFF Even if the lt AUTO KNEE switch is in the ON position both auto knee function and DRS function are not enabled SHD ABB SW CTL Sets whether to automatically adjust black shading when the lt AUTO W B BAL Switch is pressed ON OFF and held down on the ABB side for two seconds or more are factory settings 149 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list Item Description of settings Remark COLOR BARS Selects the color bar to use SMPTE Uses SMPTE standard color bars FULL BARS Uses full color bars SPLIT Uses SPLIT color bars for SNG Satellite News Gathering ARIB Uses ARIB standard color bars WFM Selects the type of waveform to be displayed on the viewfinder screen or LCD monitor when the lt USER gt buttons lt USER MAIN gt lt USER1 gt lt USER2 gt to which the waveform monitor function is assigned is pressed AVE Displays as a waveform VECTOR Displays as a vector WAVE
280. light source for the subject and zoom in on the white pattern so that the white color appears in the screen 4 Adjust the lens aperture 5 Set the lt AUTO W B BAL switch towards the lt AWB gt side and then release it The switch returns to the central position with the white balance automatically adjusted W White pattern A white object cloth or wall near the subject may also be used for the white pattern Required size of white pattern is as follows 1 4 or more of the screen width 1 4 or more of the screen height Do not allow bright spotlights within the screen The white pattern must appear at the center of the screen 49 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Adjusting the white and black balance W Message displayed in the viewfinder screen During adjustment AWB A ACTIVE The adjusted value is automatically stored in the j AWB A OK 3 2K Adjustment completed specified memory A or B e f the arrow points down 4 the actual temperature is lower than the indicated temperature and if the arrow points up 7 the actual temperature is higher than the indicated temperature If the color temperature of the subject is Ol B lower than 2300 K or higher than 15000 K Detection range of white balance The white balance detection range can be selected from 90 50 and 25 in the main menu CAMERA W
281. ll P2 software to your computer from the CD ROM provided with the camera 185 Chapter 8 Connecting to External Devices Connection function via lt USB2 0 gt or lt USB3 0 gt terminals Download the USB driver from the website and install it into your computer For installation procedure of the driver refer to the installation manual on the website For the latest information on the driver visit the following website http pro av panasonic net The camera supports only USB 2 0 Ensure your computer supports USB 2 0 When connecting the camera to a computer via USB ensure that no other device is connected to the computer via USB When connecting the camera via USB do not eject the P2 card When USB is connected the P2 card access LED turns off when not accessed When the camera is operating in the USB device mode no camera shooting recording playback operation or clip thumbnail operation is allowed When the camera is operating in the USB device mode the P2 card remaining capacity and status are not displayed Video and audio are not output to the viewfinder LCD monitor and lt SDI OUT1 gt terminal or monitor output terminals SDI OUT2 gt HDMI OUT gt and VIDEO OUT USB storage mode A hard disk drive or solid state drive connectable to the lt USB3 0 gt terminal host via USB 2 0 or USB 3 0 can be connected to store card data view thumbnails of saved clips or write back to a P2 card
282. llowing UBG Following VITC UBG 1080 59 94i Respective format MODE MODE LTC UB is output LTC UB is output VITC UB is output Following UBG Following VITC UBG 1080 50i Respective format MODE MODE LTC UB is output LTC UB is output VITC UB is output Following UBG Following VITC UBG 3 1080 59 94P Respective format MODEJ MODE LTC UB is output LTC UB is output VITC UB is output Following UBG Following VITC UBG 1080 50 Respective format MODE MODE LTC UB is output LTC UB is output VITC UB is output 62 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting the time data System setting state Recording UB Output UB LINE amp FREQ REC FORMAT LTC UB VITC UB ate LTC UB for HD SDI VITC UB for HD SDI 480 59 941 Respective format EE UBG LTC UB is output None None 576 501 Respective format ag UBG LTC UB is output None None With EXT UB of the lt TC IN gt terminal is slaved Set LTC UB in the main menu REC PB TC UB gt UBG MODE and set VITC UB in the main menu REC PB TC UB gt VITC UBG User bits settings MODE Item name Description USER only UBG MODE Records internal user values User values can be entered on the display window Setting values are held even when the power is turned off For details refer to How to input user
283. lot slot number 3 4 However if the P2 card in slot number 1 3 is removed and then re inserted the P2 cards will be used in the order of slot number 2 gt 1 4 gt 3 The P2 card number to be recorded to is held even if the camera is turned off When the camera is next turned on recording can be continued to the same P2 as before the camera was turned off NOTE If a low battery charge level is indicated even after replacing with a fully charged battery make sure that the battery has been inserted correctly page 163 When set SLOT 1 3 the main menu REC PB REC PB SETUP SLOT SEL the P2 card with the smaller slot number will be recorded to first each time that camera is turned on Select which of P2 or microP2 memory card slot is to be used as the recording card slot beforehand If the card is inserted into the slot which is not selected as the recording slot recording is disabled Select the recording slot by the following method Set the main menu REC PB REC PB SETUP REC MEDIA Press the USER buttons to which REC MEDIA is assigned to switch the selected slot Re insert the card into the selected card slot For details refer to Inserting a P2 card page 31 Shooting and recording switch settings After turning on the power and inserting the P2 card set the switches as follows before starting operations a USER MAIN button Set to the card slot
284. ls on the products packaging and or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste For proper treatment recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002 96 EC and 2006 66 EC By disposing of these products and batteries correctly you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries please contact your local municipality your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste in accordance with national legislation For business users in the European Union If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment please contact your dealer or supplier for further information Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union These symbols are only valid in the European Union If you wish to discard these items please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal Note for the battery symbol bottom two symbol examples This symbol might be used in combination with a chemi
285. lues within the IRIS detection window 0 30 100 A IRIS WINDOW Selects the auto iris detection window Window that is near screen center NORM1 21 Window that is near screen bottom CENTER Window that is a spot in the screen center S IRIS LEVEL Sets the super iris backlight compensation target value 0 70 100 IRIS GAIN Selects the IRIS GAIN adjustment side CAM LENS When using the lenses with extenders such as x2 and x0 8 sold prior to the FUJINON DIGI POWER types set to LENS with the extender inserted and operate IRIS correction control If set to CAM the IRIS control of the camera will no longer function correctly IRIS GAIN VALUE Selects the IRIS GAIN adjustment value When CAM is selected in IRIS GAIN this setting is enabled 1 10 20 151 are factory settings Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list AGC Item Description of settings Remark AGC Selects ON OFF for AGC function that automatically adjusts camera gain ON OFF AGC LIMIT Sets the maximum gain value during AGC operation 6 12dB 18dB AGC POINT Sets the F value to switch control to AGC from auto iris during AGC operation F5 6 F4 F2 8 are factory settings PROPERTY Item Description of settings Remark CLIP PROPERTY Detailed clip infor
286. m Register now Panasonic S This product is eligible for m the P2HD 5 Year Warranty Repair Program For details see page 5 Operating Instructions Memory Card Camera Recorder Model No AJ 7 PX5000G FHU micro pou AWC ULTRA Before operating this product please read the instructions carefully and save this manual for future use M0913HM1103 YI ENGLISH VQT5E21A 1 E Read this first Read this first indicates safety information WARNING To reduce the risk of fire do not expose this equipment to rain or moisture To reduce the risk of fire keep this equipment away from all liquids Use and store only in locations which are not exposed to the risk of dripping or splashing liquids and do not place any liquid containers on top of the equipment CAUTION In order to maintain adequate ventilation do not install or place this unit in a bookcase built in cabinet or any other confined space To prevent risk of fire hazard due to overheating ensure that curtains and any other materials do not obstruct the ventilation WARNING Always keep memory cards optional accessory out of the reach of babies and small children CAUTION Do not remove panel covers by unscrewing them No user serviceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified service personnel CAUTION Do not lift the unit
287. m mode Displays the mode in which the camera is operating 1080 59 94P 1080 59 94 progressive mode 1080 59 94i 1080 59 94 interlaced mode 1080 50P 1080 50 progressive mode 1080 501 1080 50 interlaced mode 480 59 94i 480 59 94 interlaced mode 576 50i 576 50 interlaced mode 37 Recording operation status display REC Displayed when set CHAR in the main menu gt REC PB gt REC PB SETUP REC TALLY This is also displayed when set ON in the main menu gt VF gt VF INDICATOR REC STATUS 275 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder status display 38 Recording format Displays the recording method AVC 1100 AVC 150 AVC G50 AVC G25 DVCPRO HD DVCPROS50 DVCPRO DV Checking and displaying shooting status Each of the display items can be set to display hide in the setting menu All display items can be hidden at a time Also the mode check STATUS screen is displayed when the MARKER SEL gt lt MODE CHECK MENU CANCEL switch is pushed towards the lt MCK MCL gt side During mode check almost all items are displayed including usually hidden items so that the shooting status can be checked For details on the mode check refer to Mode check display page 77 Display status No Display item name Selection of menu item display Rel
288. mat type of the storage device You cannot perform copying once the capacity of the storage device is exceeded 4 vss 0003 T 0004 T lt MEE 00 01 44 12 NOW COPYING 0008 00 02 17 07 0012 T 00 03 17 01 A25 5 SE CT 0044 M TYPE S A partition is created for each TYPE S card All data included in the card are copied there You can check the serial number and part number of the P2 card copied using the camera s explorer screen The maximum number of items that can be copied is 23 W FAT A folder is created for each card All data included in the card are copied there You can check the folder names in the camera s explorer screen Folders are created in 2 levels the date folders on the first level and the time folders on the second Example August 30 2013 12 34 56 13 08 30 12 34 56 The maximum number of items that can be copied is 100 1 Select EXPORT in the main menu CLIP and press the SET button 2 Move the cursor to the card slot number of the copy source and press the SET button For TYPE S selecting ALL SLOT exports all cards currently inserted 3 Select YES in the confirmation message and press the SET button This starts the exporting process A progress bar is displayed during export COPY COMPLETED will be displayed when exporting is completed NOTE For export with TYPE S P2 card data and copied data can be verified compared automatically after exporti
289. mation is displayed on the screen Items can be individually corrected For details refer to Properties page 119 CARD STATUS Displays the card status of a card slot For details refer to Thumbnail screen page 108 CPS PASSWORD Sets the CPS encrypted password of the microP2 memory card LOAD Loads the CPS password from the SD memory card SET Enter the CPS password DELETE Deletes the password saved to the device and disables encrypted formats SD CARD Displays SD memory card information REMAIN SETUP Sets which is displayed remaining capacity or used capacity when P2 card information is displayed REMAIN Displays remaining capacity USED Displays used capacity FREE CAP OF Displays available space in a partition Displayed only in storage explorer when in USB PARTITION storage mode are factory settings Item Description of settings Remark REPOSITION Selects a clip to be displayed on the thumbnail screen ALL CLIP Displays all clips as thumbnails SAME Displays only the clips recorded in the same format as the FORMAT system format as thumbnails CLIPS Clips recorded in the same format means that each item of LINE amp FREQ REC FORMAT and AUDIO SMPL RES in the main menu SYSTEM gt SYSTEM MODE matches the current setting status Example 1080 59 94i AVC 1100 24BIT SELECTED Display
290. mera internal temperature rises the fan will set to AUTO the next time power is turned on If automatically rotate operation continues while the fan is stopped the internal temperature of the camera rises it OFF The fan does not rotate at all times The warning FAN may not be able to record or playback normally STOPPED is displayed Normally use the camera in AUTO are factory settings AREA SETTING Item Description of settings Remark AREA SELECT Select the region in which to use the camera before the initial use For details refer to Setting the region of use INTSC Selects an NTSC region other than Japan setting frame frequency etc page 11 NTSC J Selects Japan PAL Selects the PAL region are factory settings 169 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list Setting items to USER MENU and loading reading the settings to a data file Setting items to USER MENU Indicates whether items that can be set to USER MENU can be set by page or by item Items that can be set to USER MENU items that are not selected in factory settings Items that can be set to USER MENU items that are selected in factory settings Items that cannot be set to USER MENU Data files Symbols that indicate the types of data files are as follows S Can save read scene file data Can save to read from the SD memory card in main menu FILE SETUP DATA SD CARD
291. metadata display language page 118 11 Chapter 1 Overview Accessories Accessories Shoulder strap page 104 Mount cap already attached to the product page 15 CD ROM Operating Instructions Utility software For installation procedures refer to the installation manual on the CD ROM NOTE After unpacking the product dispose of the packing material properly 12 Chapter 1 Overview Use of the camera on a system Use of the camera on a system Parts other than the camera are optionally available Use the following recommended parts Basic configuration devices Lenses batteries etc are needed for shooting with the camera Part name Part No Remark Electronic HD view finder AJ HVF21KG Adjusting and setting the viewfinder page 83 Electronic HD color view finder AG CVF10G AG CVF15G Adjusting and setting the viewfinder page 83 Super directional electret stereo microphone ETR phantom 48V AJ MC900G Using the front microphone page 102 Lens Bayonet type FUJINON CANON Mounting and adjusting the lens page 97 140 DIONIC 90 i A Battery V mount type battery plate Mounting and setting battery page 94 ENDURA E 10 SD memory card 2 P2 memory card Visit the support desk at the website P2 card page 31 microP2 memory card 2 1 Abattery holder is provided as standard on t
292. metimes recording while the focus ring is moving When an error message is also not displayed while the chromatic aberration compensation function is not functioning the software version of the lens might be old Contact the manufacturer of the lens you are using 101 Chapter 5 Preparation Preparing for audio input Preparing for audio input Prepare the camera for connecting audio input devices Using the front microphone Microphones such as the stereo microphone kit AJ MC900G optional can be mounted Viewfinder Viewfinder clamping screw Microphone holder lt MIC IN gt terminal Fig 1 Fig 2 Fig 3 1 Open the microphone holder Fig 1 2 Mount the microphone and tighten the viewfinder clamping screw Fig 2 Mount with the UP indication on the microphone facing up 3 Connect the microphone cable to the lt MIC IN gt terminal on the camera Fig 3 4 According to the audio channel to be recorded switch the lt AUDIO IN gt switch to lt FRONT gt Using a wireless microphone receiver 1 Remove the cover to insert the wireless microphone receiver and secure it with the screws Fig 1 2 According to the audio channel to be recorded switch the lt AUDIO IN gt switch to lt W L gt 3 When using a two channel wireless microphone receiver set DUAL in the main menu gt I F SETUP MIC AUDIO gt WIRELESS TYPE 102 Chapter 5 Preparation Pr
293. n Before you use the camera mount the battery and lens following the procedures in this chapter The mounting of accessories is also described in this chapter Chapter 5 Preparation Power supply Power supply A battery or an external DC power supply can be used as the power supply Using batteries Connection of the following batteries to the camera has been verified E Anton Bauer batteries HYTRON140 DIONIC90 E IDX batteries ENDURA10 W PAG batteries PAG L96e NOTE Other batteries can be supported by changing BATTERY SELECT the main menu gt I F SETUP gt BATTERY P2CARD Use of batteries that are already verified as connectable to the camera is recommended Before you use a battery charge it with a battery charger For details on charging refer to each instruction operation When using the light Ultralight 2 using a battery of 90 Wh or more is recommended When using a studio system AG BS300 AG CA300G to turn the light on attach the battery plate to the AG CA300G before attaching the battery Supply the light power supply from the battery plate When supplying the light power supply from the light output terminal on the camera overcurrent when the light is turned on sometimes prevents the camera from starting because of the overcurrent protection of AG BS300 and AG CA300G Mounting setting battery Using Anton Bauer batteries Release lever
294. n the P2 card Reading only is FULL possible Write protect The write protect switch on the P2 card is at the Protect PROTECTED position Reading only is possible Recording is not possible by the currently set recording Flashing green slowly format since the SD memory card etc is inserted To Unrecordable card record the card change the recording format use a P2 card The card is inserted in a slot that is different from the slot selected in the main menu REC PB gt REC PB No display SETUP REC MEDIA P2 or microP2 REC IMPOSSIBLE Slot that is not recording target 30 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback P2 card P2 card access LED P2 card status Mode check display Card not supported ue card cannot be used on the camera Replace the NOT SUPPORTED Illegal format The P2 card is not properly formatted Reformat the card FORMAT ERROR Weca The P2 card is not inserted The card is waiting to be NO CARD recognized off This microP2 memory card cannot be authenticated Select the main menu CLIP gt AUTHENTICATE Unauthenticated card and enter the password AUTH NG For details refer to Manual CPS authentication page 122 The P2 card cannot be accessed since the mode is the USB non access No display USB device mode The mode check is displayed on the viewfinder screen For details refer to Viewfinder status displa
295. n the position of the CC FILTER dial is switched Adjusting the black balance Black balance must be adjusted in the following instances When the camera is used for the first time When the camera has not been used for a long time When the ambient temperature has changed considerably e When super gain is set using the USER buttons USER MAIN gt lt USER1 gt lt USER2 gt e When DS GAIN is assigned to USER MAIN USER1 and USER2 in the main menu CAMERA USER SW When the digital super gain assignment is changed in the main menu CAMERA USER SW GAIN gt DS GAIN To shoot optimum video we recommend adjusting the black balance immediately before shooting a AUTO BAL switch Use to execute the automatic black balance b lt OUTPUT gt switch Set this switch to CAM 1 Set the lt AUTO W B BAL switch towards ABB and then release it The switch returns to the central position with the black balance automatically adjusted Adjustment is completed in several seconds W Message displayed in the viewfinder screen During adjustment ABB ACTIVE Adjustment completed ABB OK The adjusted value is automatically stored in memory NOTE Make sure that the lens connector is connected and that the lens aperture is in the close mode During black balance adjustment the aperture is set to automatically shut out light During recording
296. n the slot cover 2 Remove the card P2 memory cards 2 342 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback P2 card Lift the eject button Fig 1 and press in Fig 2 microP2 memory cards Press in the microP2 card further into the camera and let go The microP2 memory card is released from the card slot and the microP2 memory card can be removed NOTE After insertion do not remove the P2 card while it is being accessed or recognized the P2 card access LED is flashing orange Doing so may result in a malfunction If the P2 card is removed while being accessed TURN POWER OFF is displayed on the viewfinder screen and the camera gives out a warning indication by an alarm WARNING lamp etc All P2 card access LEDs flash rapidly in orange Turn off the power page 194 If the P2 card is removed while being accessed clips on it may become irregular Check the clips and restore them if required page 115 If the P2 card being formatted is removed formatting of the P2 card is not guaranteed In this case TURN POWER OFF is displayed on the viewfinder screen displays Turn off the power then back on again and reformat the P2 card If a P2 card is inserted into another slot during playback the inserted card is not recognized and the P2 card access LED does not light The P2 card starts to be recognized when playback ends Even if a P2 card is inserted in a vacant card slot during recording the P2 card may not
297. nables disables white shading correction ON OFF RH SAW White shading correction is performed manually R H PARA Adjusts sawtooth waveforms and parabolic wave forms of RGB channels in the horizontal and vertical directions R V SAW 255 0 255 R V PARA GH SAW G PARA GV SAW G V PARA BH SAW B PARA BV SAW B V PARA factory settings LENS FILE ADJ Item Description of settings Remark LENS FILE ADJ Selects the mode to perform lens adjustment Data adjusted in LENS FILE ADJ can be saved MODE ON as a lens file to the SD memory card Uses the adjustment value of this LENS FILE ADJ The Rch and Bch gain adjusted in the main menu PAINT gt RB GAIN CONTROL and the Rch Gch and Bch flare levels adjusted in RGB BLACK CONTROL are disabled OFF The Rch and Bch gain adjusted in the main menu PAINT gt RB GAIN CONTROL and the Rch Gch and Bch flare levels adjusted in RGB BLACK CONTROL are enabled LENS R GAIN Corrects the Rch sensitivity of the lens to use OFFSET 200 0 200 LENS B GAIN Corrects the Bch sensitivity of the lens to use OFFSET 200 0 200 LENS R FLARE Adjusts the Rch flare level 0 100 LENS G FLARE Adjusts the Gch flare level 0 100 LENS B FLARE Adjusts the Bch flare level 0 100 CAC ADJ are factory settings Item Description of settings Remark CAC CON
298. nal INT Output is non synchronous to the input signal SD SDI SDI IN SD SDI output matches the SD SDI input signal SDI IN terminal VBS output matches the SD SDI input signal HD SDI lt SDI IN SD SDI output is not locked to the HD SDI input signal terminal VBS output is not locked to the HD SDI input signal 4801 5761 VBS lt GENLOCK SD SDI output matches the VBS input signal GL IN IN terminal VBS output matches the VBS input signal HD Y GENLOCK e SD SDI output is not locked to the HD Y input signal IN terminal VBS output is not locked to the HD Y input signal INT Output is non synchronous to the input signal NOTE In the system mode of 1080P a generator lock is applied to the video signal when the HD Y or HD SDI signal is input In this case time code may shift by one frame 61 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting the time data Setting the time data The camera provides time codes user bits and date time real time data as time data and they are recorded in frame in sync with video They are also recorded as data for clip metadata files ACTL counter and camera ID are built in Definition of time data W Time code Recording run and free run can be switched by the lt TCG gt switch Free run The time code always advances even when the power is turned off and it can be handled in the same way as time It can also be slaved to the time co
299. nd redistribute the source code of these software This product includes software licensed under MIT License This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org This product includes software licensed under OpenBSD License This product includes PHP freely available from lt http www php net gt oa OQ NM This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group Details are contained on the CD provided with the camera Refer to the LDOC folder These details are originally provided in English For details on how to obtain the source code visit the following website http pro av panasonic net We do not accept inquiries about the details of the source code obtained by the customer W Precautions when installing USB drivers For the latest information on the driver visit the following website http pro av panasonic net Install the required driver into your computer from the website For installation procedure of the driver refer to the installation manual on the website 10 Chapter 1 Overview Setting the region of use setting frame frequency etc Setting the region of use setting frame frequency etc When the camera is shipped the region of use is not set Before you use the camera follow the steps below to change the setting to the frame frequency of the region of use 1 After connecting the power supply
300. nd reset it if necessary NOTE When the POWER switch has been switched to ON OFF lt ON gt the backup accuracy of the time code in the free run mode is approximately 2 frames 64 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting the time data Externally locking the time code The internal time code generator of the camera can be locked to an external generator In addition the time code generator of an external device can be locked to the internal time code generator of the camera Example of connections for external locking As shown in the figure connect both the reference video signal and the reference time code For details on reference signal and generator lock refer to Selection of external reference signal and generator lock setting page 61 While the scan reverse is activated delay of the image occurs internally When the camera is connected in parallel to a device capable of recording without a delay the delay of time codes must be synchronized the main menu REC PB TC UB gt TC OUTPUT REF W When locking onto an external signal Reference video signal Reference time code TC IN terminal lt GENLOCK IN or SDI IN terminal W When multiple cameras are connected and one is used as a reference camera When building a system using multiple cameras set the inputs and outputs to the same on all cameras If different settings are set shootin
301. nd use the lt AUTO W B BAL switch to adjust white balance automatically AWB 2 Use the AUTO W B BAL switch to adjust black balance automatically ABB 3 Use the AUTO W B BAL switch to adjust white balance automatically AWB again 4 Perform step 2 2 again 5 Adjust white shading 1 Adjust from R H SAW to B V PARA in the main menu MAINTENANCE WHITE SHADING to make a flatter waveform 6 If the lens is equipped with an extender function turn on the extender function and repeat steps 2 to 5 Compensation values are stored on the camera as a single lens file data using two patterns for when the lens is equipped and not equipped with an extender pattern Adjustment values are saved in memory so there is no need to re adjust white shading even after turning the camera off NOTE Coloring may occur in the vertical direction near where the lens aperture is open OPEN even when the white shading has been adjusted but this is something that is inherent to optical systems and is therefore not indicative of a malfunction Since fluorescent lights mercury lamps and other such kinds of lighting tend to flicker use a light source which is less subject to flickering such as sunlight or a halogen lamp Make adjustments to the position of the lighting etc also when the lens aperture is not between F4 and F11 Make sure to leave the lt SHUTTER gt switch at OFF Chromatic aberration compensation function
302. ndent amp on the viewfinder for any setting combination other than the CC FILTER dial set to lt A gt 3200 K gt and the ND FILTER dial set ON OFF to 1 CLEAR When the viewfinder has the I lamp ATW Sets whether to i luminate the amp on the viewfinder if automatic tracking white balance is working When the viewfinder has the lamp ON OFF are factory settings CAMERA ID Item Description of settings Remark ID1 Setting 1 of the camera ID to record to the color bars Up to 10 characters may be used 1 2 Setting 2 of the camera ID to record to the color bars Up to 10 characters may be used ID3 Setting 3 of the camera ID to record to the color bars Up to 10 characters may be used are factory settings To clear the setting execute the main menu FILE gt INITIALIZE gt LOAD FACTORY DATA SHUTTER SPEED Item Description of settings Remark SYNCHRO SCAN SYNCHRO SCAN is assigned as the shutter speed selected by the lt SHUTTER gt Switch ON OFF POSITION1 The speed set in the main menu CAMERA gt SHUTTER SELECT gt POSITION1 SEL is assigned as the shutter speed selected by the lt SHUTTER gt Switch ON OFF POSITION2 The speed set in the main menu CAMERA gt SHUTTER SELECT gt POSITION2 SEL is assigned as the shutter speed selected by the lt SHUTTER gt swi
303. nder signal GND 6 VF Y Viewfinder Y signal output 7 VF Y GND Viewfinder Y signal GND 8 VF CLK Serial data clock pulse signal 9 VF WR Pulse signal for serial parallel conversion data reading 10 VF DATA Serial data signal for serial parallel conversion 11 UNREG GND GND 12 ZEBRA SW On off of zebra signal 13 PEAKING Peaking control not used 14 SPARE Spare not used 15 VF P amp Viewfinder Pz signal output 16 VF P Viewfinder Pg signal output 17 MARKER SW Marker ON OFF not used 18 FRONT VR F AUDIO LEVEL adjustment not used 19 VR GND F AUDIO LEVEL GND not used 20 UNREG GND GND Panasonic Parts No K1AB120H0001 Manufacturer Parts No HR12 14RA 20SC Hirose Electric Co NOTE Ensure that the total current from the DC OUT terminal lt REMOTE gt terminal VF terminal LENS terminal does not exceed 2 5 A 205 Chapter 10 Specification Details of the connector signals LENS 1 RET SW 2 REC START STOP 3 GND 4 IRIS AUTO 5 IRIS CONT 6 UNREG 12 V max 1 5 A 7 IRIS POSI 8 IRIS G MAX 9 EXT POSI 10 ZOOM POSI 11 FOCUS POSI 12 SPARE Panasonic Parts No K1AY112JA001 Manufacturer Parts No HR10A 10R 12SC 71 Hirose Electric Co NOTE Ensure that the total current from the DC OUT terminal lt REMOTE gt terminal VF terminal LENS terminal does not exceed 2 5 A Wireless microphone receiver interface
304. ned on are factory settings VERSION Item Description of settings Remark VERSION Displays the versions of the camera Move the cursor right and left to change Turn the jog dial button or press the cursor pages buttons lt gt to display the list screen for each VERSION Displays the version representative version of all firmware in firmware version the camera MODEL Displays the product name of the camera NAME SERIAL NO Displays the serial number of the camera MAC Displays MAC address of the camera Media Access Control ADDRESS address UID Displays the unique ID of the camera UPDATE Performs an update of the camera firmware Enabled only when there is a dedicated update file on the SD memory card USER MENU SEL This is a menu to select items to be displayed in USER MENU For details refer to Setting USER MENU page 135 and Setting items to USER MENU and loading reading the settings to a data file page 170 OPTION MENU OPTION Item Description of settings Remark ENG SECURITY Selects whether to place restrictions on opening and closing the menu screen ON Disables opening menu items other than USER MENUJ To release consult your dealer OFF Opening and closing are not restricted FAN MODE Sets the fan operation mode Once the power is turned off this item is always AUTO If the ca
305. ng Handling setting data Saving and loading setup files Specified menu items can be saved to SD memory cards and loaded to the camera There are two operations for saving to SD memory card SAVE overwriting an existing file and SAVE AS creating a new file Overwriting a setup file on SD memory card Select the type of menu to write beforehand in the main menu FILE gt SETUP DATA SELECT NO FILE NAME TITLE DATE TIME setup002 Title2 2013 JUL 03 17 41 54 setup001 Title1 2013 JUL 03 17 30 38 Fig 1 Fig 2 1 Select SAVE in the main menu FILE SETUP DATA SD CARD and press the jog dial button or SET button The list of setup files currently saved on the SD memory card is displayed 2 Select the file to overwrite from the list The title entry screen and keyboard are displayed 3 Enter the desired characters with the keyboard Fig 1 4 Use the jog dial button or cursor buttons lt gt to select OK and press the jog dial button or SET button The confirmation screen is displayed 5 Select YES and press the jog dial button or SET button The file is saved and the file list is updated Fig 2 For details on error messages if an error message is displayed refer to Warning error displays in the thumbnail operation menu operation and USB storage mode page 197 Saving a new setup file on SD memory card Select the type of menu to write beforehand in the ma
306. ng Verification at the time of export is enabled in the factory setting When you set to disable verification at the time of export exported data is not verified and the time until export completes will shorten To disable verification set VERIFY to OFF in the main menu CLIP STORAGE COPY SETUP For FAT verification is not performed regardless of this setting To cancel the export process press the SET button A CANCEL confirmation message will appear Select YES and press the SET button Even if you cancel the process during verification copying to the P2 card will continue until it is completed microP2 memory cards that exceed 32 GB cannot be exported and imported Use copied clips Copying to a storage device by clip You can copy only the selected clips to a storage device 1 Go to the thumbnail screen Use the cursor buttons to place the cursor on a clip you want to copy and press the SET button You can also select multiple clips 2 Select STORAGE in the main menu CLIP COPY and press the lt SET gt button A list of folders or partitions in the storage device is displayed 3 Select the copy destination and press the lt SET gt button 4 Select YES in the confirmation message and press the lt SET gt button This starts the copying process A progress bar is displayed during copying COPY COMPLETED will be displayed when copying is completed NOTE When the storage
307. nnot be repaired is selected Check the selected content CANNOT SAVE FILE NAME IN USE A settings file of the same name exists on the SD memory card Use another name to save the file CARD FULL The P2 card or SD memory card is full Insert a card with free space available COPY IMPOSSIBLE TOO LARGE CLIP CONTAINED CLIP NAME XXXXXX Files exceeding 4 GB cannot be copied to memory card of 32 GB or less Copy to microP2 cards with capacity of 64 GB or more INVALID VALUE The data value you entered is invalid Enter data within the normal range LACK OF CAPACITY MISSING CLIP There is not enough recording capacity left on the card Shot marks cannot be attached to the clips unless all clips recorded over multiple P2 cards are present Insert a card with sufficient recording capacity Insert all P2 cards over which recording extended NO CARD No P2 or SD memory card is inserted Insert the relevant media NO COPY TO SAME CARD A clip cannot be copied to the card storing the original clip Copy the selected clip to a card that does not contain the original clip NO FILE The specified file does not exist Check the file NO INPUT No data is entered Enter data and then set NO SD CARD No SD memory card Insert an SD memory card NOT SELECTED Attempted to delete without selecting clips Select clips to delete SAME CLIP
308. ns and menu operations on thumbnail operation section are not possible while the lt TCG gt switch is set to SET After setting year month day in step 8 the internal clock will start if the lt TCG gt switch is set to lt F RUN gt or lt R RUN gt To cancel settings while setting year month day hours minutes seconds and time zone set the lt TCG gt switch to lt F RUN gt or lt R RUN gt with the lt SET gt button held down Clock accuracy is a lunar inequality of approximately 30 seconds with the power off When accurate time is required check and reset the time when the power is turned on The built in clock runs for several years on the camera s built in lithium cell When the lithium cell runs low BACKUP BATT EMPTY will be displayed in the viewfinder when the camera is turned on For details refer to Maintenance page 193 30 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback P2 card P2 card Inserting a P2 card When using the camera for the first time be sure to set the time data beforehand page 30 Select and use either of the P2 or microP2 memory card slot on the camera P2 memory card slot 1 P2 memory card slot 2 P2 memory card access LED Eject button rU nv ta EA f No microP2 memory card slot 3 Slot cover microP2 memory card access LED microP2 memory card slot 4 Fig 1 Fig 2 Fig 3 1 Set the POWER switch to
309. nt using LVL CONTROL CH3 CH1 LVL CONTROL 2 is set in the main menu gt I F SETUP MIC AUDIO AUTO Displayed when automatic adjustment is set F VR Displays by ON OFF whether the F AUDIO LEVEL dial is enabled on the channel to which VR manual adjustment by adjustment dial is displayed in LEVEL A IN METER Displays the input status of each channel by FRONT front REAR rear W L CH1 2 3 4 wireless CH1 2 3 4 Displays the recording level of each channel CAC INFO screen Displays the operation status or information of CAC CAC CONT Displays the operation status of CAC e ON ON is set to in the main menu MAINTENANCE CAC ADJ gt CAC CONTROL and CAC is active e STOP ON is set to in the main menu MAINTENANCE CAC ADJ gt CAC CONTROL however CAC operation stops under certain data or lens conditions e OFF OFF is set to in the main menu gt MAINTENANCE CAC ADJ gt CAC CONTROL and is not active CAC MODE Displays the operation mode of CAC AUTO The CAC file is automatically selected CONNECT LENS TYPE Displays the lens ID of the currently connected digital lens SELECT FILE TITLE Displays the title and the file version of the CAC file currently used in the operation The CAC file can be set in the main menu MAINTENANCE gt C
310. o activate this function select CAM RET in the main menu gt CAMERA SW MODE gt RET SW g NOTE The HD Y or VBS signals of the lt GENLOCK IN terminal cannot be viewed as return video signals Zebra patterns display The camera can display two types of zebra patterns When the lt ZEBRA gt switch of the viewfinder is set to lt ON gt the zebra pattern currently set in the menu is displayed on the viewfinder screen Zebra patterns can also be displayed in the video of the monitor output terminal SDI OUT2 gt VIDEO OUT gt lt HDMI OUT gt according to settings The level for displaying zebra patterns can be set in the main menu VF gt VF DISPLAY Setting value Description of settings ZEBRA1 DETECT 0 70 109 Sets the level of zebra pattern 1 tilting to the right ZEBRA2 DETECT 0 85 109 Sets the level of zebra pattern 2 tilting to the left ZEBRA2 ON SPOT OFF Selects the type of ZEBRA2 are factory settings SPOT The image level from the setting value of ZEBRA1 DETECT to the setting value of ZEBRA2 DETECT is displayed in the zebra pattern ZEBRA2 ON OFF SPOT Video level 10994 NS ZEBRA2 DETECT Y N ZEBRA1 10 1 To display the zebra pattern in the video of the monitor output terminal SDI OUT2 gt VIDEO OUT gt lt HDMI OUT set the main menu I
311. ode can be selected in the main menu gt I F SETUP USB LAN gt USB MODE SELECT Assigns the function for attaching a shot mark when pressed and deleting the shot mark when pressed again For details on the shot SHOT MARK mark function refer to Shot mark recording function page 39 This function be assigned only to the lt SHOT MARKER button It cannot be assigned to other USER buttons 56 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Assigning functions to lt USER gt buttons Item name Description Assigns the function for recording test memos to frames when the button is pressed For details on the text memo function refer to Text TEXT MEMO memo recording function page 40 This function can be assigned only to the lt TEXT MEMO gt button It cannot be assigned to other USER buttons Toggles the brightness of the LCD monitor backlight This is interlocked with the setting value in the main menu I F SETUP LCD Ree el MONITOR BACKLIGHT EVF CLR Selects whether to display video in the viewfinder in color or black and white This is interlocked with the setting value in the main menu gt VF gt VF DISPLAY gt VF COLOR REC MEDIA Assigns the function for selecting whether to use the P2 memory card slot or the microP2 memory card slot as the recording slot This is interlocked with the setting value in main menu REC PB gt REC PB SE
312. of the lt GENLOCK IN or SDI IN terminal and recording is suspended temporarily The clip will be divided Recording resumes when the signal returns to normal However during loop recording Suspend Resume WIRELESS RF None Audio wireless reception status is poor Continue Warning error displays in the thumbnail operation menu operation and USB storage mode W Thumbnail and menu Message Description Measure AUTHENTICATION ERRORI Manual authentication failed Enter the correct password Data cannot be accessed due to a content defect or some CANNOT ACCESS ether reason Ensure the health of the media and the clips For a clip with the mark where a thumbnail cannot be Correct the settings and content to enable display of the CANNOT CHANGE generated the thumbnail cannot be modified in the text memo 4 CANNOT DELETE position The content versions do not match Cannot delete thumbnail Match the device and contents version CANNOT FORMAT AP2 card problem or some other reason prevents formatting Check the P2 card CANNOT RE CONNECT Clips cannot be remerged because either clips not recorded across multiple P2 cards are selected or other reasons Check the selected content CANNOT REPAIR IN SELECTION Some of the selected clips cannot be repaired Check the selected content CANNOT REPAIR Content that ca
313. of the screen area AWB B Sets the function assigned to the lt WHITE BAL gt switch lt B gt MEM Records setting values when white balance is automatically adjusted and operates using those values each time the WHITE BAL switch is moved to lt B gt ATW Assigns the auto tracking white balance function ATW SPEED Switches the control speed of auto tracking white balance function NORMAL SLOW FAST TEMP PRE SEL SW Selects whether to set the preset color temperature to be variable or to switch between 3200K 5600K Right after the value is changed the preset color temperature is set to 3200K when the filter lt A gt is set VAR Switchable from 2300K to 15000K 3 2K 5 6K Can be switched to 3200K or 5600K COLOR TEMP PRE Sets color temperature when the WHITE BAL switch is the lt PRST gt position Sets the preset color temperatures selected in TEMP PRE SEL SW When VAR is selected for TEMP PRE SEL SW 2300K 3200K 15000K When 3 2K 5 6K is selected for TEMP PRE SEL SW 3200K 5600K The range of color temperature that can be set differs depending on the position of the CC FILTER dial When a high color temperature is set sometimes the value does not change even if the color temperature is changed AWB A TEMP Sets color temperature when the lt WHITE BAL gt switch is in the lt A gt position I
314. on is modified or deleted the data may no longer be recognized as P2 data or the card may no longer be able to be used with P2 devices This is the file to which the information of the final clip that was recorded with the P2 device is written NOTE P2cards formatted on devices other than microP2 memory card compatible devices do not have the AVCLIP folder For P2 cards without the AVCLIP folder the folder will automatically be created when recording is performed on microP2 memory card compatible devices When transferring data from a P2 card to a computer or when rewriting data saved on a computer back to a P2 card to prevent data loss be sure to download the special P2 Viewer Plus software For details on downloading P2 Viewer Plus and the operating environment visit the support desk at the following website http pro av panasonic net When using regular IT tools such as Microsoft Windows Explorer or Apple Finder to transfer data to a computer follow the instructions below However be sure to use P2 Viewer Plus when returning data back to a P2 card Transfer the corresponding CONTENTS folder and LASTCLIP TXT file together as a set Do not transfer individual files from the CONTENTS folder When copying copy the LASTCLIP TXT file at the same time as the CONTENTS folder When transferring the data in multiple P2 cards to a computer create a folder for each P2 card to prevent clips with the same name from being ove
315. on of settings Remark GAIN 0dB Sets whether to illuminate the lamp on the viewfinder if the gain is other than 0 dB When the viewfinder has the lamp ON OFF DS GAIN Sets whether to illuminate the lamp on the viewfinder when DS GAIN incremental gain is functioning When the viewfinder has the lamp ON OFF SHUTTER Sets whether to illuminate the lamp on the viewfinder if the electronic shutter is working When t ON OFF he viewfinder has the lamp WHITE PRESET Sets whether to i luminate the Switch is on lt PRST gt When the ON OFF amp on the viewfinder if the WHITE BAL viewfinder has the lamp EXTENDER B GAMMA Sets whether to i working When tl ON OFF Sets whether to i working When tl ON OFF luminate the luminate the he viewfinder has the lamp amp on the viewfinder if the lens extender is he viewfinder has the lamp amp on the viewfinder if the black gamma is MATRIX Sets whether to i luminate the table for linear matrix is selected ON OFF lamp on the viewfinder if the color correction When the viewfinder has the lamp COLOR CORRECTION FILTER Sets whether to i color correction is selected When the viewfinder has the lamp ON OFF Sets whether to i luminate the luminate the amp on the viewfinder if the 15 axis indepe
316. on the left side of the storage device explorer screen For details refer to Storage device information display explorer screen page 126 W Storage device type Storage device type Features TYPE S A special format to enable fast read write by card P2STORE Indicates P2 STORE AJ PCS060G Writing is disabled Storage devices where the primary partition is FAT16 or FAT32 The partition root or CONTENTS folder FAT under any folders is the target Indicates other storage devices other than the above File systems other than FAT16 and FAT32 such as OTHER NTFS The hierarchy of folders is down to the 3rd level and the maximum number of folders is 100 Long file names and file names with double byte characters are not supported Examples of folder displays are shown below ICONTENTS Can be displayed ISAMPLE CONTENTS Can be displayed ISAMPLE 20090101 CONTENTS Can be displayed ISAMPLE 20090101 1200 CONTENTS Cannot be displayed Cannot be displayed since this is a 4th level folder 123 Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips Thumbnail operations W Storage device types and available functions Storage device type Available functions g TYPE 51 P2STORE FAT OTHER Thumbnail display 5 Storage 4 v Card 2 gt Storage Card unit Storage gt Card Storage gt gt
317. only some of the incomplete clips divided into 3 or more are linked the incomplete clip indicator will stay on until all of the clips that comprise the original clips are linked EXCH THUMBNAIL Changes the clip thumbnail to an image with any text memo This can be executed while the text memo clip is displayed EXPLORE Switches to the information display screens for storage when in USB storage Enabled only in USB storage mode mode AUTHENTICATE When this menu is selected from the card status screen a software keyboard is displayed to enter the CPS password If the password is entered and OK is selected the CPS password is set to the camera When the set CPS password is successfully authenticated the message AUTHENTICATED SUCCESSFULLY is displayed When the set CPS password authentication fails a warning message page 196 is displayed CHANGE PARTITION Sets and changes the storage partition name in USB storage mode The initial value is the date and time that the NAME partition was created Valid for type S storage only Displayed only in storage explorer DELETE LAST Deletes the last storage partition when in USB storage mode Can only be deleted when the cursor is in the last PARTITION partition Displayed only in storage explorer DELETE FOLDER Delete folders in the storage device in the FAT format Displayed only in storage explorer
318. ording Proxy recording The camera supports high resolution proxy video recording The materials recorded with the camera can be converted to a compressed data file to save into a different area than that of the original materials Refer to Multi formats page 47 for information on the recording format where proxy recording is available Video can be saved in high resolution H 264 AVC format as well as MPEG4 format For audio besides AAC format uncompressed audio LPCM is supported In addition to the traditional MPEG4 format the MOV format more suitable for nonlinear editing is available Video files audio files and real time metadata file time code user bits can be recorded to the P2 card and SD memory card at the same time The recorded materials can be saved as a smaller data file to allow efficient clip check or editing Proxy settings Setting menu To record proxy data on the camera set gt REC PB PROXY SETUP Item Description of settings Remark REC MEDIA Selects media for recording proxy data P2 Records proxy data to the P2 card P2 amp SD Records proxy data to both the P2 card and SD memory card OFF Does not record proxy data REC MODE HD Sets the proxy data recording mode in the HD mode For details on each mode refer to Recording modes and recording signals video audio page 41 STD 2CH MP4 SHQ 2CH MOV HQ 4CH MOV HQ 2CH MOV LOW 2CH MOV
319. ording Recording check function Shot mark recording function Text memo recording function Proxy recording Proxy settings Recording the proxy data Recording to the SD memory card Checking the proxy data Error displays about proxy data recordings Normal and variable speed playback Chapter4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording 46 Multi formats Selecting recording signals System modes and recording functions List of recording settings and recording functions Selecting video output List of recording playback and output formats Adjusting the white and black balance Adjusting the white balance Adjusting the black balance Setting the electronic shutter Shutter mode Setting the shutter mode and speed Setting the synchro scan mode Flash band compensation FBC function Setting the flash band compensation function Assigning functions to USER buttons m Selecting audio input and adjusting recording levels 58 Selecting audio input signals Adjusting the recording levels Selection of external reference signal and generator lock setting Locking the video signal to the external reference signal p Setting the time Recording and output of time codes and user bits User bits settings How to input user bits Setting
320. ot hold It will always be NORMAL the next time that power is turned on elects whether to perform pre recording Sets the time to perform continuous cannot be selected in the following cases PRE REC Sel heth rf ding S he ti rf i ON b d in the followi pre recording when ON is selected ON Performs pre recording OFF Does not perform pre recording When the main menu gt SYSTEM gt SYSTEM MODE gt LINE amp FREQ is set to 1080 59 94P or 1080 50P When the main menu gt SYSTEM gt SYSTEM MODE REC SIGNAL is set to SDI When the main menu REC PB gt REC FUNCTION RECORDING is set to other than NORMAL PRE REC TIME Configures pre recording settings Sets a time that can be recorded by counting backward from the time that the REC button is pushed Up to a maximum of 15 seconds can be selected in DVCPRO and DV modes and up to 8 seconds in other modes HD DVCPROSO 05 85 DV or DVCPRO 0s 8s 15s REC PB SETUP are factory settings Item Description of settings Remark REC MEDIA Selects the slot for the media to be recorded Recording is not possible when a card is inserted P2 Uses P2 memory cards slots 1 and 2 into a slot that is not selected microP2 Uses microP2 memory cards slots 3 and 4 FILE SPLIT Selects whether to divide the recording file in 4 GB units or one file when f done in one fi
321. oth If the camera recorder is very cold the LCD monitor will be slightly darker than normal immediately after the power is turned on The screen will return to its regular brightness when the temperature inside increases Mirror shooting When rotating the LCD monitor 180 towards the lens the video in the LCD monitor is displayed reversed around the vertical axis if MIRROR is set to in the main menu gt I F SETUP gt LCD MONITOR SELF SHOOT This allows shooting as if looking at a mirror image Note however that only the display of the LCD monitor is reversed around the vertical axis Recording is performed as per normal NOTE When the LCD monitor is rotated 180 with MIRROR selected at SELF SHOOT the same state as in the viewfinder is not displayed in the LCD monitor regardless of the VF LCD CHAR setting 82 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Adjusting and setting the viewfinder Adjusting and setting the viewfinder Available viewfinders The viewfinder can be used on the camera Recording mode Viewfinder image Viewfinder Camera image 4 Playback m d HD Return image HD SDI V HD SDI input P4 Camera image n Playback SD Return image SD SDI SD SDI input v Return signals that can be displayed in the viewfinder and SDI input signals are signals of the recording format currently set to the camera HD signals When 480 59 94
322. ower supply DC cable External DC power supply lt DC IN gt terminal 1 Connect the external DC power supply to the lt DC IN gt terminal of the camera 2 Turn on the external DC power supply switch if there is an external DC power supply switch 3 Turn the POWER switch of the camera ON W External DC power supply Connect after making sure that the output voltage of the external DC power supply is compatible with the rated voltage of the camera Select an output amperage for the external DC power supply with a margin above the total amperage of the connected devices The total amperage of connected devices can be calculated with the following formula Total power consumption Voltage When the power of the camera is turned on inrush current is generated Insufficient power supply when turning on the power may cause a malfunction We recommend using an external DC power supply that can assure double the capacity of the total power consumption of the camera and connected devices that are turned on by interlock when the power of the camera is turned on such as lenses wireless microphone receivers For the DC cable use a dual core shielded wire of AWG18 nominal cross section area 0 824 mm or thicker e Make sure of the pin alignment of the DC output terminal of the external DC power supply and the camera DC IN terminal and connect the polarity correctly If the 12 V power supply is connected to t
323. press the SET button to display detailed information the P2 card Specific information such as the serial number and the user ID can be checked Fig 1 When the maximum number of clips that can be recorded in the P2 card has been reached OVER MAX NUMBER CLIPS is displayed in the P2 card detailed information showing that the upper limit has been reached Warning card mark When P2 cards are the following status the IJ mark is displayed RUN DOWN CARD The maximum number of overwrites on the P2 card has been exceeded DIR ENTRY NG The directory structure on the P2 card is not supported The warning can be checked on the P2 card detailed information in P2 card status remaining capacity page 121 Fig 2 121 Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips Thumbnail operations 4 Total slot memory remaining capacity or used capacity Displays the total remaining memory capacity or used capacity of the four slots The available space of a write protected P2 card is not included in the total available space 5 2 card remaining capacity or used capacity total capacity This displays the remaining capacity or used capacity total capacity of the P2 card Since only the figures in minutes are displayed the remaining memory capacity or used capacity for each P2 card may not match the total capacity Setting CPS password To set a CPS password either load the password from the SD memory card or use
324. pte9 Maintenance and Inspection Inspect the various parts of the camera before shooting This chapter also explains the warnings and error messages displayed on the viewfinder screen Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspection Inspections before shooting Inspections before shooting Before recording perform the following inspection to ensure that the system operates properly It is recommended that you check the image using a color video monitor Preparing to inspect Fig 1 Fig 2 1 Attach an adequately charged battery 2 Turn the POWER switch ON and check the battery charge level indicator the viewfinder screen Fig 1 If the remaining battery level is low replace the battery with an adequately charged one 3 In the main menu REC PB REC PB SETUP REC MEDIA select the P2 card of the recording target slot 4 Insert a P2 card into a card slot and close the slot cover Fig 2 Ensure that the P2 card access LED lights in orange for the card slot to which the P2 card is inserted If both card slots have P2 cards inserted the orange access LED only for the P2 card slot of the P2 card inserted first the one that completed an access first lights up and the green P2 card access LED for the P2 card inserted second lights up f the P2 card access LED for the card slot to which the P2 card is inserted flashes in green or does not light up that P2 c
325. ption of settings ects the color collection table for the linear matrix B Remark MATRIX R G Adjusts the linear matrix Red Green 63 30 63 B 63 24 63 MATRIX R B Adjusts the linear matrix Red Blue 63 5 63 B 63 10 63 MATRIX G R Adjusts the linear matrix Green Red A 63 1 63 B 63 4 63 MATRIX G B Adjusts the linear matrix Green Blue A 63 3 63 B 63 12 63 MATRIX B R Adjusts the linear matrix Blue Red 63 1 63 B 63 5 63 MATRIX B G Adjusts the linear matrix Blue Green A 63 2 63 B 63 20 63 are factory settings When saving or reading setup files from an SD memory card you can save items with an S and items without an S separately Items with an S in front of the item name are the targets for PAINT S SELECT in the main menu FILE SETUP DATA SELECT Items without an S are targets for PAINT LEVEL COLOR CORRECTION Item Description of settings Remark S LCOLOR Switches ON OFF of the 15 axis independent color correction where the CORRECT lt GAIN gt switch is on lt L gt ON OFF S M COLOR Switches ON OFF of the 15 axis independent color correction where
326. r 1st camera 2nd camera to n 1 th camera n th camera etc TC OUTPUT REF setting TC OUTPUT REF setting TC OUTPUT REF setting TC IN TC IN TC IN 66 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting the time data External lock operation procedure To externally lock the time code follow the steps below 1 Set the lt TCG gt switch to lt F RUN gt 2 Set the lt DISPLAY gt switch to lt TC gt Set GL IN or SDI IN in the main menu gt SETUP gt GENLOCK GENLOCK 4 Input a reference time code and reference video signal that are in a phase relationship that conforms to time code specifications to the lt TC IN and lt GENLOCK IN terminals or SDI IN terminal respectively The built in time code generator is locked to the reference time code When approximately ten seconds has elapsed after locking the external lock status will be held even if the reference time code from the external device is disconnected When the input reference signal of generator lock is disrupted recording cannot be performed normally TEMPORARY PAUSE IRREGULAR SIG is displayed in the viewfinder screen and the clip is divided The continuity of the time code is not guaranteed Recording resumes when the signal returns to normal However during loop recording recording does not resume When the time code is externally locked the time code is instantaneously locked to the external time code the sam
327. r NG Unknown clip indicator This is displayed for defective clips which may result from various causes such as turning off the power during recording Clips with yellow defective clip indicators can sometimes be restored For details refer to Restoring clips page 115 Clips with red defective clip indicators cannot be restored and must be deleted If the clip cannot be deleted format the P2 card NG is displayed for clips which differ in format from the P2 standard 19 Thumbnail scroll bar Indicates which part of the whole thumbnail is currently being viewed 109 Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips Thumbnail operations Selecting thumbnails Multiple thumbnails can be randomly selected on the thumbnail screen a lt THUMBNAIL gt button b lt EXIT gt button c Y 4 cursor buttons lt 5 gt button d MENU button e lt SHIFT gt button Selecting clips You can select multiple clips randomly 1 Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor over the desired clip 2 Press the SET button A light blue frame and are displayed on the clip where the cursor is put This indicates that it is selected 3 To select additional clips repeat steps 1 to 2 It is possible to display only the selected clips on the thumbnail screen for playback NOTE While holding down the lt SHIFT gt button use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the first or last cl
328. rature in the main menu CAMERA WHITE BALANCE MODE COLOR TEMP PRE page 150 Adjust automatically the white balance by pressing the lt AUTO W B BAL switch towards lt AWB gt and saves the adjusted value to memory A or B lt A gt lt B gt You can also assign the auto tracking white balance ATW function to lt B gt in the main menu CAMERA WHITE BALANCE MODE AWB BJ page 50 21 Chapter 2 Description of Parts Shooting and recording playback functions section FF PLAY PAUSE 20 21 22 23 29 30 31 32 33 W Shooting and recording playback functions section Recording unit 11 REC button page 37 Recording is started by pressing this button Recording is stopped by pressing this button again This button has the same function as the VTR button on the lens side 12 lt 5 MARKER button page 39 Shot marks can be added to the thumbnail of a clip while that clip is being recorded Thumbnails can also be selected in the LCD monitor and shot marks can be added by pressing this button The selected function can be assigned as the lt USER3 gt button Set the function to be assigned in the main menu CAMERA USER SW gt SHOT MARK 03 13 TEXT MEMO button page 40 Text memos can be recorded by pressing this button during recording playback or while playback is paused The selected function can be assigned as the lt USER4
329. recording Chapter 3 Recording and Playback Setting the date time of the internal clock Setting the date time of the internal clock The value of the time is recorded to content clips and affects the thumbnail playback order Before recording be sure to check and set the date and time zone 1 Set the lt DISPLAY gt switch to lt UB gt 2 Press the HOLD button several times to display the time zone time difference from Greenwich mean time on the display window For time zone display refer to Time code indications page 27 in Description on display window 3 Set the lt TCG gt switch to lt SET gt 4 Set hours minutes h min and advance no display delay display from the Greenwich mean time by the cursor buttons V Example Time difference 5 00 delay New York Set as 05 00 The time zones are always recorded as metadata together with date time Set this matched to the local time by referring to the time zone table 5 Set the lt TCG gt switch to lt F RUN gt or R RUN to apply the time zone 6 Press the HOLD button several times to display DATE on the display window 7 Set the lt TCG gt switch to SET 8 Set date Y M D by the cursor buttons The year setting upper limit is 2037 gt The digit to be set flashing moves to the right lt The digit to be set flashing moves to the left A The value of the flashing digit is incremented by one The
330. rer screen place the cursor on the last partition 2 Select DELETE LAST PARTITION in the main menu CLIP and press the lt SET gt button NOTE You can only delete the last partition when using a TYPE S storage device You can only delete the last partition You cannot delete other partitions Since deleted partitions cannot be recovered perform a check thoroughly before deleting Displaying the storage device clip thumbnails and the video monitor Displaying thumbnails You can display and manage clips saved in a storage device as well as display the thumbnail screen for clips saved in a P2 card attached to the camera 127 Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips Thumbnail operations STORAGE EXPLORE FOLDER NAME STORAGE PARTITION FAT VENDOR MODEL SIZE 238 4 GB USED GB CARDS FREE CAP 225 7 GB SELECTED PART 2 6 AVC EEE 100 1 Open the explorer screen 13 06 28 16 27 33 SET HOLD SELECT RELEASE SHIFT SET THUMB ALL SEL PART PRESS EXIT BUTTON TO EXIT SET THUMBNAIL ALL CLIP NAME 00486 PROPERTY MODEL AJ P2C004HG SELECTED PART Avemmzmi00 1080 60i TIME 13 16 25 VERIFY ON FINISHED NAME 13 105 13 16 25 00 00 10 26 lt SET gt 2013 JUN 28 00 04 36 14 umm T gt 00 02 05 10 00 04 44 21 00 05 53 04 00 05 34 01 SERIAL NO 2 PARTITION TYPE S AEC06G0729 DATE 2013 JUL 05 SIZE 10
331. returns to the thumbnail of the text memo where the playback started While holding down the lt SHIFT gt button use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the beginning or end of the text memo e Press the EXIT button to return the cursor to the upper section of the thumbnail screen NOTE Pressing the REC button while the text memo screen is displayed does not start recording For clips in AVC Intra and AVC LongG formats with different settings different system frequency the main menu SYSTEM gt SYSTEM MODE the thumbnail of the text memo position may not be displayed A thumbnail with the mark may be displayed instead Deleting text memos 1 Perform steps 1 to 2 in Playing back from the text memo position page 114 to select the desired text memo in a clip 2 Move the cursor over the text memo to be deleted and press the lt SET gt button 3 Select DELETE in the main menu CLIP and press the SET button 4 Use the cursor buttons and the SET button to select YES This deletes the text memo Using a text memo to divide a clip and copy the necessary portion 1 Perform steps 1 to 2 in Playing back from the text memo position page 114 to select the desired text memo in a clip 2 Move the cursor over the text memo to be copied and press the SET button You can select multiple text memos 3 Select COPY in the main menu CLIP 4 Use the cursor buttons and the
332. ring continuous recording Warning content The error indicates poor wireless audio reception conditions Recording or playback operation The current operation will continue Action to take Check the microphone power supply and the reception status of the receiver 9 Battery near end Display in display window One battery charge level bar flashes Warning lamp Flashes once per second Tally lamp Flashes once per second Viewfinder The BATT lamp flashes once per second if the viewfinder has the BATT lamp Alarm Sounds four times per second Warning content The battery is about to run out Recording or playback operation The current operation will continue Action to take Change the batteries as needed 10 P2 card recording near end Display in display window One P2 card remaining capacity bar flashes Warning lamp Flashes once per second during continuous recording Tally lamp Flashes once per second during continuous recording The remaining P2 card capacity indicator flashes Viewfinder If the viewfinder has the SAVE lamp and P2CARD is set in the main menu VF gt VF INDICATOR SAVE LED the SAVE lamp flashes once per second during recording while recording pauses and stops Alarm Sounds once per second during continuous recording Warning content The P2 card memory free space totals 2 minutes or less
333. rmation UM Indicates the USER MAIN button U1 Indicates the lt USER1 gt button U2 Indicates the lt USER2 gt button U3 Indicates the lt SHOT MARK button U4 Indicates the TEXT MEMO button RET Indicates the RET button INHIBIT Displayed when the USER button is not operated S GAIN dB OFF Displays the selected super gain DS GAIN OFF S IRIS ON OFF Displays the selected digital super gain Displays the super iris operation status I OVR ON OFF Displays the iris override operation status S BLK Displays the super black operation status During operation the setting value is also displayed B GAMMA ON OFF Displays the operation status of black gamma black level tone compensation D ZOOM x2 x3 x4 OFF Displays the digital zoom factor ATW ON OFF Displays the operation status of automatic tracking white balance ATW LOCK ON OFF Displays the lock status of automatic tracking white balance operation AUD 1 3 Displayed when the input signal to record to audio channel 1 or 3 is switched 72 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder status display AUD CH2 4 Displayed when the input signal to record to audio channel 2 or 4 is switched REC SW Displayed when the USER button is functioning as the
334. roSD cards is recommended Be sure to format cards on the camera before use Refer to our support desk at the following website for the latest information not included in these operating instructions http pro av panasonic net SDHC memory cards are a standard that was established in 2006 by the SD Association for large capacity memory cards that exceed 2 GB SDXC memory cards are a standard that was established in 2009 by the SD Association for large capacity memory cards that exceed 32 GB 18 microP2 memory card access LED page 32 Indicates the access status of recording and playback of each microP2 memory card 19 microP2 memory card slot 22 Chapter 2 Description of Parts Shooting and recording playback functions section 20 lt lt lt REW gt rewind button Press this button during a pause to perform fast reverse playback Press it during playback to perform fast reverse playback at approximately 4x speed If it is pressed with playback paused the clip being played back is paused at its start point cued state 21 STOP stop button Press this button to stop playback 22 lt FF gt gt fast forward button Press this button during a pause to perform fast playback Press it during playback to perform fast playback at approximately 4x speed If itis pressed with playback paused the clip being played back is paused at the start point of the next clip cued state 23 lt PLAY PAUSE gt play pause button Press
335. rresponds to the Anton Bauer DIONIC HC TYPE C FULL Selects the voltage for full display in steps of 0 1 V when the main menu gt I F SETUP BATTERY P2CARD BATTERY SELECT is set to TYPE 13 0V 15 9V 17 0V TYPE C NEAR END Selects the near end voltage in steps of 0 1 V when the main menu gt I F SETUP gt BATTERY P2CARD BATTERY SELECT is set to TYPE 11 0V 13 2V 15 0V TYPE C END Selects the end voltage in steps of 0 1 V when the main menu gt I F SETUP gt BATTERY P2CARD BATTERY SELECT is set to TYPE C 11 0V 12 5V 15 0V BATT STAT NEAR END Selects the near end percent value 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 16 18 20 When the battery charge level percentage cannot be detected this will follow the near end voltage value set in TYPE A f a battery is used for which the remaining charge is displayed in units of 1096 the setting value and actual near end warning may vary slightly BATT STAT END Selects the end percent value 1 10 When the battery charge level percentage cannot be detected this will follow the end voltage value set in TYPE A When using a battery which displays battery charge level by units of 1096 end is determined only in two stages when it is set between 196 and 5 or when it is set between 6 to 10 ENDURA STAT NEAR
336. rror continues to occur please consult your dealer PROXY ERROR A proxy data recording error occurred PROXY REC WARNING f a proxy data recording error occurs the proxy data currently being recorded will be processed as below The proxy data being recorded to the P2 card will be deleted The proxy data being recorded to the SD memory card will not be restored SD 0 min Recording of the materials and proxy data will continue After finishing recording insert a new SD memory card The remaining SD memory card capacity is getting low approximately shorter than one minute 43 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback Proxy recording Error displays TP Behavior and cause Action to take viewfinder screen SD END Proxy data recording to the SD memory card will stop but After finishing recording insert a new SD memory card recording to the P2 card will continue e The proxy data being recorded to the SD memory card will No SD memory card capacity remains be deleted To restore the deleted proxy data select clips in the P2 card and copy them to the SD memory card page 44 SD WR ERR Proxy data recording to the SD memory card will stop but Check the status of the SD memory card and insert a recording to the P2 card will continue recordable card page 42 Even if the main menu REC PB gt PROXY SETUP gt REC MEDIA is set to P2 amp SD this is displayed when proxy data cannot b
337. rwritten Do not delete data from the P2 card Be sure to format P2 cards on a P2 device or P2 Viewer Plus 24 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback Basic procedures Basic procedures This section describes the basic procedures for shooting and recording Before you actually start shooting pre inspect your system to ensure that it works properly page 190 Power supply setup to P2 card insertion Fig 1 Fig 2 1 Insert a charged battery pack Fig 1 Set the POWER switch to ON and make sure that five or more levels on the battery charge level indicator bar are lit If five or more levels on the battery charge level indicator bar are not lit be sure to check the battery settings page 163 If the settings are correct replace with a fully charged battery 3 Insert a P2 card make sure that the P2 card access LED is illuminated orange or green and then close the slot cover Fig 2 When two P2 cards are inserted in the card slots the P2 card with the smaller slot number will be recorded to first Note however that regardless of the slot number if a P2 card is inserted later that P2 card will not be accessed until the previously inserted P2 card has been recorded to Example When P2 cards are inserted in two slots If P2 memory cards are inserted into two slots the P2 cards are used in the order of the slot number 1 2 on the microP2 memory card s
338. s refer to Selecting recording signals page 47 In the main menu gt I F SETUP GENLOCK gt GENLOCK SDI IN a generator lock can also be applied referenced to this input signal page 61 e NOTE During HD SDI signal output use a 5C FB or higher cable 33 VIDEO OUT gt monitor output terminal This is the video output terminal for the monitor Video can be output separately from the lt SDI OUT1 gt terminal according to the setting of main menu gt I F SETUP gt OUTPUT SEL gt MONITOR OUT MODE The VBS signal is output at all times Superimposing of characters can be set by the MON OUT CHARACTER switch independently of the SDI OUT 1 terminal page 67 NOTE As the factory setting output of the signal from the VIDEO OUT gt terminal is stopped To enable output set ON in the main menu gt I F SETUP OUTPUT SEL gt VIDEO OUT 23 Chapter 2 Description of Parts Menu operation section and thumbnail operation section Menu operation section and thumbnail operation section 1 lt MENU gt button page 134 Press this button to display USER MENU on the viewfinder screen Press this button for three seconds or more to display the main menu on the viewfinder screen Press it again to return to the original image This button functions in the same way as the MENU button cursor 2 Jog dial button page 134 With the setting menu open n
339. s instruction manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License All other acts are not licensed except private use for personal and non profit purposes such as what are described below To record video in compliance with the AVC standard AVC Video To play back AVC Video that was recorded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non commercial activity To play back AVC Video that was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide the video Visit the MPEG LA LLC website http www mpegla com for details Use of DCF Technologies under license from Multi Format Inc How to read this document W Illustrations llustrations of the camera menu screens and other items may vary from the actual items W Conventions used in this manual e Words and phrases in brackets indicate details and content displayed in the viewfinder or LCD monitor Words and phrases in lt gt brackets indicate design text used on this camera such as button names W Reference pages Reference pages in this document are indicated by page 00 W Terminology SD memory card SDHC memory card and SDXC memory card are referred to as SD memory card Memory card that has the P2 logo such as optional AJ P2E064FG is referred to as P2 memory Memory card that has the microP2 logo such as optional AJ P2M032AGN is referred to as
340. s only the clips selected with the SET button as CLIPS thumbnails The thumbnails appear in selected order MARKED Displays only the clips with shot marks added as thumbnails CLIPS TEXT MEMO Displayed only clips with text memo data attached as CLIPS thumbnails SLOT CLIPS Displays only the clips of the selected slot as thumbnails DELETE Deletes selected clips To interrupt the deletion process press the lt SHIFT gt button EXIT button or the SET button to cancel the operation Once a clip is deleted it cannot be restored even if the deletion process is aborted FORMAT When the FORMAT menu is selected format the P2 card of the specified slot Data deleted as a result of formatting cannot be restored Always check the data before formatting FORMAT STORAGE Formats a storage device connected to the lt USB3 0 gt terminal host using the Data deleted as a result of formatting cannot be specified system in USB storage mode restored Always check the data before formatting TYPE S FAT Enabled only for storage explorer storage thumbnail COPY Copies the selected clip to a P2 card in any card slot or a storage device Do not turn power off or remove the card during copying Doing so will result in defective clips If a defective clip is created delete the clip before copying it again Combine incomplete clips before copying 152 factory settings Chapter 7 Menu
341. selected Example MKR A 4 When in the iris override mode Example F5 6 V When the CAC lens is mounted or unmounted Example CAC LENS DATA INVALID V Setting the marker display Select the type and display of the center marker safety zone marker safety zone area and frame marker Select the display mode of each item in the main menu VF VF MARKER 79 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder status display Display of marker confirmation screen marker select function The screen for confirming the marker status of the camera can be displayed on the viewfinder screen Type of marker Center marker Safety zone The aspect ratio currently set at FRAME SIG is displayed Pushing the MARKER SEL gt lt MODE CHECK MENU CANCEL switch on the camera towards the lt gt side switches between A marker display B marker display no display With the following settings in advance you can check the angle of view at 14 9 and 4 3 easily by this button if necessary As the A marker information set 14 9 in the main menu VF gt VF MARKER gt FRAME SIG and as the B marker information set 4 3 in FRAME SIG Confirmation of return video signal in the viewfinder The return video signal input to the SDI IN terminal be viewed in the viewfinder while the RET button on the lens is held down T
342. ser who CANNOT CHANGE enters the memo when there is no text memo Enter the TEXT text information first CANNOT SET INVALID VALUE The entered value is invalid Change the input value CANNOT SET NO INPUTI There is not input to the software keyboard Enter the password CANNOT SET RETRY PASSWORD IS The re entered password is different Enter the correct reference password DIFFERENT W Storage Message Description Measure CANNOT ACCESS CARD An error occurred while accessing the P2 card Check the P2 card CANNOT ACCESS TARGET An error occurred while accessing the connection target Check the storage device status and connection CANNOT COPY FORMAT STORAGE DEVICE TO FAT The partition that can copy clips does not exist on the storage device Reformat in FAT format or export the P2 card to create a partition CANNOT FORMAT The storage device cannot be formatted Change the connected storage device CANNOT RECOGNIZE STORAGE DEVICE The storage device is not correctly recognized Reboot the storage device or connect another storage device CANNOT SELECT MAX 6 PARTITIONS Storage devices with more than 6 partitions cannot be selected mounted simultaneously Release selected partitions CARD IS EMPTY CANNOT COPY The P2 card to copy is empty The copy operation is not performed because the card is empty
343. set or the time code is switched from free run to recording run the time code can be regenerated to the last time code of the clip recorded to the P2 card To perform this operation set REC CHECK in the main menu CAMERA SW MODE gt RET SW and set ON in the main menu REC PB gt TC UB gt REC CHECK REGEN respectively 1 Check the P2 card to be recorded to To regenerate to the time code of the last recorded clip when multiple P2 cards are inserted press the lt THUMBNAIL gt button to display the thumbnail screen 2 Check the P2 card recorded with the clip displayed last on screen and switch the slot by the USER button assigned with SLOT SEL so that recording is performed on that P2 card 3 Press the RET button on the lens e TC REGEN is displayed on the viewfinder When recording is next performed the time code is regenerated to the last recorded clip on the card to record to NOTE When the card to record to is changed the time code is regenerated to the time code of the last recorded clip on the P2 card that was changed to During recording or free run this function cannot be used Time code function during battery replacement Even during battery replacement the backup mechanism functions allowing the time code generator to continue operating When each item of the system mode has been changed the time code of free run may shift Turn on the power again check the time code a
344. so be used as a tally lamp This is useful for shooting video when fixing the camera on a crane DC OUT gt terminal Connection example Cable connector 401 HR10A 7R 4SC 73 Hirose Electric Co LED V7 gt _ Recording start stop Se ee ee ee ee LESS 1 GND 2 TALLY OUT Open collector output on the camera side Tally lamp on Low impedance Tally lamp off High impedance 3 Recording start stop switch This is connected in parallel to the lt REC gt button on the camera or the VTR button on the lens 4 12 NOTE Make sure that polarity is correct before connecting an external device Failure to do so may result in a malfunction 106 Chapters Thumbnail Operations for Clips The images and voices created from one shooting session together with additional information such as text memos and metadata are saved as clips You can play back and edit clips with the camera Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips Thumbnail operations Thumbnail operations Thumbnail operation overview A clip is a data group that includes the images and voices created from one shooting session together with additional information such as text memos and metadata The following operations can be performed while viewing the clip thumbnails displayed on the LCD monitor Play back delete copy or restore clips Adding or dele
345. specting the P2 card recording to Inspecting the earphones and speaker successively Inspecting the P2 card recording 1 On the viewfinder screen display ensure that the remaining P2 card capacity is sufficient For details refer to Screen display page 71 2 Press the lt REC gt button and check the following The P2 card access LED flashes in orange The REC lamp in the viewfinder illuminates No system warning is displayed on the viewfinder screen 190 Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspection Inspections before shooting 3 Press the REC button again Ensure that the P2 card access LED illuminates in orange and that the REC lamp disappears from the viewfinder screen 4 Use the lt VTR gt button on the lens to check the same behaviors in steps 2 to 3 5 Press the LIGHT button and ensure that the display in the display window becomes brighter 6 Press the lt THUMBNAIL gt button to switch to the thumbnail screen and from the thumbnail playback the clip you just recorded Ensure that the clip plays back properly 7 If two cards are inserted in the P2 card slots press the USER buttons USER MAIN gt lt USER1 gt lt USER2 gt to which SLOT SEL is assigned and switch the target P2 card Perform steps 2 to 3 and step 6 to ensure that the recording and playback functions operate properly Inspecting the audio level automatic adjustment 1 Set the AUDIO SELECT CH1 3 gt lt A
346. splayed when the lens aperture is open F1 7 to F16 Displays the lens aperture value CLOSE Displayed when the lens aperture is closed Displayed when a lens with an aperture value display function is used Also flashes when the iris override is variable 22 Super black display Displayed when super black is active 23 Zoom display 200 to 299 Displays the zoom amount Note however that this item is not displayed in the case of lenses without a zoom position return even if it is set to be displayed 2 When serial lens is connected the display unit can be changed in the main menu VF gt VF INDICATOR gt ZOOM FOCUS 74 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder status display 24 Focus control information Displays the focus control information with 99 to 00 When a lens other than a serial lens is connected the focus control information is not displayed When a serial lens is connected the display unit can be changed in the main menu VF gt VF INDICATOR ZOOM FOCUS 25 Information display such as pre recording Displayed after recording is stopped and until recording of video audio to P2 card completely stops Do not remove the P2 card P REC flashing or turn the power off until the flashing indication completely goes out When the pre recording function is set to OFF REC flashes Illuminated if the MA
347. splayed when there is no SD memory card 5 Camera warning notification display area Related to automatic white balance automatic black balance and switch operation AWB A ACTIVE Displayed when automatic white balance is active on the lt A gt channel AWB B ACTIVE Displayed when automatic white balance is active on the lt B gt channel AWB A K Displayed when automatic white balance has ended successfully on the lt A gt channel AWB B K Displayed when automatic white balance has ended successfully on the lt B gt channel AWB BREAK Displayed when automatic white balance operation is forcibly ended 271 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder status display COLOR TEMP LOW Displayed when automatic white balance operation is not ended successfully The 2nd line displays that status Warns that the color temperature is too low COLOR TEMP HIGH Warns that the color temperature is too high AWB NG LEVEL OVER Warns that the brightness is too high LOW LIGHT Warns that the brightness is too low TIME OVER Warns that processing could not be executed within the operation time ATW MODE Displayed when automatic white balance cannot be executed due to activation of auto tracking white balance AWB PRESET K Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to lt PRST gt and automatic white balance
348. ssword When entry of the CPS password has succeeded the message SETTING PASSWORD COMPLETED is displayed When entry of the CPS password has failed the warning message is displayed For warnings description refer to Warning error displays in the thumbnail operation menu operation and USB storage mode page 197 NOTE Up to 16 characters can be input The entered password cannot be displayed on the device Do not forget the password Deleting CPS password When the CPS function is no longer used delete the CPS password 1 Open the thumbnail screen and select the main menu CLIP PROPERTY CPS PASSWORD DELETE DELETING PASSWORD COMPLETED is displayed and the CPS password is deleted NOTE When the CPS password is deleted automatic authentication of the encrypted microP2 memory card and encryption format function are disabled Manual CPS authentication An encrypted microP2 memory card is authenticated on the camera automatically and can be used only if authentication has succeeded If different encrypted microP2 memory card is inserted into the card slot on the device where different CPS password is authenticated authentication will fail To use the failed microP2 memory card temporarily enter the authenticated CPS password onto the microP2 card manually with the following procedures If the password matches the card can be used 1 Confirm that authentication has failed 1 Display the
349. t PRST gt control unit are connected Setting values are 200 0 200 displayed R GAIN AWB A Sets the Rch gain when the WHITE BAL switch is on lt A gt 200 0 200 B GAIN AWB A Sets the Bch gain when the WHITE BAL switch is on lt A gt 200 0 200 R GAIN AWB Sets the Rch gain when the WHITE BAL switch is on lt B gt 200 0 200 B GAIN AWB Sets the Bch gain when the WHITE BAL switch is on lt B gt 200 0 200 AWB A GAIN Sets the Rch gain and Bch gain when performing automatic white balance after OFFSET the WHITE BAL switch is on lt A gt ON Keeps the values set for R GAIN AWB A and B GAIN AWB A OFF Sets the value of Rch gain and Bch gain to 0 AWB B GAIN Sets the Rch gain and Bch gain when performing automatic white balance after OFFSET the WHITE BAL switch is on lt B gt ON Keeps the values set for R GAIN AWB B and B GAIN AWB OFF Sets the value of Rch gain and Bch gain to 0 are factory settings RGB BLACK CONTROL Item Description of settings Remark MASTER PED Sets the master pedestal level Settings made through the menu are disabled 200 16 200 when the remote control unit and extension R PEDESTAL Sets the Rch pedestal level control unit are connected Setting values are 100 0 100 displayed G PEDESTAL Sets the Gch pedestal level 100 0 100 B PEDESTAL
350. t microphone Using a wireless microphone receiver Using audio devices Mounting accessories Mounting the camera on a tripod Attaching the shoulder strap Attaching the rain cover Connecting the DC OUT gt terminal with the external recording start stop switch 106 Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips 107 Thumbnail 22 2 2000 Thumbnail operation overview Thumbnail screen Selecting thumbnails Thumbnail screen display settings Playing back clips Changing thumbnails Shot mark Text memo Deleting clips Restoring clips Reconnecting incomplete clips Copying clips Setting clip metadata Formatting a P2 Formatting SD memory cards Properties Connecting to external devices using the lt USB3 0 gt terminal host USB storage mode Contents Chapter 7 Menu Operations 130 Setting menu structure Menu types and how to open them Main menu structure OPTION MENU structure Setting menu display Setting menu basic operations Setting USER MENU Menu list PAINT REC PB SETUP cs MAINTENANCE 5 USER MENU SEL OPTION MENU Setting items to USER MENU and loading reading the se
351. t or right to adjust it to an easy to view position After adjustment turn in the lt LOCK gt direction and firmly clamp 20 Light output terminal Connect the Ultralight 2 of Anton Bauer optional or an equivalent video light of 50 W or under The battery charge level drops sharply when the light is illuminated When using the light using a battery of 90 Wh or more is recommended 21 Microphone holder mounting screws Screws for mounting the microphone holder AJ MH800G optional or VF interface box AG YA500G optional 22 lt LENS gt terminal page 97 Connect the lens connection cable For details of the lens used refer to the Operating Instructions for the lens 46 Chapter 2 Description of Parts Audio input function section Audio input function section 1 lt F AUDIO LEVEL gt audio recording level adjustment dial page 59 Adjust the recording level of audio channels 1 2 or 3 4 Set which of audio channels 1 2 or 3 4 is to be adjusted at the main menu I F SETUP MIC AUDIO VR SELECT When the position of the AUDIO SELECT CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO SELECT CH2 4 gt switch is at AUTO adjustment is automatic and the F AUDIO LEVEL and AUDIO LEVEL CH1 3 gt lt AUDIO LEVEL CH2 4 gt dials do not function Set whether to enable the F AUDIO LEVEL dial at the main menu I F SETUP MIC AUDIO gt FRONT VR CH1 CH3 or FR
352. t the camera ID in the main menu CAMERA CAMERA ID Alphanumerics symbols and spaces within ten characters be used 67 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting the time data EXIT EXIT SHUT ID2 SHUT IDS USER SW SW MODE WHITE BALANCE MODE USER SW GAIN LENS IRIS AGC Fig 1 Fig 2 EXIT EXIT SHUT ID2 SHUT ID3 USER SW SW MODE WHITE BALANCE MODE USER SW GAIN LENS IRIS AGC Fig 3 1 Select CAMERA ID the main menu CAMERA and use the jog dial button or cursor buttons to navigate to the ID1 to ID3 items Fig 1 2 Press the jog dial button or SET button The camera ID input screen and software keyboard are displayed 3 Use the jog dial button or cursor buttons lt gt to select the desired characters Fig 2 4 Press the jog dial button or SET button to apply the character 5 Use the jog dial button or cursor buttons lt gt to select OK and press the jog dial button or SET button The entered character string is set and the screen returns to the selection menu of the camera ID Fig 3 6 Press the MENU button to end the operation e NOTE While the setting menu is displayed the camera ID will not be displayed even if the color bar signal is output The following settings can be made in the main menu VF VF INDICATOR When setting CAMERA ID to BAR the camer
353. tch ON OFF POSITIONS The speed set in the main menu CAMERA SHUTTER SELECT gt POSITION4 POSITIONS SEL is assigned as the shutter speed selected by the lt SHUTTER gt switch ON OFF The speed set in the main menu CAMERA gt SHUTTER SELECT gt POSITION4 SEL is assigned as the shutter speed selected by the lt SHUTTER gt Switch ON OFF are factory settings 2447 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list Item Description of settings Remark POSITIONS The speed set in the main menu CAMERA SHUTTER SELECT gt POSITIONS SEL is assigned as the shutter speed selected by the lt SHUTTER gt Switch ON OFF POSITION6 The speed set in the main menu CAMERA gt SHUTTER SELECT gt POSITION6 SEL is assigned as the shutter speed selected by the lt SHUTTER gt switch ON OFF are factory settings SHUTTER SELECT Item Description of settings Remark POSITION1 SEL Sets the shutter speed in the main menu gt CAMERA SHUTTER SPEED gt POSITION1 50 Hz 1 60 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 HALF 180 0deg 172 8deg 144 0deg 120 0deg 90 0deg 45 0deg 59 94 Hz 1 100 1 120 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 HALF 180 0deg 172 8deg 144 0deg 120 0deg 90 0deg 45 0deg POSITION2 SEL Sets the shutter speed in the main menu gt CAMERA gt SHUTTER SPE
354. te and time are correctly set For the setting method refer to Setting the date time of the internal clock page 30 156 factory settings Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list Item Description of settings Remark TC OUTPUT REF Sets the output delay of time code output from the lt TC OUT gt terminal For details refer to Externally locking the time code page 65 TC IN Match to external time code input VIDEO OUT Match to output images REC CHECK REGEN Selects whether to regenerate to the time code last recorded to the P2 card at the next recording when the RET button that assigns recording check function or the USER button is pressed ON Regenerates OFF Does not regenerate are factory settings REC METADATA Item Description of settings Remark LOAD Loads the metadata upload file saved to the SD memory card RECORD Sets whether to add loaded metadata at a recording ON Adds OFF Does not add USER CLIP NAME Sets data to be recorded to USER CLIP NAME When RECORD is ON TYPE1 Records setting values of the loaded data TYPE2 Records loaded data and counter values When RECORD is OFF TYPE1 Records the same value as GLOBAL CLIP ID TYPE2 Records the same value as CLIP NAME INITIALIZE Deletes all loaded metadata and ini
355. ted either before or after the power is turned on 85 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling setting data Inserting SD memory cards 1 Open the slot cover 2 Insert the card into the SD memory card slot with the label side of the SD memory card optional upward and close the slot cover NOTE The SD memory card must be inserted with the correct side facing the SD card slot If the SD memory card is hard to insert it may be reversed or upside down Do not force it into the slot Check the orientation of the card before re inserting it On the camera use SD memory cards that are compliant with the SD SDHC or SDXC standards For details on handling SD memory cards refer to Cautions when using SD memory cards page 22 Removing SD memory cards After opening the slot cover and making sure that the busy lamp is not illuminated push the SD memory card further into the main unit and then release This releases the SD memory card from the card slot Remove the SD memory card and close the slot cover Note the following points when using or storing memory cards Avoid high temperature and humidity Avoid water droplets Avoid charging with electricity Store the SD memory card with the card still inserted into the camera and with the slot cover closed Performing operations on SD memory cards To perform operations such as formatting an SD memory card writing setting
356. the CORRECT GAIN switch is on M ON OFF S H COLOR Switches ON OFF of the 15 axis independent color correction where the CORRECT GAIN switch is on lt H gt ON OFF R SAT Corrects red color saturation 63 34 63 R R Mg SAT Corrects the color saturation between red and colors between red and magenta 63 22 63 R Mg SAT Corrects the color saturation between red and magenta 63 20 63 Mg SAT Corrects magenta color saturation 63 6 63 Mg B SAT Corrects the color saturation between magenta and blue 63 5 63 SAT Corrects blue color saturation 63 0 63 B Cy SAT Corrects the color saturation between blue and cyan 63 3 63 Cy SAT Corrects cyan color saturation 63 5 63 Cy G SAT Corrects the color saturation between cyan and green 63 0 63 G SAT Corrects green color saturation 63 6 63 G YI SAT Corrects the color saturation between green and yellow 63 2 63 Yl SAT Corrects yellow color saturation 63 14 63 YI YI R SAT Corrects the color saturation between yellow and colors between yellow and red 63 25 63 SAT Corrects the color saturation between yellow and red 63 28 63 YI R R SAT Corrects the color saturation between colors between yellow and red and red 63 43 63 R PHASE Corrects the red hu
357. the lt gt side Alternatively press the EXIT button while holding down the lt SHIFT gt button MENU CANCEL BACK TO PREV is displayed Fig 4 Push the MARKER SEL gt lt MODE CHECK MENU CANCEL gt switch towards the lt gt side again Alternatively press the EXIT button while holding down the lt SHIFT gt button The changed value returns to the value before changing NOTE You will need to restart the camera if the number of lines and frequency setting of the system change Setting USER MENU 1 Select the main menu gt USER MENU SEL 2 Select and display various items according to level 3 Put checkmarks Vv on the items to be displayed in USER MENU You can select menu items in each item or page You can select up to 64 items Selected items are displayed on the main menu page or item in order For details on items that can be selected refer to Setting items to USER MENU and loading reading the settings to a data file page 170 135 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list Menu list RB GAIN CONTROL Item Description of settings Remark R GAIN AWB PRE Sets the Rch gain when the lt WHITE BAL gt switch is on lt PRST gt Settings made through the menu are disabled 200 0 200 when the remote control unit and extension GAIN AWB PRE Sets the Bch gain when the WHITE BAL switch is on l
358. the main menu FILE gt SETUP DATA SELECT 142 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list VF DISPLAY Item Description of settings Remark VF LCD CHAR Selects whether to display a character on the image of the LCD monitor and viewfinder ON Displays a character on both the viewfinder and LCD monitor VF OFF Does not superimpose on the viewfinder and displays on the LCD monitor LCD OFF Does not superimpose on the LCD monitor and displays on the viewfinder VF MODE Selects a viewfinder image This item is enabled when CAM is set in the main menu SYSTEM SYSTEM MODE MEM In playback mode these are playback images REC SIGNAL When SDI is set playback images are output in the playback mode CAM Always camera images regardless of this setting VF COLOR Selects whether to display viewfinder images in color or in black and white ON Displays in color OFF Displays in black and white playback images thumbnail Screens and menu displays remain in color DISP CONDITION Selects the status display method NORMAL Status is always displayed HOLD Normally status is not displayed Push the MARKER SEL gt lt MODE CHECK MENU CANCEL switch towards the lt MCK MCL gt side to display when the mode check screen is displayed DISP MODE Shows hides camera warning notification displayed in the center of
359. the playback start position during playback from the thumbnail screen RESUME Plays back from the position that playback stopped THUMBNAIL Plays back from the time code of the thumbnail position TC START TC Plays back from the start time code top of the clip Remark PROPERTY DISP Sets simple properties item displayed on the left of the thumbnail when SMALL is selected for THUMBNAIL SIZE USER CLIP Displays user clip names NAME START TC Displays the start time code REC DATE Displays the recording date REC TIME Displays the record time NUM OF Displays the number of audio channels AUDIO CH AUDIO RATE Displays the audio sampling rate AUDIO BIT Displays the audio bitrate CREATOR Displays the person who recorded the clip SHOOTER Displays the videographer PLACE NAME Displays the shooting location PROGRAM Displays the program name NAME SCENE NO Displays scene number TAKE NO Displays take number REPORTER Displays the reporter PURPOSE Displays the purpose of shooting OBJECT Displays the object of shooting START UB Displays the start user bits REC RATE Displays the recording frame rate LAST UP Displays the date of last update DATE LAST UP Displays the last person who updated PERSON MANUFACTURER Displays the equipment manufacturer name SER
360. the table above Dividing clips recorded on P2 cards If P2 cards with a capacity of 8 GB or more are used on the camera recording is automatically continued as another clip when a single continuous recording time exceeds the following times When thumbnails for clips are handled displayed deleted restored etc on P2 devices they can be handled as a single clip Clips may be displayed as separate clips in nonlinear editing software and on a computer When recording on microP2 memory cards that exceed 32 GB using AVC LongG codec recording be continued as the same clip by setting in main menu REC PB REC PB SETUP gt FILE SPLIT Recording format excluding native recording Continuous recording time AVC 1100 1080P Approx 3 min AVC 1100 10801 DVCPRO HD Approx 5 min AVC G50 AVC 150 DVCPRO50 Approx 10 min AVC G25 DVCPRO DV CPS Content Protection System Approx 20 min The microP2 memory card supports the security function Content Protection System that allows encryption formatting to prevent data leak to third parties To use the CPS function set a CPS password to the camera and enable the microP2 memory card authentication and encryption formatting functions An encrypted microP2 memory card will be automatically recognized between devices where the same CPS password is set and recording and playback of the microP2 memory card are enabled For details ref
361. the viewfinder screen These menu items cannot be set when the thumbnail screen is displayed CAMERA CAMERA ID SHUTTER SPEED operated SHUTTER SELECT USER SW SW MODE WHITE BALANCE MODE USER SW GAIN LENS IRIS AGC These are items for changing the settings based on the condition of subject when the camera is These menu items cannot be set when the thumbnail screen is displayed 131 Chapter 7 Menu Operations Setting menu structure CLIP PROPERTY REPOSITION DELETE FORMAT FORMAT STORAGE COPY EXPORT IMPORT REPAIR RE CONNECT EXCH THUMBNAIL EXPLORE AUTHENTICATE CHANGE PARTITION NAME DELETE LAST PARTITION DELETE FOLDER THUMBNAIL SETUP STORAGE COPY SETUP These items are used when performing various tasks such as playing back deleting and copying clips and editing metadata while checking the thumbnail of the clips displayed in the LCD monitor These menu items are enabled when the thumbnail screen is displayed Clip operations such as DELETE or COPY are enabled when the target thumbnail is selected Some items are displayed only in specific situations such as in USB storage mode or on the explorer screen REC PB REC FUNCTION REC PB SETUP PROXY SETUP TC UB REC METADA
362. the white and black balance must be adjusted according to conditions To obtain higher image quality perform the adjustment in the order of AWB white balance adjustment ABB black balance adjustment gt AWB white balance adjustment g NOTE When white or black balance is adjusted while video is disrupted by the generator lock adjustment may not be performed correctly Adjust white or black balance again after video has returned to normal Adjusting the white balance The white balance must be adjusted again when the lighting conditions change Follow the steps below to adjust the white balance automatically a CC FILTER gt lt ND FILTER dial Adjust the amount of light entering the MOS sensor b AUTO W B BAL switch Use to execute the automatic white balance C lt GAIN gt switch Normally set this to O dB If it is too dark set the gain to an appropriate value d lt OUTPUT gt switch Set this switch to CAM e WHITE BAL switch Set this switch to A or B W When the WHITE BAL switch is set to lt A gt 1 Set the GAIN lt OUTPUT gt and WHITE BAL switches 2 Select the CC FILTER gt lt ND FILTER dial setting according to the light conditions For details on setting example of the CC FILTER gt lt ND FILTER dial refer to Shooting and recording playback functions section page 20 3 Place the white pattern at a point where the light conditions match those for the
363. this button to view the playback image using the viewfinder screen or the monitor screen Pressing it during playback pauses playback 24 MON OUT CHARACTER switch page 67 Specifies whether characters are superimposed over the output from SDI OUT2 gt VIDEO OUT gt and lt HDMI gt terminals ON Superimposes characters OFF Does not superimpose characters 25 lt USB2 0 gt terminal sub host Used in future upgrades 26 lt USB2 0 gt terminal device page 185 In the USB device mode the camera can be connected to the computer by the USB 2 0 cable to transfer data In this case recording playback operations and camera shooting are not possible 27 lt USB3 0 gt terminal host page 186 In the USB storage mode connect external hard disk drives etc NOTE For the cable to be connected to this terminal use the double shielded cable When connecting to a USB 3 0 compatible storage device use a cable compliant with the USB 3 0 standard 28 LAN terminal 100BASE TX Used in future upgrades 29 HDMI OUT gt monitor output terminal This is the video output terminal for the monitor Video can be output separately from the lt SDI OUT1 gt terminal according to the setting of the main menu gt I F SETUP gt OUTPUT SEL MONITOR OUT MODE The down conversion signal be selected in OUTPUT SEL gt SDI2 HDMI OUT Up conversion is not supported Superimposing of characters can
364. tializes PROPERTY Checks and corrects loaded metadata This item is enabled while the thumbnail is displayed LANGUAGE Sets the language used to display metadata This items is displayed when NTSC J is VF SETUP ENGLISH JAPANESE selected in OPTION MENU gt AREA SETTING are factory settings OUTPUT SEL Item Description of settings Remark OUTPUT ITEM Sets the character content to superimpose on the output signal of the lt SDI The time code display position moves up and OUT1 gt terminal and monitor output terminal SDI OUT2 lt HDMI OUT gt and down based on the camera ID position VIDEO OUT MENU ONLY Displays only on the menu Normally nothing is displayed TC Displays the time code Menu is displayed on the menu STATUS Displays all items that are the same as the character displayed on the viewfinder Menu is displayed on the menu SDI OUT1 Turns SDI OUT1 gt terminal output ON OFF ON Performs output OFF Stops output SDI OUT1 MODE Selects SDI OUT1 gt terminal output signals MEM In playback mode these are playback images CAM When the main menu SYSTEM SYSTEM MODE REC SIGNAL is set to CAM output is always camera images SDI OUT1 CHAR Selects whether to superimpose characters on SDI OUT1 gt terminal output The content of characters to superimpose is the images same as the
365. time code selector switch Sets the advance mode for the built in time code generator Used to advance the time code continuously regardless of the P2 card recording operation Set to this position to for example set the lt F RUN gt 1 time code to the current time or externally lock the time code SET Used to set the time code or user bits lt R RUN gt Used to advance the time code only during recording Records continuously time codes on P2 cards that have been spliced together 5 SDI IN terminal page 65 Input reference signals when setting the generator lock on the camera unit or when externally locking the time code NOTE Be sure to set the SDI signals to input to signals of the same format selected in the system mode on the camera 6 lt IN terminal page 65 Input reference signals when setting the generator lock on the camera unit or when externally locking the time code 7 TC OUT gt terminal page 65 Connect to the time code input terminal of the external device when locking the time code of the external device to the time code on the camera 8 lt TC IN gt terminal page 65 Input the reference time code to this terminal when the time code is locked 25 Chapter 2 Description of Parts Warning and status display section Warning and status display section E ae 3 pao 4 2 410 0 EEN 1 Display window Displays
366. ting a shot mark and text memo to the clip Copying part of a clip using the text memo Changing the thumbnail image using the text memo Format P2 cards and SD memory cards Upload and edit clip metadata from the SD memory card Thumbnail screen Press the lt THUMBNAIL gt button to display the thumbnail screen on the LCD monitor Press the lt THUMBNAIL gt button again to return to the regular display Also when changing from the regular display to the thumbnail screen display all clips will be displayed on the thumbnail screen Press the MENU button on the thumbnail screen to enable thumbnail menu operations CLIP NAME 00486 PROPERTY 00 04 36 14 2013 MAY 01 Avcom mio0 1080 60i 1 Status message SHED 19 nce 13 15 00 04 36 14 00 05 02 21 00 05 47 04 00 05 21 29 1000 0006 0007 0008 T 5 00 00 00 00 00 01 55 11 00 02 05 10 00 04 44 21 6 0009 0010 T TU 00 05 53 04 0011 00 05 10 07 0012 a wt 00 05 29 20 00 05 34 01 00 00 10 26 0029 00 00 00 00 10 A message showing the process status is displayed UPDATING and the icon fS are displayed while the screen is being refreshed 2 Card slot storage device and LAN status display The status of the P2 card storage device and LAN scheduled update connection status are displayed as follows White The card slot number in which the P2 card is inserted is displayed in white
367. tion screen is displayed 5 Select YES and press the jog dial button or SET button The file is saved and the file list is updated NO TITLE EXIT EXIT SETU EXIT SETU oul 2 LENS2 Reading lens files from internal memory CAC CLE LENS FILE S SCENE SD CARD PR FORMAT SD LOAD USER DATA v 1 Select LOAD in the main menu FILE LENS FILE and press the jog dial button or SET button The list of lens files currently saved in camera memory is displayed 2 Select the file name to read and press the jog dial button or SET button The confirmation screen is displayed 3 Select YES and press the jog dial button or SET button Loading of the file begins 4 When the completion message is displayed press the jog dial button or SET button 90 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling setting data Writing and reading lens files to and from SD memory card Eight lens files stored to internal memory on the camera can be written to SD memory card as a card file with a single title Eight titles can be written to SD memory card Lens files written to SD memory card can be read to internal memory as a written title containing eight lens files The following shows the relationship between lens files stored to internal memory and lens files written to SD memory card Internal memory 8 lens files Up to eight lens f
368. ton Fig 1 Settings of the uploaded metadata can be checked 3 While checking the settings for the metadata use the cursor buttons to move the cursor over the item where you want to change the setting and press the SET button A software keyboard screen is displayed allowing you to modify the setting Fig 2 While holding down the lt SHIFT gt button press the cursor buttons to move to the beginning or end of the setting details to be changed Setting whether to record the uploaded metadata Set ON OFF in the main menu REC PB gt REC METADATA RECORD This item is set to OFF in the factory settings Selecting the USER CLIP NAME recording method In the main menu REC PB REC METADATA USER CLIP NAME select the USER CLIP NAME recording method from either TYPE1 or TYPE2 E factory settings Status of clip metadata USER CLIP NAME to be recorded When clip metadata has been loaded Uploaded data When no clip metadata has been loaded or when setting disables recording of loaded clip Same as GLOBAL CLIP ID metadata 117 Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips Thumbnail operations W TYPE2 Status of clip metadata USER CLIP NAME to be recorded When clip metadata has been loaded Uploaded data COUNT value When no clip metadata has been loaded or when setting disables recording of loaded clip Same as CLIP NAME meta
369. ts flashing when the battery voltage drops and before the battery charge starts to run out It is illuminated after the battery is completely flat To prevent operation from being interrupted replace the battery before it is nearly flat For details refer to Warning system page 194 4 SAVE lamp During regular operation The lamp is out When SAVE LED is set to P2CARD Flashes when there is little capacity on the P2 card when P2CARD is set to in the main menu VF gt VF INDICATOR SAVE LED For details refer to Warning system page 194 Configuration of status display on viewfinder screen The screen displayed in normal status is displayed as shown below AV 1100 2 M599 mn 146v 1080 5994i 211 9 9 min GAIN 0 dB 31 SYSTEM ERROR lt LCD gt 5 TCG 00 00 00 F 1 g983 2 W F56 70 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Viewfinder status display 6 on viewfinder screen To select display items on the viewfinder screen switch ON OFF or the type of the respective item in the main menu VF gt VF INDICATOR For details refer to Setting menu basic operations page 134 PAINT EXIT EXIT VF EXTENDER CAME VF MA SHUTTER VF US REC f WHITE I F SE MODE GAIN FILE LED IRIS MAINTENANC CAMERA ID BAR SYSTEM ID POSITION UPPER L USER MENUS DATE TIME OFF
370. ttings to a data 170 Chapter8 Connecting to External Devices 183 Linking to External Devices s 184 Connecting the external device to the lt USB2 0 gt terminal device Connecting the external device to the lt USB3 0 gt terminal host Connecting the video and monitor Recording images of external 1 5 0 0 Connection function via lt USB2 0 gt or lt USB3 0 gt terminals Connecting to a computer the USB device USB storage mode Connecting to the remote control unit AJ RC10G Connecting to the extension control unit AG EC4G Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspection 189 Inspections before shooting Preparing to inspect Inspecting the camera unit Inspecting the memory recording functions Charging the built in battery Warning Warnings description list GPO COUG anti Warning information display Warning error displays in the thumbnail operation menu operation and USB storage mode Updating the camera firmware Chapter 10 Specification 200 Dimensions and specifications 201 Dimensions Specifications Details of the connector signals Chapter 1 Overview Before using the camera read this chapter and c
371. ttons lt USER MAIN gt lt USER1 gt lt USER2 gt to which the auto tracking white balance function is assigned again or select the WHITE BAL switch However when the auto tracking white balance function is set to lt B gt of the WHITE BAL switch the function cannot be canceled with the USER buttons USER MAIN gt lt USER1 gt lt USER2 gt NOTE This function does not guarantee 10096 accuracy for the white balance Note that the tracking performance relative to changes in ambient lighting and white balance performance has been given a certain degree of latitude Manual setting of color temperature White balance can be adjusted manually according to the color temperature setting The manual color temperature setting can be set for each position of lt PRST gt A and lt B gt of the WHITE BAL switch For the color setting set COLOR TEMP PRE AWB A TEMP and AWB B TEMP in the main menu CAMERA gt WHITE BALANCE MODE There are two selections available for color temperature adjustment of COLOR TEMP PRE VAR and 3 2K 5 6K e VAR This can be set from lt 2300K to gt 15000K e 3 2K 5 6K This be set to 3200K or 5600K g NOTE Even if color temperature is set manually the newly adjusted color temperature is recorded to the position of the WHITE BAL gt switch at that time if white balance is automatically adjusted The value of the color temperature also changed whe
372. ult your dealer 11 Connector plug 12 Lock ring 13 Microphone holder 14 Viewfinder stopper Used for attaching and detaching the viewfinder W Mounting a large lens If there is no room between the top surface of the lens and the bottom surface of the viewfinder the position of the slide rail can be shifted slightly upwards by repositioning the screw a Normal positions of securing screws b By repositioning and securing the three screws at these locations the position of the slide rail can be shifted upwards by approx 8 mm 84 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Handling setting data Handling setting data Setting data file configuration The camera has six file data areas Factory data This area stores factory settings It cannot be rewritten by menu operation User data This area stores values set by menu operation As default data factory data is stored here Current data This area stores the operation status of the camera Setting values in this area are changed by menu operation Scene file Four scene files are provided Lens file Eight lens files are provided Eight of these files can be saved together as a single file on SD memory card CAC file This area stores 32 chromatic aberration compensation data i SD memory card 1 Setup data CAC FILE SD CARD LOAD LOAD SETUP DATA SD CARD 4 SAVE SE
373. unction will be recorded Shot mark recording function Shot mark is the mark added to the thumbnail of each clip to distinguish that clip from others Only clips with shot marks attached can be displayed or played back Adding shot marks 1 Make sure that SHOT MARK is set to in the main menu CAMERA USER SW SHOT MARK U3 If itis set the shot mark function is assigned to the lt SHOT MARKER button The shot mark function can be assigned to the RET button To assign the function to the RET button set SHOT MARK the main menu gt CAMERA gt SW MODE RET SW 2 During recording or a pause after recording press the button to which the shot mark is assigned MARK ON is displayed and the shot mark is added to the most recently recorded clip Another press of the button displays MARK OFF and the shot mark disappears NOTE When the shot mark is added during a recording pause it is added to the clip recorded immediately before Shot marks can also be added while the thumbnail is being displayed page 113 Shot marks cannot be added during loop recording If an operation is invalid SHOT MARK INVALID is displayed when the button is pressed During playback setting or canceling the shot mark is not available While pausing the playback setting or canceling the shot mark is available To add shot marks to combined clips such as those recorded over multiple P2 cards or delete them t
374. uorescent lighting or other discharge tube horizontal stripes might appear on screen If this happens this can be improved by adjusting the shutter speed 53 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Setting the electronic shutter Asubject that quickly crosses the camera may appear distorted when shot This is due to the method applied for reading the signals from the pickup device MOS sensor and is not a malfunction Shutter mode is off while the digital super gain function is active Viewfinder screen display for shutter For details refer to Viewfinder status display page 70 Setting the synchro scan mode Follow the steps below to operate lt SYNCHRO SCAN adjustment button lt SHUTTER gt switch 1 Press the lt SHUTTER gt switch from the ON side towards the SEL side to set the camera to synchro scan mode 2 Operate the lt SYNCHRO SCAN adjustment button to switch the mode continuously The shutter speed display in the synchro scan mode can be switched between seconds and angle in the main menu VF gt VF DISPLAY gt SYNCHRO SCAN DISP 54 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Flash band compensation FBC function Flash band compensation FBC function The camera is equipped with a function for compensating and reducing band like interference called flash band that occurs due to the MOS pickup device when shooting in environments w
375. urns to the first card and recording is continued while erasing existing data already saved on that card For details refer to Dividing clips recorded on P2 cards page 33 1st card 2nd card Before loop recording starts C No recorded content Content recorded Start recording 7 ant SAL 2 7 1 Check the settings of each item the main menu gt SYSTEM SYSTEM MODE For details on system modes in which the loop recording function can be used refer to the table in System modes and recording functions page 47 For details on menu operations refer to Setting menu basic operations page 134 2 Set LOOP in the main menu REC PB gt REC FUNCTION RECORDING 3 Set the following related items the main menu REC PB REC FUNCTION HOLD Holding the REC FUNCTION setting after the power is turned off 4 Press the REC button 38 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback Special recording functions Recording is started To stop recording press the REC button To clear settings either turn off the power or set NORMAL in the main menu REC PB gt REC FUNCTION gt RECORDING LOOP is displayed in the P2 remaining card capacity at the bottom of the display window and top of the viewfinder The LOOP indicator flashes when loop recording is not possible due to insufficient memory NOTE When this function is used each P2 card
376. value of the flashing digit is decremented by one 9 Press the HOLD button to display TIME on the display window 1 0 Set hours minutes seconds h min s by the cursor buttons 11 Set the lt TCG gt switch to lt F RUN gt or lt R RUN gt When this switch is switched the internal clock starts to operate W Time zone table Time Region Time Region Time Region Time Region difference difference difference difference 00 00 Greenwich 06 30 01 00 Central Europe 07 30 00 30 07 00 Denver 01 30 08 00 Beijing 01 00 Azores 07 30 02 00 Eastern Europe 08 30 01 30 08 00 Los Angeles 02 30 09 00 Tokyo 02 00 Mid Atlantic 08 30 03 00 Moscow 09 30 Darwin 02 30 09 00 Alaska 03 30 Tehran 10 00 Guam 03 00 Buenos Aires 09 30 Marquesas Islands 04 00 Abu Dhabi 10 30 Lord Howe Island 03 30 Newfoundland 10 00 Hawaii 04 30 Kabul 11 00 Solomon Islands 04 00 Halifax 10 30 05 00 Islamabad 11 30 Norfolk Island 04 30 11 00 Midway Islands 05 30 Bombay 12 00 New Zealand 05 00 New York 11 30 06 00 Dakar 12 45 Chatham Islands 05 30 12 00 Kwajalein Atoll 06 30 Yangon 13 00 06 00 Chicago 00 30 07 00 Bangkok NOTE Be sure to make this setting before using the camera for the first time After do not change the setting during use Thumbnail operatio
377. vel 50dB 60dB REAR MIC CH2 4 LVL Selects the rear microphone input level 50dB 60dB REAR LINE IN LVL Selects the rear line input level 3dB OdB AdB AUDIO OUT LVL Selects the audio output level 3dB OdB AdB HEADROOM Sets the headroom standard level 18dB 20dB 161 factory settings Chapter 7 Menu Operations Menu list Item Description of settings Remark WIRELESS WARN Sets whether to display a warning when the reception status of the wireless microphone receiver is poor ON OFF WIRELESS TYPE Selects the type of wireless microphone receiver SINGLE Selects a single channel type wireless microphone receiver DUAL Selects a double channel type wireless microphone receiver are factory settings USB LAN Item Description of settings Remark USB MODE SELECT Sets the camera operation mode when an external device is connected to the This item cannot be changed when USB MODE USB is set to ON STORAGE Sets the mode to use to connect an external hard disk drive or other device DEVICE Selects the USB mode when connecting the camera to a computer via USB 2 0 and using the P2 card as mass storage USB MODE Turns operation of the mode selected in USB MODE SELECT ON OFF Once the power is turned o
378. w has zoomed in and then out So we recommend use of this function in shooting environments where flash strobe lighting is anticipated Even if flash strobe lighting occurs sufficient flash band compensation function effect may not be obtained in some shooting environments Flash band compensation function operation conditions The flash band compensation function can be used under the conditions that the camera is in 59 94i 59 94P 50i or 50P mode and neither of the scan reverse digital zoom and digital super gain functions is operated Even if the flash band compensation function is enabled the flash band compensation function is forcibly disabled if the camera is changed to a mode where the flash band compensation function cannot be used To use the function again return to a mode where the function can be used and press the USER buttons USER MAIN gt lt USER1 gt lt USER2 gt to turn on the flash band compensation function The flash band compensation function is disabled once the power is turned off 55 Chapter 4 Adjustments and Settings for Recording Assigning functions to lt USER gt buttons Assigning functions to USER buttons Selected functions can be assigned to the USER MAIN lt USER1 gt lt USER2 gt lt SHOT MARKER gt and TEXT MEMO gt buttons Set the function to be assigned to each by USER MAIN USER1 USER2 SHOT MARK U3 and TEXT MEMO U4 in the main menu CA
379. want to display using the cursor buttons 3 Press the SET button Setting the clip information display You can customize the clip information display contents according to your preference 1 Select DATA DISPLAY in the main menu CLIP THUMBNAIL SETUP 2 Place the cursor on the item you want to set using the cursor buttons 3 Press the SET button Setting items that display properties You can set simple properties item displayed on the left of the thumbnail ALL CLIP NAME 0049N1 PROPERTY 00 05 02 21 00 04 36 14 05 02 00 05 47 04 00 05 21 29 0007 0008 2013 02 gt 1 NUM OF AUDIO CH 11 59 29 AUDIO RATE AUDIO BIT CREATOR SHOOTER PLACE v 00 00 00 00 00 01 55 11 00 02 05 10 00 04 44 21 0009 0010 09011 0012 T 1 a i Fa LAN wT a 00 05 53 04 00 05 34 01 00 05 10 07 00 05 29 20 as Een ASTU 00 00 09 05 0029 Fig 1 1 Open the thumbnail screen Fig 1 2 Select PROPERTY DISP in the main menu CLIP THUMBNAIL SETUP 3 Press the lt SET gt button to enter into the item menu Fig 2 The selected item has a check mark on it 11 Chapter 6 Thumbnail Operations for Clips Thumbnail operations 4 Press the lt SET gt button Pressing the lt SET gt button will check unchecked items and at the same time uncheck items that are already checked NOTE Property items can be displayed by sele
380. wfinder TURN POWER OFF and P2 CARD are displayed Alarm Sounds continuously Warning content An error occurred in the camera built in memory because the P2 card being accessed was ejected Recording or playback operation Action to take Does not operate Follow the message to turn the power off once and turn the power on again Ensure that there is no error in the clips on the ejected card and repair the clips as necessary 4 Battery end low voltage input Display in display window Seven battery charge level bars flash Warning lamp Lights Tally lamp Flashes once per second Viewfinder The BATT lamp is illuminated if the viewfinder has the BATT lamp EMP flashes in the battery charge level display flashes for BATT STAT and ENDURA STAT Alarm Sounds continuously Warning content The battery has run out Recording or playback operation Stops Action to take Change the batteries If the external AC adaptor is inserted from the EXT DC IN terminal the warning will be released 5 P2card end Display in display window Warning lamp Seven media charge level bars flash It stays illuminated until some operation is performed after recording Tally lamp It continues to flash four times per second until some operation is performed after recording The END display flashes in the P2 remaining charge display Viewfinder If the viewfin
381. y page 70 P2 card recording time W P2 cards supported on the camera Optional P2 and microP2 memory cards with a capacity of 4 GB to 64 GB can be used with the camera As of September 2013 NOTE AJ P2C002SG 2 GB cards cannot be used When AVC Intra 100 in 1080 59 94P or 1080 50P mode is selected you cannot record to the following P2 cards P2 memory cards of R A or E series The driver installed on the camera may be required to be updated depending on the type of P2 card page 199 Refer to our support desk at the following website for the latest information not included in these operating instructions http pro av panasonic net W P2 card recording times Example when a 64 GB card is used System mode Recording format codec Recording time 1080P AVC 1100 Approx 32 min 1100 Approx 64 min 1080i AVC G25 Approx 256 min DVCPRO50 Approx 128 min 480i 576i DV Approx 256 min NOTE The above table shows values for regular recording With native recording even longer recording times are available depending on the system mode In the case of 32 GB P2 cards the recording time becomes 1 2 of the above recording times in the case of 16 GB P2 cards the recording time becomes 1 4 and in the case of 8 GB P2 cards the recording time becomes 1 8 Indicated capacities include management and other area so the space available for recording is less than the values in
382. y data cannot be recorded to the SD memory card even when the main menu REC PB gt PROXY SETUP gt REC MEDIA P2 amp SD is set SD WR ERR is displayed In that case check the SD memory card For details refer to Error displays about proxy data recordings page 43 Data deleted as a result of formatting cannot be restored Always check the data before formatting Formatting SD memory cards 1 Insert the SD memory card into the camera 2 Select YES the main menu FILE FORMAT SD CARD This completes formatting the SD memory card Proxy data recording time approximate Recording mode Total recording rate ert 5 STD 2CH MP4 Approx 1650 kbps Approx 78 min SHQ 2CH MOV Approx 5060 kbps Approx 25 min HQ 2CH MOV Approx 1650 kbps Approx 78 min HQ 4CH MOV Approx 1780 kbps Approx 72 min LOW 2CH MOV Approx 950 kbps Approx 135 min These are reference values for continuous recording with Panasonic products The recording time may differ depending on the scene or the number of clips Checking the proxy data indicator is displayed for the material clips with the proxy data recorded The detailed information of the recorded proxy data can be viewed in the clip property For details on operations refer to Checking detailed information of the proxy data page 43 The proxy data is recorded to the P2 card or SD memory card as a video audio file and real time

Operating Instructions

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents